Home

FACILITY MANUAL Air Traffic Control

1. 5 Feb 15 Change 1 ATCFacO 372210 MCAS NEW RIVER FIX NAME a LOCATION ASSOCIATED PROCEDURE LAT LONG AMRUW I NCA 188 1 6 ILS or LOC DME RWY 1 34 41 33 48 077 26 12 06 BADAD IAF RNAV RWY 1 34 27 20 01 077 30 11 26 CATEL RNAV RWY 1 34 31 32 33 077 26 07 03 DITTO 201 15 4 TACAN RWY 1 34 27 23 80 077 30 36 43 JEMET IF IAF RNAV RWY 23 NCA 34 48 55 67 077 18 51 11 JOMSU NCA 244 2 RWY 5 34 41 18 48 077 28 25 71 JUBIG NCA 177 5 RWY 1 34 37 30 72 077 25 15 71 KEANN IF IAF RNAV RWY 19 34 52 22 70 077 26 12 30 KERME 177 1 RWY 1 34 41 26 71 077 26 11 19 LENDL FAF RNAV RWY 1 34 37 31 17 077 26 11 68 NAGME I NCA 188 7 3 ILS or LOC DME RWY 1 34 31 45 91 077 26 11 58 NAKJA RNAV RWY 23 34 41 17 45 077 24 28 27 NAPIE NCA 019 5 TACAN RWY 19 NCA 34 47 20 68 077 25 15 57 NOLPE NCA 177 4 TACAN RWY 1 34 38 29 72 077 25 29 57 ONIDE FAF RNAV RWY 23 34 46 05 70 077 22 17 20 OSNEE NCA 309 5 TACAN RWY 23 NCA 34 45 00 37 077 31 37 14 OYODA I NCA 188 4 5 ILS or LOC DME RWY 1 34 36 45 88 077 26 11 82 PIDKE NCA 201 12 TACAN RWY 1 34 30 42 94 077 29 41 06 POSTY NCA 019 1 TACAN RWY 19 NCA 34 43 24 71 077 26 11 18 RAPME NCA 042 5 TACAN RWY 23
2. 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q MCAS CHERRY POINT FIX NAME a LOCATION ASSOCIATED PROCEDURE LAT LONG SAPLE IAF RNAV RWY 23R SHAKL SK NKT 154 015 HI TACAN Y RWY 32L 34 41 49 24 076 42 03 18 TARHL TT NKT 154 006 TACAN RWY 32L 34 49 12 70 076 48 18 45 TBOLT GSB 145 018 HI TACAN ILS RWY 26 GSB 35 06 54 06 077 43 19 95 VENLY NKT 154 012 HI TACAN Z Y RWY 32L 34 44 17 10 076 44 08 15 WADEL TW 244 4 1 TACAN RWY 5 34 40 11 21 077 30 26 30 WALLO ISO 219 FAY 102 V56 34 52 35 24 077 57 44 89 WASEB ws RNAV RWY 23R 35 02 38 18 076 42 26 08 WEDUV IF RNAV RWY 5R 34 45 45 37 077 03 08 38 WHISKEY PTW NKT 063 024 5 IFR BOMBING WIDGE ILM 050 017 5 V139 34 33 50 10 077 37 57 10 WILUN ISO 130 010 V45 35 16 30 29 077 23 29 70 BEAUFORT MICHAEL J SMITH FIELD FIX NAME ud LOCATION ASSOCIATED PROCEDURE LAT LONG IXBOF MAP RNAV RWY 26 84 42 49 84 076 43 36 77 ZIVPO MAP RNAV RWY 21 34 39 34 31 076 42 02 74 WIXDI MAP RNAV RWY 21 34 42 59 24 076 50 49 30 CIBAG FAF RNAV RWY 8 34 42 52 11 076 43 29 99 CIGOR IF RNAV LOC RWY 26 34 48 21 64 076 26 58 28 EXAVE FAF RNAV RWY 32 34 41 44 89 076 36 44 19 FACTO MRH 039 4 NDB RWY 21 34 47 42 78 076 36 57 15 FOBEK IF IAF RNAV RWY 3 MRH 34 37 39 45 076 49 50 18 GERIT MRH 039 010 NDB RWY 21 34 52 50 98 076 33 14 02 HOPEM FAF RNAV RWY 21 34 46 59 38 076 37 48 07 ISUJU FAF RNAV RW
3. Relief briefings complete and accurate F Phraseology Standard phraseology is adhered to Voice quality Speech rate G Equipment D Operating Methods and Equipment status information maintained Computer entries correct Adjustment of control display correct Capabilities fully utilized understood H Other Specify I Supervisor Only Crew coordination effectiveness Ability to lead motivate supervise Overall knowledge CREW OFFICER BRANCH CHIEF MCAS Form 3722 17 09 2014 Supersedes Previous Edition G 1 8 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q s F OJTI COMMENTS DAY 1 OJTI INITIALS SIGNATURE F OJTI COMMENTS DAY 2 OJTI INITIALS SIGNATURE F OJTI COMMENTS DAY 3 OJTI INITIALS SIGNATURE F OJTI COMMENTS DAY 4 REF LLL OFTIINITIALSSIGNATURE n p o OJTIINIALSSIGNATURE OOO F OJIIINTILSSIGNATURE O O S REF ETA p 000 mmm OJTI INITIALS SIGNATURE STUDENT SIGNATURE STUDENT COMMENTS Initial one Iconcur without comment I wish to make to following comments See below STUDENT COMMENTS MCAS Form 3722 1
4. n 199 64 eoe 801 ooo 01902 ad av 994 ii os 052 orsz s0 or3o r 01 auoea uu s oo ule mem S dua a INT 02 97695 887 oso or3o er orzewsr al HL aos aos rN zen HBSS ne i LEE ordnen mic ru sss jensi4 0 1654 ejejduio s noH svo5 aey aqa qd 04 100 8 Sui uodeu weis m 170 Figure 2 3 23 2 3 27 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q MCAS CHERRY POINT AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY TRAINING MONTHLY REPORT JUNE 2010 Produced and Compiled by ATC Training Support Figure 2 3 24 2 3 28 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q MCAS CHERRY POINT AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL ANNUAL REPORT FOR 2009 Produced and Compiled by ATC Training Support Figure 2 3 25 2 3 29 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL ANNUAL SKILL CHECK FORM Controller name DATE Controller birth date Flight Physical Scheduled Date Flight Physical Completion Date Annual Skill Check Position Comment completed date completed by satisfactory unsatisfactory not applicable Radar Branch Approach East Approach North Approach West Arrival Control Final Control Flig
5. 6 4 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q 15 Not used 16 ATD RS time 17 FDIO departure message 18 Not used c Overflights 1 Aircraft identification 2 Revision number FDIO 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or position that requested a strip be printed 3 NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 4 Computer identification number required 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Coordination fix indicator 7 Overflight coordination FDIO 8 Estimated time of arrival at the coordination fix point outs 9 Altitude and route of flight through the terminal area 9A Headings speed adjustment remarks 10 Clearance delivered B 11 Not used 12 Not used 13 Not used AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 14 Not used 15 Not used 16 Time entered airspace RS time 17 Not used 18 Time radar handoff comm transfer or leaving airspace NOTE A full route strip may be used for pointouts REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 3 3 6 402 NCA DEPARTURES Departures from NCA will be cleared to destination via NCA R 325 to intercept V70 except aircraft inbound to inbounds from will be cleared to join the NCA R 066 then to intercept the NKT R 266 at 13 DME Distances for airspace protection are listed in figure 6 4 2 6 403 MRH OPERATIONS a All depar
6. AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q APPENDIX E GUIDE FOR POSITION LOGS FAA Form 7230 10 INTRODUCTION This appendix contains instructions for completing FAA Form 7230 10 Position Log The Position Log is used on all operating positions to document position training see Figure E 1 Position currency will no longer be documented on these logs but will be collected maintained and reported through the VIDS All OJT OJF Skill Checks and simulated training shall be documented on this form Position Log 1 FACILITY ID 2 POSITION IDENTIFIER 3 POS TYPE 4 DATE Where Combined m 8 10 Position TIME ON INITIALS TIME OFF CODE 6 POSITION IDENTIFIER CODE C ATCS ATA M Trainee Developmental Monitoring S Supervisor Staff Spec Trainee Developmental Certification T Trainee Developmental Evaluation FAA FORM 7230 10 6 94 NSN 0052 00 024 6102 PAGE 1 Figure E 1 E 1 1 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q USING THE FORM Complete the following items Field numbers correspond to the numbered fields on the form Field 1 FACILITY ID Enter NKT Field2 POSITION IDENTIFIER Enter the appropriate VIDS Code starting from the left as listed below STANDARD POSITION C
7. Supplement United States 1 2 1 VFR Supplement VFR Supplement United States 2 Flight Information Handbook ii GP General Planning 1 Area Planning 1 Special Use Airspace Military Training Routes 1 1 2 Europe Africa Middle East i AP2A SUA Europe Pacific Australasia Antarctica T id i AP3A SUA Pacific ii Eastern Europe Asia id T AP4A SUA Eastern Europe Asia Low Alt US Vol 1 Low Alt US Vol 2 Low Alt US Vol 3 2 7 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q PUBLICATION NAME DESCRIPTION TRNG RDR TWR Low Alt US Vol 5 Low Alt US Vol 6 Low Alt US Vol 7 Low Alt US Vol 8 Low Alt US Vol 9 Low Alt US Vol 10 Low Alt US Vol 11 Low Alt US Vol 12 Low Alt US Vol 13 Low Alt US Vol 14 Low Alt US Vol 15 X X XX XX Low Alt US Vol 16 Low Alt US Vol 17 2 1 Low Alt US Vol 18 Low Alt US Vol 19 Low Alt US Vol 20 Low Alt US Vol 21 Low Alt US Vol 22 High Alt US Northwest X X High Alt US Southwest High Alt US East 2 1 Enroute Low US Chart L1 2 Enroute Low US Chart L3 4 Enroute Low US Chart L5 6 Enroute Low US Chart L7 8 Enroute Low US Chart L9 10 Enroute Low US
8. Air Traffic Control Facility Airfield Operations Department MCAS Cherry Point North Carolina Includes Change 12 Prepared by the E 15 Aug 2015 P c Training Specialist LS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY Airfield Operations Department Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point North Carolina 28533 5010 ATCFacO P3722 1Q ATCFO 1 Aug 13 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY ORDER P3722 1Q From Air Traffic Control Facility Officer To Air Traffic Control Facility Personnel Subj AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Ref a NAVAIR 00 80T 114 1 Purpose This Manual is promulgated under the provisions of reference a which requires standardized facility operating procedures 2 Cancellation ATCFacO P3722 1P and all of its changes 3 Effective Date This manual is effective 15 Aug 13 4 Scope This Manual addresses Air Traffic Control matters concerning the Air Traffic Control Facility MCAS Cherry Point North Carolina It is applicable to all assigned personnel and is designed to assist controllers in achieving high levels of qualification and proficiency However no attempt has been made to provide all required information into one manual therefore controllers are expected to make maximum use of all other applicable source material available within the facility 5 Action All Air Traffic Controllers shall comply with the standard operating procedures prescribed in this Manual a
9. STRIP MARKING LOCATION ASSOCIATED PROCEDURE LAT LONG FIX NAME 2 6 7 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 5 Feb 15 1 P3722 1Q 2 605 INTERFACILITY LANDLINES LINE STATION USE ACTION GP 1852 ZDC CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER VOICE CALL DIAL 70 DIAL 59 DIAL 70 COMBINED SECTORS DIAL 24 ILM HIGH SECTOR DIAL 93 CENTER STORED FLIGHT PLANS DIAL 44 SECTOR SUPERVISOR DIAL 22 MISSIONS DIAL 66 GP 1732 SYSTEMS ENGINEER SOFTWARE DIAL 88 SYSTEMS ENGINEER HARDWARE DIAL 00 NVF GIANT KILLER SECONDARY VOICE CALL NCA TOWER VOICE OR DIAL 03 NTU TOWER APPROACH VOICE CALL ORF SEARCH AND RESCUE VOICE CALL TMU DIAL 77 AIR FORCE DIAL 83 NAVY DIAL 84 SAME AS GP 1732 PLUS THE FOLLOWING FSS DATA DIAL 73 RDU FSS IN FLIGHT DIAL 98 FSS SUPERVISOR DIAL 96 pu ILM APPROACH DIAL 20 NTU APPROACH DIAL 33 ECG TOWER DIAL 86 NVF GIANT KILLER SECONDARY DIAL 80 ORF APPROACH DIAL 76 EWN TOWER DIAL 02 TOWER DIAL 03 GP 659 NCA GCA DIAL 04 MATCALS DIAL 05 GP 630 NUM TOWER GCA AUTO RING GP 104 NCA CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER VOICE CALL GP 4040 ILM CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER VOICE CALL GP 4041 GSB CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER VOICE CALL GP 50 LEJEUNE BLACKBURN RANGE CONTROL PREEMPTIVE PRIORITY M a GIANT KILLER PRIMARY VOICE CALL VACAPES AREA COORDINATOR
10. d NAVMC 3500 94 T amp R Directive Marine Air Traffic Control M SHARP M SHARP Software User s Manual d si NAVAIR 00 80R 14 Aircraft Firefighting and Rescue NAVAIR 00 80T 104 NATOPS Landing Signals Officer Manual NAVAIR 00 80T 105 CV NATOPS Manual id NAVAIR 00 80T 114 ATC NATOPS Manual 1 1 NAVAIR 00 80T 115 Expeditionary Airfields and MCAS ll NAVAIR 51 50 2 Airfield Marking and Lighting 1 NAVFAC P 80 3 Appendix E Airfield Safety Clearances i 1500 3 Tower Visibility Observers 1 Weather Observations and Reports a OPNAVINST 3500 39 Operational Risk Management ORM bl E OPNAV 3501 360 DRRS N i OPNAV 3710 7 General NATOPS Manual OPNAV 3721 5 NAALS Program OPNAV 3722 16 Terminal Instrument Procedures TERPS OPNAV 3722 35 Baseline Planning Criteria 3750 6 Naval Aviation Safety Program m d OPNAV 3770 2 Airspace Procedures and Planning Manual OPNAVINST 5100 23 Navy Safety and Occupational Health SECNAV M 3210 1 Records Management Manual id id SECNAV 5216 5 Naval Correspondence Manual i SECNAV 5720 42 Freedom of Information Act SPAWARINST 5100 9 Navy Shore Electronics Safety Precautions 3 260 01 Airfield amp Heliport Planning and Design m ii MMT TAC SOP Marine ATC Mobile Team SOP AirStaO P12000 6 Civilian Personnel Manual 1 AirStaO P3140 2 Destru
11. 4 204 POSITION EVALUATIONS ANNUAL SKILL CHECK position qualified controllers including SATCSs and Branch Chiefs are required to be evaluated for performance annually The crew SATCS shall ensure all controllers are observed on all positions of operations for which the controller is qualified during the individual s birth month using MCAS Form 3722 24 Branch chiefs may complete these skill checks upon request of the REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 3 1 2 ATC Facility Manual paragraph 4 309 4 205 TOWER VISIBILITY OBSERVERS b Facility Watch Officers FWOs shall coordinate with the controllers that require REFERENCE NAVMETOCOMINST 1500 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 4 2 4 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 3 ATC TRAINING PROGRAM 4 300 GENERAL This section establishes requirements and procedures for standardization of instruction and evaluation of the OJT and position qualification process 4 301 DEFINITIONS a Qualification Skill Check An assessment used to determine if a trainee demonstrates the knowledge and skill to qualify on an operating position and to work under general supervision b Trainee Title applies to all Marines and civilians within the facility OJT program On the Job Familiarization OJE Time that a trainee is assigned to monitor specialists w
12. briefed upon arrival on Safety Procedures 3 101 ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD a The potential shock hazard in the ATC Facility is significant because of the high voltage associated with radar and tower equipment Should a victim be receiving a holding shock secure the high voltage immediately via the main circuit breaker See Figures 3 1 1 and 3 1 2 ACCESS b If the high voltage cannot be deactivated remove the victim immediately observing the following precautions EMERGENCY CUTOFF BUTTONS Figure 3 1 1 BREAK ROOM FDIO 0 EMERGENCY CUTOFF BUTTONS Figure 3 1 2 3 1 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 1 Protect material and yourself with dry insulating 2 Use a buckleless belt or clothing such as a shirt or trousers to free the victim from the live wire WARNING Do not touch the victim until completely clear of the shock hazard 3 Immediately after securing power or freeing the victim apply first aid if necessary REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 5 200 and 6 200 3 102 FIRE BILL Fire Bills are posted in the radar room control tower break rooms classrooms and office spaces REFERENCE MCO P11000 11 ASO P11320 7 ATCFM paragraph 5 706 3 103 CLEANLINESS a Personal belongings shall be stored neatly in appropriate areas to prevent safety trip hazards Placing of belongings shall not block passageways or impair ventilation b Each crew prior to re
13. 0 RWY 4 IFR R5303 Enter Altitude or 0 R5304 Enter Altitude or 0 BOX AVAILABLE CHOICES EWN EWN EWN CLSD RWY 4 22 4 32 14 IFR VER IFR gt 4 SELECT VISIBILITY ILS ILS VA VOR RNAV EEN BOX AVAILABLE CHOICES NCA NCA TIWR INCA CCSD BOX AVAILABLE CHOICES RWY 23 23 5 19 1 IFR VER R5302 A AB ABC R5313 A AB ABC ABCD AC ACD BCD gt 4 SELECT VISIBILITY PA SA VA SELFEX ACTV or 0 R5314 ACTVor 0 PHELPS ACTVor 0 Enter Altitude or 0 PAMB NVF w Altitude or 0 STUMPY Enter Altitude or 0 ZOLMN NKT NVF BOX AVAILABLE CHOICES NJM CLSD NJM NJM CLSD NJM TWR RWY5 23 5 VFR VFR IFR SELECT VISIBILITY BOX AVAILABLE CHOICES PA PA SA VA ROC OPEN OPEN CLSD VV DARE OPEN OPEN CLSD AF DARE OPEN OPEN CLSD 6 3 10 15 Aug 15 Change 2 AIR 1 AIR 8 BEAST Enter Altitude or 0 B WEST Enter Altitude or 0 NEUSE A Enter Altitude or 0 NEUSE B Enter Altitude or 0 BURNER Enter Altitude or 0 AIR 1 Enter Altitude or 0 AIR 8 Enter Altitude or 0 AIR 15 Enter Altitude or 0 AIR 15B Enter Altitude or 0 Thi
14. 3 Regular liberty shall not be combined with special liberty be 4 Special liberty requests will requested through the same chain as leave REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 2 322 1 420 UNIFORMS Camouflage utilities are the normal working uniform for Marines with the exception of Fridays when the appropriate service uniform is worn 1 421 ANNUAL PHYSICALS All controllers are required to maintain physical standards established by Federal Air Regulations a Marines are responsible for scheduling their own appointment and delivering the original clearance notice to the training office Phone Aviation Medicine at 466 0368 0369 b Civilian physicals will be scheduled by the facility during their birthday month The first line supervisors will notify each controller appropriately as to the date and time to report for their respective flight physical examinations All flight physicals performed at the Naval Hospital will be conducted on duty time and will be performed at no cost to the employee Controllers will report to the Naval Hospital Aeromedical Department second floor no later than 0700L the day of their physical 1 Controllers shall refrain from physical training and alcohol consumption 24 hours prior to their scheduled physical 2 Controllers shall fast 12 hours prior to their scheduled physical 5 Feb 15 Change 1 3 Controllers can expect to perform required testing during the morning period and th
15. Call sign Type aircraft Nearest major city Altitude Location of event Lat Long or Radial amp DME Brief description of event Any other pertinent information b All personnel can expect aircrews to regard lasers as an in flight emergency and may take evasive action to avoid laser illumination Additionally other aircraft may request clearance to avoid the area 6 3 11 15 Aug 15 Change 2 6 327 TERMINAL DATA ENTRIES Information recorded on the flight progress strips FAA Form 7230 7 2 shall be entered in the correspondingly numbered spaces See Figure 6 3 6 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q 9 Destination airport remarks arrival runway 10 Clearance limit lost comm issued 2A 7 9A N 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 Aircraft identification 2 Revision number FDIO 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or position that requested a strip be printed 3 NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 4 Computer identification number required 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Previous fix FDIO 7 Coordination fix 8 Estimated time of arrival at the coordination fix or destination airport point outs AIA NOTE AIA is needed for statistical data at EWN and REFERENCE FAA JO 7210 3 paragraph 14 4 1 8A Not used 9 Altitude in hundreds of feet and last
16. FIELD ABBREV FIELDS Message Type Aircraft ID Aircraft Data Beacon Code Speed Coordination Fix Coordination Time Assigned Altitude Requested Altitude Route 40 elements Remarks Plain Lang Field Reference Location Identifier 1 3 2 12 h Fuse Fault This will cause an audible alarm and should be reported to ATCM as soon as possible 1 Hydrogen Excess Fault This should be reported immediately to ATCM as this fault could become explosive if not taken care of 7 106 LIGHT GUNS Two ALDIS Lamps Light Guns are located in the control tower Procedures for use are covered in FAA Handbook 7110 65 REFERENCE FAA Order 7110 65 Chapter 3 Section 2 7 107 RESERVED 7 108 FDIO a The Flight Data Input Output FDIO system is located at the FT and FR positions The FDIO automates the computation and transmission of movement data between the ARTCCs and control towers and approach controls By the use of the FDIO system flight plan clearance information is automatically transmitted from the ARTCC to the tower or approach control where flight strip printers automatically print out data on the flight progress strip In the tower and approach control keyboards are used to automatically transmit flight progress data Space Avail CHARACTERS USE OF SPECIAL CHARACTERS To separate unlike elements in route of flight Example EWN V45 ISO To separate like elements Example EWN ISO TYI Used to Bracket PDRs PDA
17. Figure 1 4 1 1 403 HEADSETS ATCM located in bldg 199A will issue each controller a headset This equipment belongs to ATCM is issued for personal use and must be returned upon check out If the headset malfunctions or if the boom breaks it is to be returned to ATCM If the headset is lost irreparably damaged due to the misuse or neglect a replacement headset will be ordered from Plantronics at the controller s expense Upon receipt the replacement headset will be taken to for serialization 1 404 MAIL Personal mail is distributed to military members Mon Fri by Postal Clerks assigned on each crew Civilian employees are provided mail slots in the radar break room Guard mail and electronic mail are available 1 405 LOCKER ASSIGNMENTS Upon assignment to crew each controller will be assigned a locker These lockers are to be used for storage and safeguarding of issued equipment and publications Occasionally due to the limited 1 4 1 number of lockers and the fluctuating number of controllers on hand controllers may be required to share a locker until one becomes available 1 406 TIME CARDS a The SATCS will brief civilian employees on the proper usage of time cards A Time and Attendance Logbook is located in the Radar Branch b 1 407 MESSING Reserved 1 408 FACILITY TOURS Personnel on duty during a scheduled facility tour will be notified by the FWO prior to the tour s arrival
18. The area between the EWN 310 radial clockwise to the 040 radial extending outward 5 miles from the geographic center of EWN airport Sector 4 Sector5 Runway Box The area within a 2 mile radius of the geographic center of EWN airport See Figure 6 1 13 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 108 AEROBATIC PRACTICE AREA An aerobatic practice area has been approved by waiver to the east of MRH from the surface to 4000 MSL See Figure 6 1 14 for a depiction of this area 6 109 VFR PILOT TRAINING AREAS Tradewind Aviation has selected two areas north of the EWN airport and four areas in the vicinity of airport for pilot training Aircraft will normally conduct training at or below 4 000 feet MSL These are not aerobatic areas nor will they be used for anything other than routine flight instruction of VFR pilots When pilot training is in progress the aircraft may request VFR flight following enroute to and while established in these areas Since part of each area exists outside NKT airspace the provision of VFR flight following is entirely the controller s prerogative See Figures 6 1 15 and 6 1 16 6 110 RADAR WATCH CHECKLIST Each watch Day Eve Mid the oncoming FWO shall ensure that the following checks are completed during the conduct of the watch and that the entry WCLC is made to the supervisor s log with any discrepancies not previously noted in the log All Position
19. 5 411 BIRD AIRCRAFT STRIKE HAZARD BASH The geographical location of MCAS Cherry Point allows for extensive bird activity especially during the months of Oct Apr ATC personnel that observe or receive reports of a bird hazard shall inform the FWO who will notify the ODO REFERENCE AOM paragraph 4007 5 4 5 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 5 412 USE OF TOWER RADAR DISPLAYS The primary purpose of a tower radar display is to increase efficiency and safety of flight within the surface area for which the tower has responsibility The TDW is not intended to be used for approach control functions Tower radar displays may be used for the following a To determine an aircraft s identification exact location or special relationship to other aircraft b To provide aircraft with radar traffic advisories c To provide a direction or suggested heading to VFR aircraft as an advisory aid to navigation d To provide information and instructions to aircraft operating within the surface area for which the tower has responsibility REFERENCE FAA JO 7210 3 paragraph 10 5 3 FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3 1 9 and 3 1 6 c NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 8 2 6 5 413 SUSPENSION OF VFR OPERATIONS When the TS determines that the VFR pattern is not feasible the pattern shall be suspended and AirOps notified 5 414 SIMULTANEOUS PARALLEL RUNWAY OPERATIONS Simultaneous same direction arrivals or simultaneous same direction departures to parall
20. BURNER ATCAA USAGE REPORT TOTAL HOURS SCHEDULED TOTAL HOURS ACTIVATED USED MONTH YEAR FOR PARTICIPATING FOR PARTICIPATING AIRCRAFT AIRCRAFT ONLY ONLY DAY OF Hours WEEK Times AN Active Used TOTAL AIR OPERATIONS A FLIGHT OF 4 EQUALS 4 DAY MCAS FORM 3722 27 01 2015 Supersedes Previous Edition Figure 2 3 5 2 3 9 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q TRAINING CLASS ATTENDANCE ROSTER MCAS FORM 3722 7 05 2001 Supersedes Previous Edition Figure 2 3 6 2 3 10 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q FACILITY RECOMMENDATION NAME OF SUGGESTOR POSITION AND GRADE BRANCH Tower Radar etc SUGGESTOR S SIGNATURE DO NOT WRITE IN THIS SPACE FWS S SIGNATURE AND DATE DATE RECEIVED TRAINING SUPPORT SIGNATURE SUGGESTION NUMBER TITLE OF SUGGESTION Describe in three separate paragraphs 1 the problem difficulty or circumstances that prompted you to submit this recommendation 2 the suggested change 3 where and how it can be used what it will accomplish and how it will benefit the facility Note If you need more space continue on separate sheet MCAS FORM 3722 9 4 01 Supersedes Previous Edition Figure 2 3 7 2 3 11 5Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q FWO BRIEFING C
21. NCA 34 46 34 79 077 23 01 42 RENDE NCA 244 1 TACAN RWY 5 NCA 34 41 52 10 077 27 25 40 SATIE NCA 177 11 TACAN RWY 1 34 31 36 72 077 23 52 65 SEASO NCA 042 1 TACAN RWY 23 NCA 34 43 15 53 077 25 44 37 TEYOR NCA 042 2 2 RWY 23 34 44 20 30 077 24 51 43 TOMAH FAF RNAV RWY 19 34 47 22 21 077 26 12 35 TUDSE NCA 019 2 RWY 19 34 44 23 70 077 25 57 29 TYNAN NCA 201 11 RWY 1 34 31 42 96 077 29 24 37 UYEGI NCA 201 6 5 TACAN RWY 1 34 36 05 06 077 28 11 35 WINOS NCA 201 5 TACAN RWY 1 34 37 32 90 077 27 46 85 WIPMO IF IAF RNAV RWY 5 34 36 14 09 077 34 11 91 ZUBIL NCA 019 8 TACAN RWY 19 NCA 34 50 17 66 077 24 33 80 ZUDIT FAF RNAV RWY 5 NCA 34 39 04 37 077 30 46 62 MARVL TM NCA 042 008 TACAN RWY 23 19 34 49 04 19 077 20 59 07 MANTEO DARE COUNTY OCSIP IAF RNAV RWY 17 36 08 14 95 076 00 15 45 EARNY RNAV RWY 17 36 06 05 38 075 47 06 60 IWOSE FAF RNAV RWY 17 35 59 52 35 075 44 00 75 ALGTR IAF MA RNAV RWY 5 35 56 00 07 076 03 57 55 ROWZO IF RNAV RWY 5 35 47 24 24 075 49 10 80 OZUBE FAF RNAV RWY 5 35 52 32 05 075 44 15 54 JUMIT IAF RNAV RWY 23 36 10 37 83 075 42 29 35 TALOW RNAV RWY 23 36 04 27 23 075 32 46 38 BLEEK FAF RNAV RWY 23 35 59 10 62 075 37 52 02 NORTN MA RNAV RWY 23 36 02 45 85 075 52 28 07 2 6 6 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q PLYMOUTH
22. NCA retains their delegated airspace c To maintain separation from NCA delegated airspace the following restrictions apply ILS Rwy 4 The ILS Rwy 4 holding airspace to be protected and the approach do not overlap NCA airspace at or below 8000 feet AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 NOTE Do not authorize a procedure turn The approach must be made from the holding pattern in lieu of a procedure turn VOR Rwy 4 The VOR Rwy 4 holding airspace to be protected and the approach with procedure turn do not overlap NCA airspace at or below 8000 feet 6 4 4 ATCFacO P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 6 4 5 5 Feb 15 Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q DISTANCE TO CLEAR PROTECTED AIRSPACE AT NCA RADIAL TO BE PROTECTED SPEED DISTANCE ON RADIAL TACAN RWY 5 HLD 175KIAS lt 29 or gt 42 DME V139 EWN R 232 12 or gt 26 DME TACAN RWY 23 HLD EE 4 lt 12c gt 230KIAS lt 8 or gt 28 DME TACAN RWY 5 HLD 175KIAS lt 17 or gt 31 DME V139 ILM R 050 34 or gt 47 DME TACAN RWY 23 HLD lt 4 or gt 230KIAS lt 31 or gt 53 DME TACAN RWY 5 HLD 6 DME NCA R 325 RARAS NCA DEPARTURE AIRSPACE 8 V139 NA 8 DME NCA R 066 TACAN RWY 23 HLD 175KIAS 16 DME Figure 6 4 2 DISTANCE TO CLEAR NKT AIRSPACE BOUNDARIES ROUTE OF FLIGHT RADIAL FLOWN TO BE PROTECTED DISTANCE ON RADIAL V139 V70
23. There is no specific time requirement to maintain currency on a supervisory position However supervisor time will be tracked on the VIDS position logs to satisfy the collective bargaining agreement NOTE Time on RS or TS does not count toward position currency b When currency is not maintained the following action shall be taken 1 Not current for one calendar month FWO Branch Chief shall satisfactorily complete a performance skill check before the controller resumes controlling on that position 2 Not current for three calendar months Training Chief shall initiate a temporary suspension letter of all associated position qualifications and assemble a CEB Specific tasking of the CEB will be to determine any refresher training needed and to consider possible suspension of position qualification Suspension of qualification will not be entertained unless the CEB determines willful negligence extreme disregard or similar circumstances 3 Any extended absence of six months or greater due to medical reasons deployment etc requires a written examination and a qualification skill check before a controller resumes any previously held position in this facility 4 Final Controllers shall not conduct approaches during IFR weather until skill check is complete and 10 approaches have been conducted REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 S0T 114 paragraph 6 3 3 4 2 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q
24. assigned heading CT for Contact Approach Figure 6 3 6 11 Radar contact 12 This will be a split block to indicate the intentions of the aircraft on the approach and the position that the final controller needs to hand the aircraft off to after the completion of the approach if other than AR See example below Bottom Right Position AE AW etc 13 Landing check issued EFC 14 Not used Top Left Type landing L T F O Z LZ TZ OZ 15 Not used 16 Times for ATA MA WO RS 17 Type approach EXAMPLE PA SAA SA IA OA VA 18 Frequency NOTE Enter the initials of the qualified controller and then if applicable the initials of the trainee on the back of the flight strip for all GCAs b Departures 1 Aircraft identification 6 3 12 15 Aug 15 Change 2 2 Revision number FDIO 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or position that requested a strip be printed 3 NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 4 Computer identification number required 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Proposed departure time 7 Requested altitude 8 Departure airport point outs 8A Not used 9 Computer generated Route destination and remarks Manually enter altitude altitude restrictions in the order flown if appropriate 9 Hand prepared Clearance limit route altitude altitude restrictions in the order flown if appropriate 9A Head
25. etc The requalification and any qualification training conducted shall be entered in the controller s training jacket If qualification is not achieved the or Training Chief may assign additional OJT hours and or skill enhancement training or may refer the individual to a CEB prior to initiating action 4 203 CURRENCY REQUIREMENTS a To maintain currency all controllers shall meet the following minimum time requirements on the positions indicated each calendar month Final controller requirements are based on number of approaches All currency times will be tracked by the VIDS position logs Radar approaches will be tracked by the training branch via GCA Run Logs 1 SATCSs and branch chiefs shall work an operating position a minimum of four hours in each branch qualified 2 3 Non supervisory personnel shall work on all operating positions qualified a minimum of two hours 4 Final Controllers shall conduct 10 radar approaches which may be either live or simulated 5 There are no requirements to maintain currency on associate positions 6 When positions are combined in accordance with this order logged position time will count toward each position 5Feb 15 Change 1 7 Tower simulator work may be used to count toward currency requirements at the discretion of each FWO for tower branch rated controllers local controllers and ground controllers only when providing training to trainees 8
26. the ATCFO shall be responsible for the administration of the program a Ensuring that operational error deviation investigations are conducted within the confines established in any effective negotiated contract between the ATCF and NATCA b Designating the Investigator In Charge The may be designated on a rotational or permanent basis The IIC s function shall be performed by supervisory personnel or the facility staff Normally the FWO on duty is the primary IIC Designating an investigative team to assist the in the collection of data when the complexity of an operational error deviation requires such a team The ATCFO shall determine the size and composition of each investigative team d Analyzing the data submitted by the IIC and CEB to determine 1 The classification of the occurrence 1 operational error operational deviation pilot deviation no occurrence 2 The categorization of the operational error deviation i e human procedural equipment or any combination thereof 3 The causal factor s of the operational error deviation AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q MCIEAST PRELIMINARY AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL HAZARD INVESTIGATION SUMMARY Note this is preliminary data Operational Error Number and subject to change Operational Deviation Number Date and Time of Occurrence Reported by ATC Facility Facilities involved ATC Branch
27. web site at https atc navy mil REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 1 6 1 1 102 CANCELLATION P3722 1P and all of its changes and errata are canceled 1 103 MANUAL CHANGES Personnel should submit recommended changes in procedures to the Procedures Evaluation Board PEB Changes will be promulgated initially by Facility Directive and then annually as formal changes to this Facility Manual The changes and briefing guide will be published at least 8 days prior to the effective date of the change REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 1 426 1 1 1 1 104 FACILITY DIRECTIVES AND MEMOS In order to disseminate operational information and ensure that it is incorporated or disposed of properly standard Facility Directive and Facility Memo sheets will be used Facility Directives and Memos shall contain only one 1 subject See figures 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 a Facility Directive Used to establish or change ATC procedures that have been issued by a Letter of Agreement AOM Facility Manual previous Facility Directive etc b Facility Memo Used to publish operational information that does not change or establish procedures These are generally temporary memos that announce airfield status changes or effective dates of Special Military Operations Facility Directives and Memos receive an issue number and include disposition procedures Facility Directives start with Issue 001 Facility Mem
28. when LOG is lighted indicates a logarithmic IF condition is selected Used to select left of runway or right of runway operation of cosecant squared radiation pattern on CSC2 LEFT CSC2 RIGHT elevation antenna when optional CSC2 equipment is installed When CSC2 LEFT is lighted Indicator Switch indicates left of runway operation is selected when CSC2 RIGHT is lighted indicates right of runway operation is selected Used to select linear polarization or circular polarization of azimuth and elevation antennas When LIN CIRC Indicator Switch LIN is lighted indicates linear polarization of antennas is selected when CIRC is lighted indicates circular polarization of antennas is selected Used to select single or double cancellation of DMTI in processor When DBL CANC is lighted indicates selection of double cancellation when SGL CANC is lighted indicates selection of single cancellation Used to select fixed or staggered PRF operation of system when in MTI mode When STAG PRF is lighted indicates staggered PRF operations is selected when FIXED PRF is lighted indicates fixed PRF operation is selected Used to select processor for on line system timing and DMTI video processing or bypass processor in event of processor failure When ON is lighted indicates processor is selected for on line channel when BYPASS is lighted indicates processor is disconnected radar set is operating internal triggers and on line channel is opera
29. 05 60 076 48 02 85 HEGIR NKT 131 10 2 RWY 32L 34 48 49 24 076 42 11 28 HIPOK NKT 322 4 HI TACAN RWY 14L 34 56 52 04 076 56 02 77 HOMUS HM NKT 045 5 COPTER TACAN RWY 23R 34 58 11 19 076 48 54 68 HORKU NKT 322 14 HI TACAN RWY 14L 35 03 41 31 077 04 57 61 ICORE FAF RNAV RWY 5R 34 49 58 34 076 57 56 86 JADEG NKT 045 1 5 COPTER TACAN RWY 23R 34 55 21 07 076 51 24 92 JOGTA NKT 322 2 HI TACAN RWY 14L 34 55 30 11 076 54 15 98 JULTO NKT 240 3 COPTER TACAN RWY 23R 5R 34 52 14 65 076 55 19 26 JUNIR IAF HLD RNAV RWY 32L 23R 34 45 31 37 076 42 38 51 KADAF KD NKT 240 6 TACAN RWY 5R 34 50 21 09 076 58 09 14 KIYEK TK NKT 332 12 HI TACAN 2 RWY 321 148 35 00 57 68 077 01 23 50 KKING FAF RNAV RWY 32L 34 49 48 82 076 47 44 56 KOBBY ILM 050 012 V139 34 29 50 57 077 42 30 63 KROVE EWN 264 011 V56 85 01 42 77 077 15 22 44 LABVE NKT 240 2 4 TACAN RWY 5R 34 52 56 27 076 54 16 94 LKOUT LK NKT 154 025 HI TACAN Y RWY 32L 34 33 36 13 076 35 07 52 MADAC MD NKT 322 21 HI TACAN RWY 14L 85 08 27 41 077 11 12 88 MEVGE NKT 064 6 TACAN RWY 5R 32L 34 57 34 82 076 46 30 46 OSHEN TO 154 1 2 TACAN RWY 32L 34 53 09 07 076 51 39 05 OSPIE IAF RNAV RWY 5R 34 51 06 27 077 09 32 13 PEARS TYI 112 038 V139 35 47 12 37 076 57 01 98 PEPAE 055 002 9 ILS RWY 23R 34 55 34 42 076 51 10 49 PHNTM GSB 261 020 15 RWY 8 GSB 35 14 22 89 078 21 41 30 2 6 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL
30. 10 10 6 322 RADAR APPROACH CONFIRMATION Regarding radar approach guidance course and or elevation discontinuance The following is guidance for the final controller a When NKT is reporting VFR and the pilot states Airport in sight proceeding visually got the airport or some other similar phrase the final controller may ask the pilot call sign Are you canceling your radar approach 6 3 8 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 1 If the answer is affirmative instruct the aircraft distance mile s from touchdown proceed visually additional instructions clearance as required remain this frequency Monitor the frequency and provide clearances or coordination via VISCOM and or intercom as necessary just as if conducting a PAR or ASR This operation is transparent to the tower 2 If the answer is negative continue with the PAR or ASR instructions b When NKT is reporting IFR PAR or ASR instructions shall be in accordance with the established directives reflectors the landing centerline from a Cherry Point s approximately 250 300 feet threshold which is at the end of the runway The touchdown zone includes the first 3000 feet of the runway PAR touchdown is between 668 and 1051 feet from the approach end of the runway 1 To be consistent in instruction the over landing threshold call shall be made when the aircraft passes the centerline reflector 2 T
31. 15 Aug 13 372210 AIRFIELD VEHICLE OPERATOR S CLASS ATTENDANCE ROSTER PRINT NAME CLEARLY Name Unit MCAS FORM 3722 19 10 2010 Supersedes Previous Edition Figure 2 3 13 2 3 17 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL GCA RUN LOG wb MP CHEREN POSITION DATE CONTROLLER CALL SIGN INTENT instructor TRAINEE ATA FREQ RWY REMARKS MCAS FORM 3722 21 01 2012 Supersedes Previous Edition Figure 2 3 14 2 3 18 5Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q ATC INSTRUCTION EVALUATION REPORT 2 Date 3 Position s 4 Hours VFR MVFR IFR Other 6 Workload D Light O Moderate Heavy 7 Complexity O Not Difficult O Occasionally Difficult O Mostly Difficult O Very Difficult 8 Routing FWO BC TC TSS 9 Purpose 5 Skill Check O Qualification O Classroom O Other 10 Job Task Job Subtask Satisfactory Needs Improvement Unsatisfactory A Separation Separation is ensured Safety alerts are provided B Coordination Performs handoffs pointouts Required coordination is performed Control Judgment Good control judgment is applied Priority of
32. 15B AIRSPACE 59 EWN VOR EWN VOR 22 60 BURNR BURNER 61 NTU MVA NTU MVA MULTI MODE console No Name Description 1 BASIC2 2 BASICFX FIX NAMES LARGE 3 ARRIVAL NKT EXTENDED RUNWAYS 4 ARR FIX FIX NAMES SMALL 5 6 MULTMVA MVA MULTI MODE 7 SUA BLUE SUA AIRSPACE LINES 8 NCA MVA NCA MVA 9 CLASS D CLASS D FOR AIRPORTS 10 IR12 62 IR 12 amp IR 62 11 RNAV23R NKT RNAV 23R 12 TA 23R NKT TACAN 23R 13 RNAVO5R RNAV 5R 14 05 5R 15 RNAV32L RNAV 32L 16 TA 32L TACAN 32L 6 1 10 5 Feb 15 Change 1 6 107 EWN AREA PRACTICE An aerobatic practice area has been approved by waiver within 5 miles of the Coastal Carolina Regional Airport EWN from the surface to 4000 MSL and sectorized as follows East Box The area between the EWN 040 radial clockwise to the 130 radial extending outward 5 miles from the geographic center of EWN airport Sector 1 South Box The area between the EWN 130 radial clockwise to the 220 radial extending outward 5 miles from the geographic center of EWN airport Sector 2 West Box The area between the EWN 220 radial clockwise to the 310 radial extending outward 5 miles from the geographic center of EWN airport Sector 3 North Box
33. 2 TERMS OF REFERENCE WORD MEANINGS ANNOTATIONS ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY POSITION RELIEF CHECKLIST Section 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND AWARDS GENERAL MCIEAST ATC TRAINING amp READINESS CORPORAL RENEHAN CONTROLLER OF THE QUARTER MCAS CHERRY POINT CONTROLLER OF THE YEAR PROCEDURES PERFORMANCE AWARDS ATC TRAINER OF THE YEAR AWARD WALL OF EXCELLENCE Section 4 FACILITY ADMINISTRATION ADMINISTRATION DRUG AND ALCOHOL USE FACILITY PARKING HEADSETS MAIL LOCKER ASSIGNMENTS TIME CARDS MESSING FACILITY TOURS AIRFIELD TOURS PHONE USAGE BLOOD DONATIONS AIRFIELD HOURS OF OPERATION ATCFO AND STAFF WORKING HOURS ATC WATCH BILL HOLIDAY MANNING ADDITIONAL DUTIES BRIEFING AREA OPERATIONAL CREW BRIEFINGS ATCFacO P3722 1Q gt gt gt a 1 e mo jm 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 3 1 4 3 1 4 3 1 4 3 1 4 3 1 4 3 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 4 5 15 Aug 13 1 419 1 420 1 421 1 422 1 423 1 424 1 425 1 426 1 427 1 428 2 100 2 101 2 102 2 103 2 200 2 201 2 202 2 203 2 204 2 300 2 301 2 302 2 303 2 304 2 305 2 306 2 307 2 308 2 309 2 310 2 311 2 312 2 313 2 314 2 315 2 316 2 317 2 318 2 319 2 320 2 321 2 322 2 323 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL LEAVE AND LIBERTY UNIFORMS ANNUAL PHYSICALS CLIMATE CONTROL PRO
34. 244 8 139 3 BIG ROCK R 5306C HAT F MOA 323 775 141 95 BT 9 226 575 149 325 BT 11 323 9 141 85 BIG ROCK CIVIL 132 475 2 610 CLASS D SURFACE AREAS NKT Cherry Point MCAS NC lat 34 54 10 N long 76 52 52 W That airspace extending upward from the surface to and including 2 500 feet MSL within a 5 mile radius of Cherry Point MCAS Jacksonville New River MCAS NC lat 34 42 39 N long 77 26 21 W That airspace extending NCA upward from the surface to and including 2 500 feet MSL within a 5 mile radius of New River MCAS Craven County Regional Airport NC lat 35 04 23 N long 77 02 35 W That airspace extending EWN upward from the surface to and including 2 500 feet MSL within a 4 mile radius of the Craven County Regional Airport Marine Corps Outlying Landing Facility Oak Grove NC lat 35 02 01 N long 77 14 59 W That 13NC airspace extending upward from the surface to and including 1 500 feet MSL within a 4 mile radius of Marine Corps Outlying Landing Facility Oak Grove NJM Bogue Field MCALF NC lat 34 41 26 N long 77 01 47 W That airspace extending upward from the surface to and including 2 500 feet MSL within a 4 5 mile radius of Bogue Field MCALF NC 2 6 11 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 2 6 12 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 7 PUBLICATIONS 2 700 GENERAL The main library within the facility has become el
35. 3 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q Section 4 ATC PROCEDURES 5 400 GENERAL Specific references contained as an appendix the Airfield Operations Manual and publications instructions available in the facility library form the basis for procedural application in this section All controllers must be thoroughly familiar with the specific reference material to fully understand the procedural application 5 401 PATTERNS Reserved 5 402 AOM TOPICS The following topics can be found in the Airfield Operations Manual 8 Demonstrations b 8 Harrier Operations c Runway Selection d Traffic Patterns e Procedural Waivers f Long and Short Positions g Noise Abatement h Local Terms 1 NADEP Pad Operations j Quiet Hours Jog Procedures 1 NAVAID Check Points m Helicopter Operations n Arm dearm Procedures o Ordnance 5 4 1 Jettisoning Fuel Planned Ejection Area Light Gun Signals Field Carrier Landing Practice t VSTOL Road Operations u Rolling Vertical Landing South Pad v Familiarization Flights w Distinguished Visitors X Closed Field Operations y MAG 14 Training Routes REFERENCE AOM 5 403 APPLICATION OF VISUAL SEPARATION a Cherry Point Tower is a non approach control tower and is authorized to provide visual separation between aircraft within the Class D surface area provided other
36. 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 3 2 6 1 2 6 1 2 6 2 2 6 2 2 6 3 2 6 8 2 6 9 2 6 9 2 6 10 2 6 11 2 6 11 15 Aug 13 2 705 2 706 2 707 2 800 2 801 2 802 3 100 3 101 3 102 3 103 3 104 3 105 3 106 3 107 3 108 3 200 3 201 3 202 3 203 4 100 4 101 4 102 4 103 4 104 4 105 4 106 4 107 4 108 4 109 4 110 4 200 4 201 4 202 4 203 4 204 4 205 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL EXERCISE BINDERS PUBLICATIONS CONTROL PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE Section 8 CIVIL AIRCRAFT REQUIREMENTS CIVIL USE LANDING PERMIT EMERGENCY LANDINGS AIRCRAFT WITHOUT PPR CHAPTER 3 SAFETY Section 1 RESPONSIBILITIES GENERAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD FIRE BILL CLEANLINESS ELEVATOR OUTAGE CYPHER LOCKS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS FIRE ALARMS HERO PROCEDURES Section 2 ANTI TERRORISM AND FORCE PROTECTION GENERAL BOMB THREATS FACILITY BUILDING SECURITY ACCESS AREAS CHAPTER 4 TRAINING Section 1 RESPONSIBILITIES GENERAL ATCFO RESPONSIBILITIES TRAINING STANDARDIZATION OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES TRAINING CHIEF RESPONSIBILITIES FWO RESPONSIBILITIES OJTI RESPONSIBILITIES TRAINEE RESPONSIBILITIES LOCAL QUALIFICATION STANDARDS LESSON TOPIC GUIDES TESTING ANNUAL TRAINING PLAN Section 2 PROFICIENCY AND CURRENCY QUALIFICATION TRAINING PROFICIENCY TRAINING REQUALIFICATION CURRENCY REQUIREMENTS POSITION EVALUATIONS ANNUAL SKILL CHECK TOWER VISIBILITY OBSERVERS iv ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 O7
37. 5304 are activated the following procedures will be used a Ensure all transitioning aircraft with separation responsibility are at least 500 feet above the vertical limits of the area REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 Paragraph 9 4 2 d b If the controller deems it operationally advantageous the aircraft may be rerouted via BEULA V70 ILM or another route 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q ASAS CLIE 5500 MSL Figure 6 6 2 15 Aug 15 Change 2 Figure 6 6 3 6 611 SUA VIOLATIONS To ensure the safety of flight operations in R 5306A and on the bombing targets it is imperative that the procedures and policies governing these areas are adhered to To ensure strict compliance penalties will be administered to units violating procedures as shown in Figure 6 6 4 Violations ATC shall report on the SUA Violation Report Penalties ATC shall initiate REFERENCE AirStaO P3570 2R TGTOPSMAN AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 612 CORE MOA PROCEDURES a Central Scheduling will schedule the CORE MOA along with other SUA however the CORE MOA with its intended use of a high speed transition from R 5306A and the Warning Area will not be scheduled for use by itself b In addition to the requirement that this airspace shall be scheduled it has been directed that Cherry Point Approach shall separate all nonparticipating aircraft that have reques
38. 8540 JOINT AIR ACAD 8525 OPERATIONS 8526 8535 trainees must complete the Basic Orientation Arrival Departure Control ACAD 8536 Supplement prior to assignment to crew and ACAD 8537 progressing to any of the other supplements This ACAD 8539 Basic Orientation satisfies the NATOPS ACAD 8540 requirement for indoctrination Each supplement also has specific OJF and simulator requirements Basic Instructor that must be completed prior to beginning OJT Controllers with previous position qualifications at Senior Instructor MCAS Cherry Point will be evaluated on a case by case basis for supplement and OJT requirements ACPM 8000 8001 REFERENCE ACPM 8002 NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 1 ACPM 8003 MACCS ACPM 8004 ACPM 8005 ACPM 8006 ACPM 8007 ACPM 8008 4 5 2 15 Aug 15 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 6 WAIVERS AND REVOCATIONS 4 600 GENERAL Reserved 4 601 DOCUMENTS Reserved 4 602 REQUIREMENTS Reserved 4 603 CONTROLLER BOARD EVALUATION a The purpose of the Controller Evaluation Board CEB is to ensure that all opportunities for training success were realized while maintaining the integrity of the training program CEBs shall be conducted when 1 Requested by the ATCFO or 2 A trainee has reached OJT time limits Or 3 A trainee has been recommended for revocation of MOS b begins with
39. Aircraft shall avoid this area at all times 6 6 3 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Ni BAYBORO CORRIDOR SFC 750 TRE K m RALEIGH Z h LOCALIZER AREA That portion of R 5306A South of the Cherry Point TACAN 100 radial 3000 feet and below This area is used for the localizer runway 26 approach at the Michael J Smith airport Military aircraft shall avoid this area when advised it is in use i NOISE SENSITIVE AREAS 1 Aircraft shall avoid overflying the industrial complex aboard MCAS Cherry Point the densely populated areas of the Air Station Crash Crew and the rifle range below pattern altitudes Pilots shall also avoid overflying the City of Havelock Minnesott Beach the Cedar Island Ferry Terminal and ferry 2 AV 8 arrivals and departures to the pads will not overfly Crash Crew or the rifle range 15 Aug 15 Change 2 3 Within R 5306A the following areas shall be avoided below the altitude indicated Bayboro 1000 feet within INM Oriental 1500 feet within INM Ward Creek 750 feet within 2NM Hobucken 3000 feet within 2NM Lowland 3000 feet within 2NM RESTRICTED AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 4 Computer identification number if required 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Previous fix FDIO 7 Not used TER 9 Altitude 9A Remarks SUA assigned a NOISE SENSITIVE 10 Clearance broadcast S 1 HOBUCKEN 2
40. CCL RAA RAE and RAW added 1 301 MCIEAST ATC T amp R Removed biennial rotation 1 305 ATC TRAINER OF THE YEAR AWARD GS 13 replaced with SATCS FacDir 014 14 1 406 TIME CARDS GS 13 replaced with SATCS Procedures for BUEs to input time card information through SLDCADA added FacDir 010 14 and 14 14 1 417 BRIEFING AREA Binder descriptions updated FacDir 014 14 1 418 OPERATIONAL CREW BRIEFINGS Redundant paragraph removed FacDir 014 14 1 419 LEAVE AND LIBERTY Leave policy during training clarified FacDir 013 14 CHAPTER TWO 2 203 COMBINING OF POSITIONS New abbreviations edited 2 204 CIVILIAN EMPLOYEE BARGAINING UNIT Paragraph relocated to this position FacDir 014 14 2 304 AIR ACTIVITY REPORTS Tower printout requirement removed 2 308 SUA ACTIVATION LOGs SUA Forms updated Airspace Expansion 2 314 POSITION EVALUATIONS FAA Form changed to MCAS Form FacDir 020 14 FIG 2 3 4 RADAR TOTALS Form updated for new airports MQI OCW and PMZ FIG 2 3 5 ATCAA USAGE Forms for ATCAA usage developed Airspace Expansion FIG 2 3 15 ATC EVALUATION New MCAS Form FacDir 020 14 FIG 2 3 16 FOUR DAY EVALUATION Updated MCAS Form FacDir 020 14 2 405 FACILITY WATCH OFFICER FWO designation redefined FacDir 014 14 2 600 LOCAL BASED SQUADRONS VMAQ 1 change to 1 2 604 AIRSPACE AND APPROACH FIXES OCW and PMZ ad
41. Chart L11 12 Enroute Low US Chart L13 14 Enroute Low US Chart L15 16 Enroute Low US Chart L17 18 Enroute Low US Chart L19 20 Enroute Low US Chart L21 22 Enroute Low US Chart L23 24 Enroute Low US Chart L25 26 Enroute Low US Chart L27 28 Enroute Low US Chart L29 30 Enroute Low US Chart L31 32 XX XX X Enroute Low US Chart L33 34 Enroute Low US Chart L35 36 2 5 1 Charlotte Sectional 2 Southeast SE Vol 2 of 4 U S Terminal Procedures 2 7 3 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO 372210 PUBLICATION NAME DESCRIPTION TRNG RDR TWR ATCFacO P3722 1 Facility Manual 100 1 1 ASO P3710 5 Airfield Operations Manual 100 1 1 MCIEASTO P3722 3 MCIEAST ATC Order 1 1 1 AirStaO P3570 2 SOP for Range Training Areas P3570 1 SOP for Camp Lejeune Range Control B COMNAVAIRFOR 3722 2 ATC NATOPS Evaluation Program i AirStaO 5040 1 Command Inspection Program 1000 8 Fleet Assistance Program AirStaO 1000 9 Fleet Assistance Program FAP 1200 7 MOS Manual i i METOC 045 8 19 508 001 Tower Visibility Observations i User s Manual
42. Consoles All Radios including ECS Clocks Wind Indicators Weather Monitor FDIO VISCOM Radar Displays Status Board Accuracy NAVAID Monitors Pass Down Log VIDS 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q SINGLE SENSOR MINIMUM VECTORING ALTITUI Figure 6 1 9 6 1 12 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 P3722 1Q a 1600 SENSOR MINIMUM VECTORING ALTITUDE CHART Figure 6 1 10 6 1 13 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q GSB WALLO Figure 6 1 11 6 1 14 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 FIX s JET ROUTES amp AIRPORTS Nim 95 6 1 15 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q PRACTICE AREA NN 432 Y WX 415 3 Eon ox Figure 6 1 13 6 1 16 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Si O R 530 S O Oct 7 MRH AEROBATIC Pps w 7 A Yaga 45 40 Figure 6 1 14 6 1 17 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 1 Bey Grass E ai 399 25 316 x VA Ta 2 EWN V EA y P I zu VAN 265 4 AA lt E x K 24 Z y Figure 6 1 15 6 1 18 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q OR VFR aia riz AREA a
43. Duties and responsibilities for FD are established in ATC NATOPS local directives and the following a Call ZDC for clearances when the FDIO is out of service b Relay flight plans to RD when appropriate c Enter Departure Messages DM in the FDIO for IFR VFR departures when RATCF DAIR is out of service d Coordinate with appropriate facilities for tower enroute control clearances when the FDIO is out of service Disseminate weather information to the appropriate sectors and facilities f Issue to flights requesting NON STANDARD FORMATION number MILES IN TRAIL a nondiscrete beacon code for the last aircraft in the flight and coordinate as appropriate EXAMPLE Lead aircraft is squawking 5735 issue to flight Last aircraft in flight 5700 NOTE The Flight Planning Branch must put in remarks NSF2MIT which should be updated in the AOM in the next change to indicate NONSTANDARD TWO MILES IN TRAIL 5 2 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 8 1 3 4 and 8 1 3 3 FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 10 3 g Activate the Crash Circuit Alpha h Pass to Flight Clearance all IFR and VFR times for departures and arrivals i Notify VAL on NKTS5 line or radio of all inbound transient aircraft Notification should be conducted when the aircraft is between 2 10 miles from the airfield j Notify crash crew and flight clearance of the ETA of
44. In crosswind conditions the aircraft may deviate from centerline during rollout due to lack of nosewheel steering g Once the aircraft is stopped all electrical components are automatically shut down and the control element will lose contact with the aircraft Ground personnel may safely approach the aircraft as soon as it comes to a complete stop h The aircraft will have to be towed clear of the active runway with special attention given to the broad wingspan and the possibility of wingtips contact the ground or equipment A 204 EMERGENCY CONSIDERATIONS a EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS If both the AC and DC generators fail the three batteries provide about 45 minutes of power to flight critical equipment during an emergency glide Flight critical equipment does not include radio receive transmit capability so all communication between the Global Hawk pilot and ATC will be via telephone b GLIDE RATIOS Emergency descent is the aircraft glide capability with the engine out and windmilling The glide ratio for maximum range is approximately 1 25 for gear up 1000 feet per 4 11 nautical miles or 1 18 for gear down 1000 feet per 2 96 nautical miles Emergency fields are planned within 125nm to account for winds and the 45min of battery life A 2 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 15 Aug 13 c WIND LIMITS Maximum crosswind for landing is 15 knots Maximum tailwind component is 25 knots Exceeding these limit
45. It is intended to be used for information purposes only Procedures that have been established for the use of this equipment are listed in the appropriate section of this Manual 7 101 ATIS The Automatic Terminal Information Service ATIS provides advance non control airport and terminal area operational and meteorological information for use by pilots arriving and departing the airport and operating within the terminal area It is accomplished by a controller prepared recording that is repetitively broadcast on a voice outlet The ATIS equipment is located at position 17 in the tower cab and is broadcast on frequency 244 875 See figure 7 1 1 7 102 IVCSS The AN FSC 119 V Integrated Voice Communications Switching System IVCSS is a digital ATC communications system The system is a non blocking 480 channel software configurable network IVCSS incorporates radio telephone interphone intercom access and special circuits over a dual bus microprocessor controlled system The system requirements vary from site to site in regard to the number of Operator Positions radio circuits telephone trunk lines intercom connections and special circuits The IVCSS includes Central Equipment System Control Units SCU and Operator Position equipment a Central Equipment The Central Equipment contains the channel switching equipment the file server peripheral control equipment voice processing equipment power supplies and power dis
46. NORTH EWN R 014 APW AIRSPACE V139 SOUTH EWN R 232 APW AIRSPACE V45 EWN R 313 APW AIRSPACE V56 EWN R 264 APW AIRSPACE NCA DEPARTURE NCA R 325 APW AIRSPACE NCA ARRIVAL NCA R 066 APE AIRSPACE NKT R 184 APE AIRSPACE NKT R 283 APE AIRSPACE NKT DEPARTURE NKT R 312 APE AIRSPACE NKT R 008 APE AIRSPACE APN AIRSPACE APN AIRSPACE APW AIRSPACE APW AIRSPACE Figure 6 4 3 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q DISTANCE TO CLEAR PROTECTED AIRSPACE AT NKT ROUTE OF FLIGHT RADIAL TO BE PROTECTED DISTANCE ON RADIAL HI TACAN Y RWY 32L HLD 26 DME TACAN RWY 32L HLD 16 DME R 184 APE AIRSPACE 39 DME ILS RWY 23R HLD 5 DME EWN ILS RWY 4 HLD lt 8 or gt 19 DME ee NCA TACAN RWY 23 HLD lt 14 or gt 30 DME APW AIRSPACE 8 DME ZDC AIRSPACE 25 DME TACAN 2 RWY 32L HLD 30 DME NKT DEPARTURE EWN ILS RWY 4 HLD lt 8 DME OR gt 19 DME NKT R 312 EWN VOR RWY 4 22 HLD lt 7 DME OR gt 20 DME APW AIRSPACE 8 DME ZDC AIRSPACE 30 DME HI TACAN Z RWY 32L HLD 19 DME EWN R 110 lt 4 DME OR gt 13 DME APW AIRSPACE 8 DME ZDC AIRSPACE 31 DME OCW GPS HLD 19 DME ILS RWY 23R HLD 11 DME MRH 360 BEARING FROM lt 5 DME OR gt 17 DME MRH 180 COURSE TO lt 5 DME OR gt 17 DME HI 2 TACAN RWY 32L HLD 16 DME NDB RWY 14 20 DME ILS RWY 23R HLD 8 DME TACAN RWY 32L HLD 18 DME HI
47. P3722 1Q 1 4 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q APPENDIX G INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING POSITION EVALUATIONS 1 INTRODUCTION The Four Day Position Evaluation is used by OJTIs and first level supervisors to record their observations of the performance and progress of the ATCS trainee during OJT and simulator instruction 2 USING THE ONE DAY REPORT Entries on training reports shall be sufficiently detailed to support appropriate administrative actions Complete the following items Block numbers correspond to the numbered blocks on the form Block 1 NAME Print trainee s last name first name Block 2 DATE Enter YYMMDD Example 120715 Block 3 POSITION S Enter operational position on which training or skill check is being performed Block 5 WEATHER Record description of weather as VFR MVFR IFR or Other specify type e g thunderstorm deviations turbulence etc Check the one box most representative of the session s Conditions that impact training should be noted in Block 12 Block 6 WORKLOAD Check description of traffic volume Check the one box most representative of the session s Block 7 COMPLEXITY Check description of complexity of operations Check the one box most representative of the session s Note any unusual situations equipment outages configurations and or restrictions that impact training in Block 12 Block 9 PURPOSE Check appropriate pu
48. P3722 1Q 4 Indicate name of who was notified in maintenance EXAMPLE 1000 PAR 63 OTS TURNTABLE NOT LOCKING SMITH 1500 PAR RTS MAINTENANCE ADVISES TURN TABLE AWAITING PARTS TURNTABLE MAY NOT LOCK IN 1715 GHOST TARGETS OBSERVED MAINTENANCE ADVISED SMITH 1745 GHOST TARGET PROBLEM REDUCED JONES ADVISED d Employees other than the person responsible for the watch who make an entry shall enter initials for each of their own entries If the typewriter becomes unusable convert to handwritten logs Handwritten logs will be filled out in the same manner as when using the typewriter EXAMPLE 1000 PAR RTS PT e Use additional forms as necessary to complete the reporting of the day s activity f Make an entry closing out Form 7230 4 at the close of business g The ATCFO or his her designee shall initial the form after reviewing the entries to ensure that the facility operation is adequately and accurately described h Every time restricted area is deactivated by for emergencies weather diverts or any other aviation related circumstances record the time and a summary of events in the daily facility log F 1 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13
49. P3722 1Q OBSTRUCTION DIRECTION DISTANCE HEIGHT Water Tower S 1 4 184 Cell Tower SSW 2 5 220 Water Tower WSW 2 5NM 173 Water Tower WSW 1 0NM 157 Water Tower WSW 75NM 151 Water Tower SNM 146 Radar Tower 500FT 109 Control Tower 102 Microwave Tower 247R NKT TACAN 1 5NM 212 Radio Tower 295R NKT TACAN 3 5NM 217 Tower WSW 4 5NM 275 Figure 5 1 6 5 1 6 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 2 OPERATING POSITIONS 5 200 CONTROL TOWER TEAM POSITIONS a The responsibilities of each position in the tower have been developed using the Team Concept and Intent REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 10 3 b Control tower team positions are shown below EMERGENCY CUTOFF BUTTONS 5 201 TOWER SUPERVISOR The TS responsibilities are established by ATC NATOPS to include the following a Complete an equipment checklist upon assuming each watch See paragraph 5 106 b The TS is primarily responsible for determining which runway is designated as active When there is a duty runway change the TS shall inform Airfield Operations ODO during non working hours Flight Clearance and Weather Ensure that the switch on the FDIO printer is shut off before leaving the tower during scheduled field closures 5 2 1 When it is necessary to combine TS with LC a trainee shall not be assigned to LC for OJT REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 8 1 2 2 5 202 L
50. RADIO A hand held UHF AM tunable radio is located on top of the ILS monitor in the control tower The frequency list is posted beside the radio This is an emergency back up radio 7 115 HAND HELD FM RADIO A hand held FM radio is located in the control tower The frequencies available are Channel 1 Vehicle Net Channel 2 Crash Net V NET C NET AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q Figure 7 1 5 7 1 7 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 7 1 8 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 2 RADAR EQUIPMENT 7 200 GENERAL This chapter describes the function and capabilities of the radar and associated equipment used throughout the ATC facility It is intended to be used for information purposes only Procedures that have been established for the use of this equipment are listed in the appropriate section of this Manual 7 201 AN GPN 30 CONTROL PANEL The control panel for the AN GPN 30 ASR 11 surveillance radar system is located at the FWO console in the TRACON The button descriptions and functions are detailed in Figures 7 2 1 7 202 STANDARD TERMINAL AUTOMATION REPLACEMENT SYSTEM STARS a The STARS system is comprised of the AN GPN 30 Digital Surveillance Radar Monopulse Secondary Surveillance Radar and digital Terminal Control Workstation TCW b The TCW radar indicators displays informat
51. REFERENCE Letters of Agreement 6 310 EQUIPMENT STATUS NOTIFICATION a FWOs shall ensure that appropriate sectors and maintenance personnel are notified of equipment status changes b FDIO Automation RD shall notify the following facilities when the DIO and or is out of service Washington Center Wilmington Approach Seymour Johnson Approach New River Tower New Bern Tower Giant Killer Cherry Point Tower NOTE The RD controller will be responsible for notifying FD when either or both the FDIO are out of service 6 311 VISCOM COORDINATION The VISCOM provides nonverbal communications between tower and radar for the coordination of aircraft on a radar or instrument approach Any required coordination that cannot be communicated via the VISCOM shall be completed via the IVCSS The communication panels are located above positions 1 2 3 and 7 in radar and position 18 in the tower Each panel is divided into three groups a Group One Type Aircraft C 130 A 6 F 18 8 5 Feb 15 Change 1 Other requires verbal coordination b Group Two Type Approach Wave Off Full Stop T G touch and go Low App ZDW tower downwind Wave Off NOTE The absence of a group two light during a 10 or 6 coordination indicates that the pilot is requesting the option Continue Group Three Distance Clearance 10 Mile for off duty runways 6 Mile 3 Mile Cont continue approach Clear Each button wh
52. Sector involved Aircraft Identification Type and location include all aircraft involved aircraft a type location aircraft b type location aircraft type location aircraft d type location aircraft e type location If applicable was aircraft under Radar Surveillance Controller information a Qualifications b Experience in ATC yrs mos c Qualification length experience on operating position yrs mos 8 Total amount of time controller was on position prior to incident hrs mins 9 Equipment Status 10 Weather Conditions 11 Number of Aircraft controller had responsibility for at time of incident 12 Was controller training being conducted on position at time of incident 12 Summary of Incident Figure 2 5 1 4 The recommendations and corrective actions to be taken to prevent a recurrence of the www safetycenter navy mil wess default htm operational error deviation REFERENCE e Message reporting of ATC hazards are now OPNAV INSTRUCTION 3750 6 done online through the Naval Safety Center website 2 5 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 2 507 NEAR MIDAIR COLLISION REPORTS a Only a pilot or flight crew member can file a Near Midair Collision NMAC report b When a pilot or flight crew member announces the intent to file a NMAC report obtain and complete the following information requested on FAA Form 8020 21 Complete the following Item 1 UTC dat
53. TTM limit for that position If at any time the additional training days approaches exceed the maximums listed in NATOPS the 4 3 8 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q shall submit a request for additional hours to DC 25 via their Regional T amp R Office b Upon the completion of additionally assigned OJT a qualification skill check shall be conducted c After the qualification skill check additional OJT may be assigned as long as the total additional OJT does not exceed 20 percent If the additional 20 percent has been used the trainee s FWO shall take one of the following actions 1 Qualification or 2 Suspension of OJT REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 2 9 4 314 TAPE TALK PROGRAM a Purpose is to periodically review controller phraseology voice quality and inter intraphone procedures b For Trainees Ata minimum the primary instructor or FWO along with the trainee shall conduct an audio tape review of at least 20 minutes of the trainee s 50 Performance Skill Check A record of all tape talks will be entered into the individuals ATC training jacket Qualified Controllers The Radar and Tower Chiefs shall randomly review audio tapes for the purpose of periodically reviewing qualified controllers phraseology voice quality and proficiency REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 2 7 4 315 OJT AND QUALIFICATION PROCESS
54. Tag LL a a a NKT11 If used a Stereo Tag must be the only filed 10 RTE NOT STORED a a a element in Field 10 OTP is not a legal Stereo Tag Estimated Time Enroute dddd 0130 must be suffixed to the destination 10 RTE FORMAT Estimated Time of Arrival 1445 Delay Data D d d dd D1 45 Delay Data must be suffixed only to a Fix name 10 RTE FORMAT Fix Radial Distance or Lat Long H 1 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Delay Data must not be suffixed to the last filed element 11 REMARKS O O Remarks If both are used O must be first 11 RMK FORMAT RMK Remarks 12 FIELD REFERENCE NUMBER Number dd 04 2 digits used in AM to designate field of stored FORMAT 13 data to be amended Must refer to valid field 21 number Leading zero optional Abbreviation LLL TYP INVALID FIELD REFERENCE SPD RTE Field Separator Space Must contain field number between 01 and 11 inclusive 13 LOCATION IDENTIFIER aala a a NKT Used in the SR message to specify the strip REJECT INVALID FIX 120026 requested its fix posting a a a a 3500N 1400W 14 SECTOR IDENTIFIER Not used by FDEP sources 15 MESSAGE CANCELLATION GROUP Cancellation Code CXX CXX 3 letters Space CXX Space required to cancel accompanying input message This field is used to cancel previous message w
55. WORKLOAD L M H COMPLEXITY R O M HRS APPROACHES TYPE OJT SIM EVALUATION LEGEND S Satisfactory N I Needs Improvement U Unsatisfactory N A Not a plicable Job Task Job Subtask Day 1 Day 2 A Separation Separation is ensured Safety alerts are provided B Control Judgment Awareness is maintained Good control judgement applied Priority of duties is understood Control actions correctly planned Positive control of situation provided C Traffic Management Prompt action taken to correct errors Effective traffic flow maintained Aircraft identification maintained Professional manner is maintained D Operating Methods and Procedures Flight strip postings complete correct Clearances complete correct timely LOA s LOP s Directives adhered to Navigational assistance is provided Weather information is provided Handoff procedures correct timely E Coordination and Communication Traffic advisories correct timely Coordination thorough timely Communication is clear concise Makes necessary transmissions Relief briefings complete and accurate F Phraseology Standard phraseology is adhered to Voice quality Speech rate G Equipment Equipment status information m
56. a compilation of training records for the trainee in question All documented training for classroom OJF OJT Skill Checks and simulation are analyzed by the Training Branch A CEB is convened in order to determine the disposition of the trainee c The composition of the CEB is at the discretion of the ATCFO d The ATCFO and or training team members may be asked to provide information during the CEB but shall not be part of the CEB e At the completion of the CEB a recommendation is forwarded to the ATCFO The recommendations shall include either 1 or 2 below 4 6 1 1 Continuation of training which may include a Reassignment to a new training team crew b Assignment of skill enhancement training c Assignment of a new amount of OJT time and or d Other actions that would help the individual to qualify 2 Discontinuation of training f The ATCFO shall consider the recommendation resulting from the CEB in making a final determination for continuation or discontinuation of training for the trainee g The results of this training review process shall be communicated to the trainee as soon as possible and in no case shall the training review process exceed 30 days from the date of suspension of OJT 4 604 SUSPENSION OF TRAINING The suspension of training on any position will be handled on a case by case basis copy of the suspension letter shall be retained in the MPR a Reasons
57. all scheduled operations have been accomplished except as noted and that all abnormal occurrences and conditions have bee recorded FAA Form 7230 4 Figure 2 3 18 2 3 22 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 372210 Position Loc 1 Where Combined 9 POSITION IDENTIFIER 10 Position we CEL El LE al el La CODE C ATCS ATA M Trainee Developmental Monitoring Supervisor Staff Spec R Trainee Developmental Certification T Trainee Developmental Evaluation FAA Form 7230 10 6 94 NSN 0052 00 024 6102 7 TIME OFF TIME ON Figure 2 3 19 2 3 23 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION BEPSFUDATE FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION REPORT Ap NT GMT 3 LOCATION OF ACCIDENT 5 TYPE OF FLIGHT JURED JURED ITY 6 FLIGHT CREW 7 PASSENGER DATA h NUMBER available list names addresses extent of injuries and INJURED other information on continuation sheet u DATE TIME FIRST REPORT SUBSEQUENT TO ACCIDENT ESS 11 WEATHER DATA 12 ATS PERSONNEL INVOLVED erating TURE OF FAA Form 8020 6 7 70 Formerly Form 2452 of Figure 2 3 20 2 3 24 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q UNIT
58. and lighted RATCF can talk to PAR shelter and OPS when released PAR shelter can talk to OPS and RATCF Used to connect external headset and microphone to intercom system Used to adjust audio level of internal audio amplifier for intercom headset RADAR CONTROL CHAN A CHAN B Indicator Switch HV ON Indicator Switch HV OFF Indicator Switch PARAMP BYPASS Indicator Switch Used to select channel A or channel B transmitter and receiver for operation Used to turn on high voltage of channel selected Indicates high voltage in on Used to turn off high voltage on channel indicator switch selected Indicates high voltage is off Used when parametric amplifier is installed to BYPASS indicator select parametric ON or switch parametric amplifier bypass in receiver When PARAMP ON is lighted indicates parametric amplifier on is selected when PARAMP BYPASS is lighted indicates parametric amplifier bypass is selected 7 2 7 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q Used to select velocity offset function in receiver ON or OFF When VEL OFFSET ON is lighted indicates velocity offset is selected ON and control by indicator is operational when VEL OFFSET OFF is lighted indicates velocity offset is selected OFF Used to select linear or logarithmic function of normal LIN LOG IF amplifier in receiver When LIN is LIN LOG Indicator Switch lighted indicates a linear IF condition is selected
59. any other position Whenever an associate position is closed the associated position responsibilities revert to the primary position 1 AR assumes duties and responsibilities LC assumes duties and responsibilities Midwatch From 2300 0700L all positions may be combined with a minimum requirement of one FWO and one RD FC in Radar and one TS in the Tower At no time shall the FWO secure or release the final controller from his her assigned place of duty d The tower shall be manned at least fifteen minutes prior to scheduled openings and if requested by a pilot a clearance may be read up to ten minutes prior to the field opening The duties of the FWO are normally combined with those of a branch supervisor but should not normally be assigned to a control position however he she may combine with any position NOTE See 4 302 for positions that may be combined for OJT 2 204 CIVILIAN EMPLOYEE BARGAINING UNIT INFORMATION AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 2 2 2 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 3 FORMS AND REPORTS 2 300 GENERAL a Exercise care when preparing forms to ensure neatness and accuracy The forms are a part of the facility s permanent records and subject to review by authorized personnel or agencies b Do not erase strike over or make superfluous marks or notations When it is necessary to c
60. applied separation is in Accordance with 7110 65 5 5 4 Multi Sensor to Single Sensor a Obtain RS approval b Notify APN APE APW AR c Select NKT as Radar site from STARS DCB Menu d Select NKT MVAC from STARS DCB menu AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 6 SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE 6 600 POLICY a Special Use Airspace consists of that airspace wherein activities must be confined because of their nature or wherein limitations are imposed upon aircraft operations that are not a part of those activities or both Except for controlled firing areas Special Use Airspace areas are depicted on aeronautical charts b The navigable airspace is a limited national resource the use of which congress has charged the FAA to administer in the public interest as necessary to ensure the safety of aircraft and the efficient use of such airspace Full consideration shall be given to the requirements of national defense and of commercial and general aviation and to the public right of freedom of transit through the airspace REFERENCE Airman s Information Manual FAA JO 7400 2 c Special Use Airspace programs are designed to accommodate national security and welfare and necessary military activity They identify for other airspace users where the activity occurs and protect other users from hazardous operations While establishment of Special Use Airspace is essential to national security and
61. at an altitude of 2000 feet and a distance equal to the maximum range of the scope 7 204 TOWER DISPLAY WORKSTATION d Descriptions of the FPN 63 Radar Indicator Reserved and associated control functions are listed on pages 7 2 7 through 7 2 9 7 205 FPN 63 PRECISION RADAR 7 206 FPN 63 CONTROL PANEL a The FPN 63 PAR radar is a solid state unit and is mounted on a remotely controlled turntable The FPN 63 control panel is located between The coverage of the FPN 63 is 8 degrees in elevation positions 2 and 3 in the IFR room This panel allows and 20 degrees in azimuth It allows either a 10 or 20 the controller to configure the precision approach mile range selection When MTI is used the equipment for various situations A depiction of this RANGE SELECT switch will choose either 10 or 15 panel and associated controls are shown on pages 7 miles The 5 mile range marks on the AZ EL scope 2 8 and 7 2 9 are brighter than the others There is also a PAR Minimum Marker on the elevation scan that marks 7 207 FPN 63 REMOTE CONTROL the decision height DH for the runway in use PANEL b The FPN 63 has an MTI velocity offset a The FPN 63 remote control panel is also control In cases of bad weather or blocks of trees located between positions 2 and 3 in the IFR room showing on the scope when MTI is selected you may just above the main control panel This panel is used to rotate the precision radar to the appropriate 7 2 4 AIR TRAFFIC C
62. authority say call sign of new MARSA authority 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Violation Penalty No Mission Number Aircraft attempting to gain access to R 5306A without a valid mission number Access will be denied to R 5306A Violating a Sub Area Aircraft entering a sub area that they have not scheduled or have not been cleared for entry The Squadron would not be permitted SUA access for 30 days and would be required to receive a course rules brief CRB from Range Targets ATC or Airspace personnel The 30 day suspension would be extended until the CRB is received Violating Bombing Target Airspace The Squadron would not be permitted SUA access for 30 days and would be required to receive a course rules brief CRB from Range Targets ATC or Airspace personnel The 30 day suspension would be extended until the CRB is received Not Monitoring the Area Common Frequency Upon three violations of failing to monitor the Area Common Frequency the Squadron would not be permitted SUA access for 30 days and would be required to receive a course rules brief CRB from Range Targets ATC or Airspace personnel The 30 day suspension would be extended until the CRB is received Spill Out of SUA Boundary Aircraft that exit and then attempt to re enter R 5306A Any flight spilling out of assigned SUA three times one mission will
63. be determined automatically by instruments or manually 1 1 and is reported in statute miles fractions thereof up to 3 miles From 3 to 15 miles visibility is given in whole miles 7 miles is considered unrestricted Prevailing visibility is the greatest distance that you can see throughout at least half of the horizon circle not necessarily continuous and is recorded in the body of the hourly aviation report 1 When determining prevailing visibility the horizon is divided into the eight points of the compass 2 If the prevailing visibility rapidly increases or decreases by 1 2 statute mile or more during the time of the observation and the average prevailing visibility is less than 3 miles the visibility is considered to be variable V and the minimum and maximum visibility values observed shall be reported in remarks 1 1 28M remarks VIS 1V2 3 When the prevailing visibility at the usual point of observation or at the tower level is less than 4 miles certified tower personnel will take visibility observations in addition to those taken at the usual point of observation The lower of these two values will be used as the prevailing visibility for aircraft operations e Weather and Obstructions to Visibility 1 Weather is a category of atmospheric phenomena that includes tornadoes funnel clouds waterspouts thunderstorms and precipitation 2 Obstructions to visibility are those phenomen
64. best advantage a Makes effective use ofrunways and taxiways b Provides orderly traffic flow with proper aircraft spacing and avoids use of excessive separation restrictions c Considers aircraft characteristics and their effect on traffic flow and properly sequences traffic d Manages ground traffic effectively and efficiently e Implements and recovers from holding procedures efficiently f Adheres to flow control procedures 3 Aircraft identity is maintained Maintains positive identification during the entire time the aircraft are within the area of responsibility a Uses radar displays to assist in maintaining identity b Re identifies aircraft when doubt exists c Detects errors in aircraft identity d Employs correct beacon and radar procedures in identifying aircraft e Maintains awareness of nonradar untracked unassociated or primary targets within delegated airspace f Remains aware of previously coordinated traffic 4 Professional manner is maintained Job Task OPERATING MET HODS AND PROCEDURES Job Subtask Indicator 1 Flight strip postings complete correct Posts all required information on strips and updates as required a Receives flight plans and distributes strips to correct operational positions in a timely manner b Posts all required information on strips and G 1 11 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY M
65. branch chief primary the alternate or the CTO examiner special AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q d Responsibilities With the exception of a CTO examination qualification skill checks shall be performed by a properly qualified Branch Chief or the trainee s who maintains currency on the operational position In the event the branch chief or supervisor only maintains familiarity on an operational position an OJTI shall be plugged in and responsible for the position during the qualification skill check The qualification skill check shall be accomplished through direct monitoring of the position e Documentation The results of the qualification skill check shall be documented on Performance Evaluations The documentation shall include 1 A description of performance 2 A recommendation for one of the following a Qualification b Continuation of OJT c Skill enhancement training d Suspension of OJT e Considerations After the qualification skill check the trainee s examiner shall consider 1 The trainee s performance during OJT 2 The trainee s performance demonstrated during the qualification skill check session 3 The recommendation s resulting from the qualification skill check session and 4 Input from other training team members f Outcome The examiner shall then take one of the following actions 1 Qualification For a qualification skill check
66. coordinate with the Tower Chief for the controllers that require certification The Tower Chief will schedule announce and provide the visibility course once per month based on the input from the watch crews 4 FWOs shall ensure all instructors and trainees are made aware of this directive no later than 8 Oct 10 a _ DISPOSITION Include in next change to the ATC Facility Manual Figure 1 1 1 15 Aug 13 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q FACILITY Issue 106 10 18 Mar 10 From Air Traffic Control Facility Officer To ATC Facility Subj MCALF BOGUE FIELD FLIGHT CHECK Encl 1 Facility Directive 027 09 1 A Flight Check for the Runway 23 ASR at Bogue Field is scheduled for 25 March 2010 at approximately 0830L 2 Procedures to be utilized for this evolution are prescribed in Enclosure 1 3 Any changes to the date time will be coordinated with the affected FWO s as soon as practicable Any questions or concerns should be addressed to the ATCFO DISPOSITION Self Cancels upon completion of Flight Check Figure 1 1 2 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 1 106 PUBLICATION DATES This manual and its changes are scheduled to be published every 12 months The effective date of each change update will be determined upon publication P3722 1Q 1 Aug 13 Change 1 5 Feb 15 Change 2 1 Aug 15 Change 3 1 Aug 16 1 107 PASS
67. duties is understood Positive control is provided Effective traffic flow is maintained D Methods and Procedures Aircraft identity is maintained Strip posting complete correct gt Clearance delivery is complete correct and timely N LOAs directives are adhered to gt Additional services are provided Rapidly recovers from equipment failures and emergencies Scans entire control environment Effective working speed is maintained Performance E Equipment Equipment status information is maintained Equipment capabilities are utilized understood F Communication Functions effectively as a radar tower team member Communication is clear and concise Uses prescribed phraseology Makes only necessary transmissions Uses appropriate communications method Relief briefings are complete and accurate G Other MCAS Form 3722 25 9 2014 Supersedes Previous Edition 2 3 19 Figure 2 3 15 5Feb 15 Change 1 FOUR DAY POSITION EVALUATION POSITION AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q WORKLOAD COMPLEXITY DATE YYMMDD WX IFR VFR L LIGHT MODERATE HEAVY R ROUTINE OCCASIONALLY DIFFICULT M MOSTLY DIFFICULT
68. entering a test flight plan in the FDIO use TTT as the first part of the call sign Doing so will identify the flight plan as a test NOT4ATC to the receiving controller When the flight plan information is no longer required enter an RS to remove the data from the computer 5 4 6 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 5 417 TAXI RESTRICTIONS a Warmup Area 2 is not authorized for use when the duty runway is 5 or 23 b Warmup Area 2 shall be clear of all traffic when landing Runway 23R or departing Runway SL c Wide body aircraft B747 L1011 DC10 etc and those aircraft who have the potential to have their wing tips penetrate the flight line parking areas are prohibited from Hotel taxiway 5 418 USE OF ACTIVE RUNWAYS When LC releases the duty runway to the ground controller for any operation other than crossing LC shall place the fouled deck sign for the effected runway in the active flight strip bay 5 419 DATA ENTRIES FOR NJM Aircraft requesting VFR flight following or clearance to NJM from NKT will be manual copies FD will assign one of its delegated codes 5 420 AIRPORT STATUS BOARD An airport status board is located between FD and LC and is used to provide a visual indication of airfield equipment status and conditions that may affect operations 5 421 ATIS a The ATIS board Figure 5 4 1 has been developed to provide a visual reference of airport information and weather for the tow
69. equipment malfunctions Record equipment malfunctions equipment released for service notification information and or course of action taken to correct problem and return of equipment to service NOTE If the branch tower or radar is closed prior to the beginning of the new business day changes in status can occur during non operational hours If the status of equipment or other facility operations has changed from status reported on previous days Form 7230 4 changes shall be noted in Watch Checklist entry as well as time of status change if known e g WCLC TACAN RTS 0700 If necessary place an in the left margin as prescribed below c Place a large letter E in the left hand margin beside entries on equipment malfunctions and or equipment released from service for maintenance The shall also be used when equipment is restored to service Use the following guidelines for equipment entries NOTE The E is to be used on entries related to equipment problems which require ATC Maintenance involvement The E is not required for routine maintenance items or for carryover entries on previously entered equipment malfunctions 1 Make succinct entries OTS RTS ACTIVE INACTIVE HOT COLD AVAILABLE UNAVAILABLE OPEN CLOSED UP DOWN 2 Add amplifying comments for clarity as necessary 3 Enter factual data relayed by maintenance F 1 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13
70. of the weather equipment used throughout the ATC facility It is intended to be used for information purposes only Procedures that have been established for the use of this equipment are listed in the appropriate section of this Manual 7 401 CLOCKS Digital clocks are located on all operating positions within the facility 7 402 DASI The digital altimeter setting indicator DASD is located on positions 3 7 8 9 12 and 14 in the radar room and positions 18 19 and 20 in the control tower 7 403 WEATHER VISION Weather vision displays are located in the IFR room above positions 6 and 10 and in the tower cab between positions 17 and 18 These displays contain general airport information and local displays of weather and other operational data pertinent to the local flying community and ATC The weather section is responsible for updating the displays with input from flying squadrons Air Ops and ATC 7 404 WIND INDICATORS a Digital wind indicators are located on positions 1 3 7 8 9 12 and 14 in the radar room and positions 18 19 and 20 in the control tower wind indicators receive wind information received from an anemometer at midfield b Alarm Indicators Lamp A Lights when the average wind direction changes by 30 degrees or more from the last sample report and wind speed is 20 knots or more in the last latest report 74 1 Lamp B Lights when the average wind speed has increased 10 knots or mo
71. shows the PEP flow chart ATCFO c Forms Facility Recommendation forms are located in the PEP binder in the briefing area REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 1 417 and 2 306 1 4 7 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Chapter 2 ADMINISTRATION Section 1 CHECK IN CHECK OUT PROCEDURES 2 100 MARINES CHECKING IN The assigned crew will help new personnel in getting settled and assist in making the transition easier New personnel should ensure that all paperwork given to them by the squadron civilian personnel department has been completed and returned New personnel will be provided the opportunity to meet and brief with the NCOIC and ATCFO during check in 2 101 CIVILIANS CHECKING IN Reserved 2 102 MARINES CHECKING OUT Prior to detachment from the facility all Marines shall a turn in their headsets b turn in publications that were issued by the facility Obtain a receipt for all materials turned in to complete the check out process NAVAIR O 307 11 paragraph 653 2 103 CIVILIANS CHECKING OUT Prior to detachment from the facility all civilians shall turn in their headsets and publications that were issued by the facility Obtain a receipt for all materials turned in to complete the check out process 2 1 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 2 1 2 5Feb 1
72. support VAW 120 PPA missions we must realize the challenges associated with an aircraft s steep spiraling descent from a 6 000 feet MSL HIGH KEY directly over the runway through the downwind leg and through base leg to the runway environment A 301 PRIORITY AND COORDINATION a VAW 120 will coordinate with the MCAS Cherry Point ODO and FWO three 3 hours in advance The ODO and FWO will deconflict VAW 120 requests from higher priority operations such as exercise activity FCLP Foxtrot taxiway South Pad UAV MMT AV8 Demo Flight Check ops etc b PPAs are authorized on a traffic permitting basis only and should not interfere with full stop traffic Once authorizing the PPA to begin every effort should be taken to provide the complete pattern c From time to time PPAs will not be compatible with the volume or flow of air traffic operating at or near the Cherry Point airport For example Tower traffic volume Arrival traffic volume Mars 900 series operations or an overhead approach could easily preclude a successful PPA On these occasions the aircraft should be instructed to hold at HIGH KEY and should be advised of the expected time of delay prior to receiving approval for the approach REFERENCE VAW 120 and NKT Airfield Operations LOA A 302 WEATHER MINIMA a The reported ceiling must be at least 1 000 feet above the HIGH KEY altitude b Flight visibility ground visibility and tower visibility must
73. t Search and Rescue SAR u Closed field operations 6 302 CONTACT APPROACH Upon a pilot s request for a contact approach the PAR controller will clear the aircraft for the contact approach When the radar segment of the approach is complete the FC will monitor the assigned frequency and position 18 on the intercom until the pilot contacts the tower The CCL shall advise the RAA when the contact approach to the pad has landed REFERENCE AOM paragraph 3014 7 ATCFM paragraph 5 302 6 303 GCA AND ILS PATTERNS The standard GCA patterns for all runways at NKT are depicted in figures 6 3 1 through 6 3 4 Initial crosswind turn of GCA pattern is designed to remain within the confines of the CDSA 6 304 FDIO TEST FLIGHT PLANS When entering a test flight plan in the FDIO use TTT as the first part of the call sign Doing so will identify the flight plan as a test NOT4ATC to the receiving controller When the flight plan information is no longer required enter an RS to remove the data from the computer AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Figure 6 3 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Figure 6 3 4 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 6 305 INSTRUMENT APPROACHES The following approaches have been established for airports within the MCAS Cherry Point airspace Refer to the appropriate Flight Information Publication or VIDS for a
74. the ATC Training Office 4 3 5 Figure 4 3 2 5 Feb 15 Change 1 3 A recommendation for one of the following a Continuation of OJT b Skill enhancement training Suspension of OJT d Qualification skill check g After the performance skill check the examiner shall consider 1 The trainee s performance during OJT 2 The performance demonstrated during the performance skill check session 3 The recommendation s resulting from the performance skill check session 4 Input from other training team members h The examiner shall then take one of the following actions 1 Continuation of OJT The trainee will continue OJT It is anticipated that qualification will be attained within the OJT time limit or that additional days will be assigned 2 Skill Enhancement Training Training other than OJT will be provided in order to improve performance The type s of training to be provided shall be recommended by the training team This training shall not count toward OJT hours 3 Suspension of OJT If training is suspended as a result of a performance skill check a CEB review shall be conducted 4 Conduct a qualification skill check REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 3 1 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 4 309 PERFORMANCE SKILL CHECK Qualified a Performance skill checks for qualified controllers are required each calendar year and wheneve
75. the bomb going to explode Where is it right now What does it look like What kind of bomb is it What will cause it to explode Did you place the bomb Why What is your address What is your name EXACT WORDING OF THE THREAT Sex of the caller Race Age Length of call Number at which call was received Time Date Day Month Year BOMB THREAT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Figure 3 2 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 3 2 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Chapter 4 TRAINING Section 1 RESPONSIBILITIES 4 100 GENERAL All personnel involved in Air Traffic Control technical training shall maintain a comprehensive working knowledge of the procedures and guidelines outlined in this manual and the applicable Navy and FAA directives 4 101 ATCFO RESPONSIBILITIES The ATCFO shall ensure that a A facility training program is established and conducted in accordance with Navy Marine Corps and local directives b A Training Chief Tower Chief and Radar Chief are designated to administer the facility training program c At least one employee is qualified to teach the OJT Instructor course d Individuals designated as OJT Instructors attend an OJT instructor course within one year of their designation e A MACCS Performance Record is initiated and maintained f Resourc
76. the missed approach point in relation to the runway PHRASEOLOGY Missed approach point is point eight five miles from runway REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 10 11 15 Aug 15 Change 2 6 320 LOST COMM INSTRUCTIONS When weather reports indicate that an aircraft will likely encounter IFR weather conditions during the approach issue lost communication instructions as soon as possible after establishing radar identification and radio communications PHRASEOLOGY TACAN Equipped If no transmissions received for one minute in the pattern or five fifteen seconds final approach attempt contact Cherry Point Approach 268 7 124 1 and proceed VFR If unable proceed to TARHL DME fix maintain last assigned altitude proceed with TACAN runway 32 left approach circle to runway ___ NKT Non TACAN Equipped If no transmissions received for one minute in the pattern or five fifteen seconds on final approach attempt contact Cherry Point Approach 268 7 124 1 and proceed VFR If unable proceed to GRAVY initial approach fix maintain last assigned altitude proceed with ILS runway 23 right approach circle to runway ___ REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 10 4 AOM paragraph 4003 6 321 RESTRICTED LOW APPROACH PHRASEOLOGY call sign Cleared restricted low approach at or above five two niner traffic description and location acknowledge restriction REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3
77. will ensure that the SUA Activation log MCAS Form 3722 13 is completed Time entered SUA time exited SUA and the number in flight for the appropriate mission number will be transcribed from the flight progress strips to the spreadsheet Any approved mission number that is not on the schedule will be added to the bottom of the spreadsheet If no operations were completed write operations b When complete the training office will transmit the information to Range Control See Figure 2 3 9 2 309 TOWER VISIBILITY LOG When the prevailing visibility at the Tower level is less than four miles certified tower personnel shall take prevailing visibility observations and record this information on the Tower Visibility Observation Log MCAS Form 3722 14 This form is used to record those observations See Figure 2 3 10 REFERENCE 1 NAVMETOCCOMINST 1500 3 FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 6 6 2 3 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 310 VEHICLE OPERATOR S CERTIFICATE The Vehicle Operator s Certificate MCAS Form 3722 8 is issued to local units that have received instruction from Air Traffic Control on the proper use of movement and nonmovement areas This certificate is required when checking out a radio from flight planning NATOPS requires all airfield vehicle operators to receive this training annually See Figure 2 3 11 REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 2 7 3 1 2 311 ELECT
78. 0 1000 1100 _ __ __ 1STLTPADILLA CSI SFAM 0201 1F1 EP SIM RNWSTA 1015 1100 1230 __ 1STLTCUMBIE MAJ BRENNAN REQ 0025 0601 213 INSTRUMENT RNWSTA 1215 1300 1500 7 1STLTABRAMOVS MAJ SFAM 0012 1A1 RNWSTA 1415 1500 1600 __ __ MAJOSBORNE MAJ DIVINEY REQ 0600 0602 2L4 MAJ WIDENER MONITOR RNWST 1515 1600 1700 7 1STLTHARRIS CSI SAS 0093 1A7 RNWST 1615 1700 1800 _ __ 1STLTYUNKER CSI SAS 0092 1A7 RNWSTA 1800 1800 2000 ____ CLASS 11 1 CSI 1 1 MPCD DEMO RNWSTE 0645 0730 0900 __ CAPTCALLISON CSI RSAS 0180 1E7 RN 1515 1600 1800 _ __ 1STLTWHITE MAJ DALE SFAM 0011 1A1 1715 1800 1900 __ 15 5 CSI SAS 0093 1A7 1715 1900 200 __ 1STLT BRAUDT csi SAS 0093 1A7 ACADEMIC SCHEDULE FOR WEDNESDAY 20 OCT 2010 START END NAME LECTURE NOTES A S PLANNING AND TIMELINE MANAGEMENT 1700 GENERAL NOTES 0800 1200 IGS FOR CLASS 10 8 8 MATSS BUILDING 0800 0845 ORM CRM CLASS WITH MAJ MASON 0845 0930 SIR REVIEWS WITH CAPT NEELY 0930 1030 A S STAN MEETING FOR ALL AVAILABLE IP S 1030 1130 NATOPS REVIEW IN DSS FOR LTCOL KILLIAN CAPT S TACQUARD AND NEELY 1300 1345 ORM CRM CLASS WITH LTCOL KILLIAN 1345 1430 SIR REVIEWS WITH NEELY 1400 NET FOR MAJ DIVINEY NS FLIGHT WITH VMA 223 1715 BRIEF 1500 1700 CO S OFFICE HOURS ALL PILOTS MUST ATTEND EITHER THE MORNING SESSION OR AFTERNOON SESSION OF ORM CRM CLASSES AND SIR REVIEWS Figure 2 3 21 2 3 25 AIR TRAFF
79. 0 ED Ria a aa a aa 1 NNNNNNNR 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 3 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 4 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 3 15 Aug 15 Change 2 4 300 4 301 4 302 4 303 4 304 4 305 4 306 4 307 4 308 4 309 4 310 4 311 4 312 4 313 4 314 4 315 4 316 4 317 4 400 4 401 4 402 4 403 4 404 4 405 4 406 4 500 4 501 4 502 4 503 4 504 4 600 4 601 4 602 4 603 4 604 4 605 4 700 4 701 4 702 4 703 4 704 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Section 3 ATC TRAINING PROGRAM GENERAL DEFINITIONS FACILITY TRAINING REQUIREMENTS MINIMUM OJT POSITION TIME SELECTION QUALIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF OJTIs TRAINING TEAMS TRAINING PLAN LESSON FORMAT PERFORMANCE SKILL CHECK Trainee PERFORMANCE SKILL CHECK Qualified SKILL ENHANCEMENT TRAINING Trainee QUALIFICATION SKILL CHECK EXAMINERS ADDITIONAL OJT TAPE TALK PROGRAM OJT AND QUALIFICATION PROCESS FLOWCHART GCA IFR TRAINING DESIGNATIONS Section 4 TRAINING AND READINESS MACCS PERFORMANCE RECORD LOS LTG AND T amp R EVENTS COMBAT READINESS PERCENTAGE REPORTING RESPONSIBILITIES POSITION EVALUATIONS DISPOSITION OF RECORDS AND REPORTS OPERATING INITIALS Section 5 MOS PROGRESSION GENERAL NAVAIR 655 MOS MANUAL NAVAIR 655 PROGRESSION Section 6 WAIVERS AND REVOCATIONS GENERAL DOCUMENTS REQUIREMENTS CONTROLLER EVALUATION BOARD SUSPENSION OF TRAINING DISCONTINUATION OF TRAINING Section 7 SIMULATORS GENERAL I
80. 036025 W122 BURNER 0129 0135 0225 6 6 5 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q EXAMPLE 2 IFR strip for BURNER ATCAA BURNER not in remarks CHIEF32 4630 E2328 170 R F15 1 NKT KGSB 1LM319062 GSB p 125 Zew 0D2 00J0ELALTRAVGS BURNR 0129 0135 0225 Single aircraft using the BURNER Two 2 IFR operations inbound enroute RTB one 1 SUA Ifrequested ATCAA is not in remarks section already manually write it in EXAMPLE 3 IFR strip for BURNER ATCAA with multiple transitions CHIEF32 4630 E2328 170 R F15 1 NKT 2 KGSB ILM319062 GSB R 125 ZCW 0D 2 00JOELALTRAVGS FUrne w122 0129 0135 0225 Single aircraft using the BURNER and transitioning into W 122 then back into the BURNER ATCAA concluding with RTB If requested ATCAA is not in remarks section already manually write itin Two 2 IFR operations inbound enroute RTB two 2 SUA because it transitioned into W 122 then back into the ATCAA EXAMPLE 4 IFR strip with multiple aircraft and multiple transitions CHIEF32 4630 E2328 170 2 r15A NKT KGSB ILM319062 GSB 125 ZCW 0D 2 00JOELALTRAV 65 joie 122 10129 0135 0225 Flight of two aircraft nonstandard formation flight indicated by circling the number in flight F
81. 1 509 provides Federal agencies authority to grant civilian employees time off from duty without loss of pay or charge to leave as an incentive award Called time off awards this incentive may be used to encourage and reward superior accomplishment or other personal efforts that contribute to the quality efficiency or economy of government operations 1 305 ATC TRAINER OF THE YEAR AWARD The CWO 3 Joseph G Hendrickson ATC Trainer of the Year Award is an annual award honoring Mr Joe 5Feb 15 Change 1 Hendrickson and his dedication to the Cherry Point Air Traffic Control Training Program a The nominees should represent those qualities of a trainer and instructor that Mr Hendrickson has instilled through his OJTI course b The award will be based on the following statistical criteria 1 OJT Instructor Hours 2 Classroom Instructor Hours 3 Number of trainees impacted over 20 hours for junior positions 30 hours for major 4 Number of positions trained 5 Simulation Instructor Hours c The Training Branch will announce the top six award nominees from the previous year based on the above criteria no later than 10 January of each year The Crew Chief and or for each nominee shall submit a paragraph 100 150 words describing the nominee s intangible traits no later than 15 January Input should include character leadership ability student instructor relationship and any other factors that have a bearin
82. 104 WEATHER ADVISORIES AND WARNINGS a Airman s Meteorological Information AIRMET In flight weather advisories issued only to amend forecast concerning weather phenomena which are of operational interest to all aircraft and potentially hazardous to aircraft having limited capability because of lack of equipment instrumentation or pilot qualifications AIRMETs concern weather of less severity than that covered by SIGMETs or convective SIGMETs AIRMETs cover moderate icing moderate turbulence sustained winds of 30 knots or more at the surface widespread areas of ceilings less than 1000 and or visibility less than 3 miles and extensive mountain obscurement b Significant Meteorological Information SIGMET WS A weather advisory issued concerning weather significant to the safety of all aircraft SIGMET advisories cover severe and extreme turbulence severe icing and widespread dust or sandstorms that reduce visibility to less than 3 miles c Center Weather Advisory A Center Weather Advisory CWA is an unscheduled weather advisory issued by Center Weather Service Unit B 1 3 ATCFacO P3722 1Q meteorologists for ATC use to alert pilots of existing or anticipated adverse weather conditions within the next two hours A CWA may modify or redefine a SIGMET d Convective SIGMET A Convective SIGMET WST is a weather advisory concerning convective weather significant to the safety of all aircraft Convective SIGMETs are issu
83. 15 Aug 15 CHAPTER ONE 1 105 EFFECTIVE DATES Next edition dates added 1 106 PUBLICATION DATES Next edition dates added CHAPTER TWO FIG 2 3 4 RADAR TOTALS Form updated to includes SUA counts CHAPTER FOUR 4 104 SATCS RESPONSIBILITIES MACCS Form and progression benchmarks added 4 106 TRAINEE RESPONSIBILITIES Responsibility for completion of tests added 4 305 TRAINING TEAMS And or added to simulation and OJF requirements Shall changed to should for responsibility 4 307 LESSON FORMAT Format for LTGs updated 4 311 QUALIFICATION SKILL CHECK FWS replaced with SATCS 4 504 T amp R SUPPLEMENTS Titles updated and instructor events added 4 603CONTROLLER EVALUATION BOARD Added phrase to include additional time if granted 4 705 SIMULATOR TRAINING REQUIREMENTS Will change to may CHAPTER FIVE FIG 5 1 2 Runway distances updated 5 205 TOWER FLIGHT DATA Phraseology for formation flights corrected 5 405 LOCAL IFR CLEARANCES Clearance fix corrected for HITACAN Z and HITACAN 14L 5 430 OPPOSITE DIRECTION New paragraph added to establish required opposite direction procedures 5 501 TERMINAL DATA ENTRIES Block 3 use revised CHAPTER SIX 6 105 DISCRETE BEACON CODE ASSIGNMENTS Delegated beacon code assignment revised 6 209 FINAL CONTROL Requirements for verbal coordi
84. 16 Ya 2 14 4 20 1 8 5 8 21 5 25 3 16 2 6 30 Ya 7 8 3 7 35 5 16 1 8 40 3 8 11 8 9 Etc 1 1 4 10 1 3 8 11 1 12 1 5 8 13 1 34 14 1 7 8 15 2 Figure B 2 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q QUALIFIER WEATHER PHENOMENA INTENSITY DESCRIPTOR PRECIPITATION OBSCURATION OTHER OR PROXIMITY 1 2 3 4 5 Well Developed Light MI Shallow DZ Drizzle BR Mist PO Whirls BC Patches RA Rain FG 50 Squalls FC Funnel Cloud Moderate FC Well No DR Low Drifting SN Snow FU Smoke Developed Qualifier Funnel Cloud Tornado or Waterspout BL Blowing SG Snow Grains DU Dust SS Sandstorm Heavy or Well SH Showers IC Ice Crystals SA Sand DS Duststorm Developed TS Thunderstorm PE Ice Pellets HZ Haze In the Vieinity FZ Freezing GR Hail PY Spray Small Hail or Partial GS Snow Pellets VA Ash lt 1 4 Unknown Precipitation The weather groups shall be constructed by considering columns 1 5 in this table in sequence i e intensity followed by descriptor followed by weather phenomena i e heavy rain showers is coded as SHRA Automated stations only Figure B 2 3 Reportable Contractions Meaning Summation Amount Vertical Visibility indefinite ceiling 8 8 SKC or CLR Clear 0 or 0 below 12 000 FEW Few gt 0 but l
85. 1757 MEI Add Remove Set Color _ A 2 5 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO 372210 KNKT R23R APPROACH f Routes Displayed 1 B2PS0004 TIER2P 163 APP 238 NKT A2041 2062 B2P9A004 TIER2P 164 C3 238 NKT Z2063 2070 Add Remove Set Color CAPE LOOKOUT NAL SEASHO KNKT R23R APPROACH A 2 6 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q KNKT R23R MISSED APPROACH AND ENGINE OUT ROUTES IN RED Routes Displayed B2P9A004 2 165 C4 238 NKT G2071 2085 urn B2P9A004 178 C3 4 23R CHERRY SHORT Z2401 2408 B2P9A004 179 C3 4 23R CHERRY 22409 2417 Add Remove Set Color E Close Help 2 f ES S e NDB CHERRY POINT pS e207 VAN 4 7 532 gt bD A 1 0 NNR KNKT R23R ENGINE OUT LANDING FROM MISSED APPROACH ROUTES 2 KNKT R23R ENGINE OUT LANDING FROM MISSED APPROACH ROUTES 2 A 2 7 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q KNKT R23R ENGINE OUT STRAIGHT IN 1 2 98004 TIER2P 164 C3 23R 22063 2070 Add Remove Set Color Help A 2 8 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 3 PRACTICE PRECAUTIONARY APPROACH PROCEDURES A 300 GENERAL As we
86. 2 04 97 076 03 49 36 DEPNE RNAV RWY 6 W95 34 58 53 29 076 08 30 61 FILVO IAF RNAV RWY 6 W95 35 06 35 69 076 16 17 36 JELIK IAF RNAV RWY 24 W95 35 20 57 95 075 55 08 86 KASVE RNAV RWY 24 W95 35 13 14 48 075 47 22 78 LAMGE FAF RNAV RWY 24 W95 35 10 03 20 075 52 05 08 MUTVE IAF RNAV RWY 24 W95 35 18 49 92 075 37 14 79 PUNGO EWN 050 PMZ 137 RNAV RWY 24 6 W95 35 36 37 99 076 27 03 31 WASHINGTON WARREN FIELD BROTH FAF LOC 5 35 30 11 80 077 06 51 69 IAF RNAV RWY 5 35 28 17 53 077 16 13 93 COULD IF RNAV RWY 5 35 25 18 11 077 11 19 41 DECO IAF RNAV RWY 5 35 22 18 49 077 06 25 25 HALAX IFNAF MA RNAV RWY 5 23 17 35 35 43 33 67 076 54 37 29 KEKBE MA RNAV RWY 23 35 38 37 91 077 14 57 91 SODOY MA RNAV RWY 23 35 29 25 22 077 07 34 15 DIBNE IAF RNAV RWY 23 35 46 33 75 076 59 32 32 CAGLU IAF RNAV RWY 23 35 40 33 38 076 49 42 63 JOROX FAF RNAV RWY 23 35 38 40 06 076 59 06 79 HAGSO IAF RNAV RWY 17 35 42 19 73 077 14 12 19 SOLIE IF RNAV RWY 17 35 44 26 07 077 08 37 91 WEMOX IAF RNAV RWY 17 35 47 08 61 077 02 35 44 ZIPDA FAF MA RNAV RWY 17 35 35 38 53 55 077 05 29 31 HOVNI IF VOR DME RWY 5 35 27 26 64 077 20 15 38 MIZEL FAF MA VOR DME RWY 5 35 31 44 86 077 09 11 89 WATGO IAF RNAV RWY 35 35 21 58 70 077 02 40 56 JUMDO IF RNAV RWY 35 35 24 04 57 076 57 07 41 MERPE IAF RNAV RWY 35 35 26 10 19 076 51 33 97 ZAMPI FAF RNAV RWY 35 35 29 37 41 077 00 14 93 2 6 5 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL
87. 22 1Q a May without verbal coordination authorize participants into APN SUA except subareas after completing an automated handoff or for participants departing NKT after receiving flight progress information from APN NOTE Participant aircraft departing NKT will call APN for squawk into North Sector SUA NOTE ATC will not approve actual mission numbers to avoid implying that actions of aircraft within SUA are approved b Provides approved separation between military participants and any IFR or VFR non participant aircraft authorized in SUA c Provides all services to departing aircraft from NKT REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraphs 9 1 3 1 and 9 1 3 2 6 205 APPROACH NORTH This position performs the duties and responsibilities of terminal area control service and SUA control as outlined in the references within the designated airspace Also APN provides approved separation between military participants and any IFR or VFR non participant aircraft authorized in SUA REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraphs 9 1 3 1 6 206 RADAR ASSOCIATE POSITIONS Responsibilities for the Radar Associate Positions are listed in FAA JO 7110 65 The assignment of these positions is at the discretion of the FWO REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 10 2 NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 1 3 3 15 Aug 15 Change 2 6 207 ARRIVAL CONTROL Duties and responsibilities are listed in ATC NATOPS FAA JO 7110 65 loc
88. 24 1 squawk code i COPTER 23R call sign cleared to HOMUS After departure runway rwy heading maintain 1600 Departure frequency will be 268 7 124 1 squawk code j HI TACAN 14L call sign cleared to MADAC After departure runway rwy heading maintain 5000 expect 11 000 one zero minutes after departure Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code TACAN RWY 5R call sign cleared to JULTO After departure runway rwy heading maintain 1600 Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code 1 TACAN RWY 14L call sign cleared to KIYEK After departure runway rwy heading maintain 3000 Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 Chap 6 and paragraph 4 2 1 Letters of Agreement Facility Manual paragraph 6 330 m Department of Defense Form 175 DD 175 will be used for other than local flights The only flight plan the tower is authorized to initiate are local flights on the daily flight schedule conducting 5 4 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q operations in the local flying area unless otherwise instructed to do so by flight planning n Flight planning is responsible for entering all flight plans for non tenant aircraft All non tenant aircraft calling the tower for their clearance for which there is no flight plan on file shall be instructed to contact flight planning The
89. 29 ANNUAL SKILL CHECKS The annual skill check form MCAS Form 3722 24 will be completed for each controller during their birthday month See Figure 2 3 26 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q SUA VIOLATION Reporting Facility MCAS Cherry Point TRACON Date Time UTC Controlling Facility MCAS Cherry Point TRACON Summary of Events 1 Report all violations to the ATCFO within 3 hours of the violation 2 If the violation resulted in a loss of separation or report of a NMAC with another aircraft outside the SUA report the incident as a pilot deviation and forward this report to the ATCFO within 3 hours of the incident MCAS FORM 3722 2 01 06 Supersedes Previous Edition Figure 2 3 1 2 3 5 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 CONTROL TOWER ATCFacO P3722 1Q EMERGENCY CALL SHEET POB INTENTIONS CRASH PHONE NUMBER FLIGHT CLEARANCE HOSPITAL 467 9407 466 0152 RECOVERY 467 9416 WEATHER d 466 2346 467 9414 PHONE AGENCY NUMBER INITIALS ALPHA pare MCAS FORM 3722 3 02 2012 Supersedes Completed By Initials Previous Edition Figure 2 3 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 372210 OPERATIONAL DISCREPANCY REPORTED BY TYPE OF DISCREPANCY TIME AND DATE FACILITY AIRCRAFT INVOLVED SUMMARY OF DISCREPANCY ACTION TAKEN DA
90. 3 paragraph 2 1 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q PUBLICATION NAME DESCRIPTION TRNG RDR TWR AIM Aeronautical Information Manual u FAA JO 6191 3 STARS Maintenance Technical Handbook JO 6300 13 Radar Systems Flight Inspection i FAA JO Order 7110 10 Flight Services FAA JO Order 7110 65 Air Traffic Control 1 FAA JO Order 7210 3 Facility Operations il ui FAA JO Order 7340 2 Contractions id m JO Order 7350 8 Location Identifiers d 1 1 FAA Order 7400 2 Handling Airspace Matters FAA JO Order 7400 8 Special Use Airspace d JO Order 7400 9 Airspace Designations ii id FAA JO Order 7610 4 Special Military Operations id Order 7930 2 Notices to Airmen 1 1 FAA Order 3120 4 Training Program i FAA Order 7110 9 STAR m FAA Otrder 7130 3 Holding Pattern Airspace JO Order 7210 633 Air Traffic Quality Assurance u FAA Order 7220 1 DoD Certification and Rating Procedures FAA Order 7910 1 Aeronautical Video Map Program id FAA Order 8000 90 AOV Credentialing FAA Order 8020 16 Aircraft Accident and Incident d FAA Order 8200 1 Flight Inspection Manual ui FAA Order 8260 19 Flight Procedures and Airspace Low Alt US Vol 4 IFR Supplement
91. 411 2 500 2 501 2 502 2 503 2 504 2 505 2 506 2 507 2 600 2 601 2 602 2 603 2 604 2 605 2 606 2 607 2 608 2 609 2 610 2 700 2 701 2 702 2 703 2 704 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL MCIEAST MONTHLY REPORT MCIEAST QUARTERLY SITREP MCIEAST NATOPS EVALUATION INTERNAL NATOPS EVALUATION ASRS ANNUAL SKILL CHECKS Section 4 BILLET AND POSITION DESCRIPTIONS ATC FACILITY OFFICER ATC FACILITY NCOIC TRAINING CHIEF CONTROL TOWER CHIEF RADAR CHIEF FACILITY WATCH OFFICER FWO MARINES SERVING AS FWO ATC FACILITY CREW CHIEF ATC TRAINING SUPPORT SPECIALIST ADMINISTRATIVE CLERK TERPS SPECIALIST TRAINING DEVICE PERSONNEL Section 5 HAZREP AND WESS REPORTING GENERAL COMPILING INFORMATION WESS AND DMS REQUIREMENTS REPORTING PROCEDURES REPORTING CHAIN OF COMMAND FORWARDING CHAIN OF COMMAND RESPONSIBILITIES NEAR MIDAIR COLLISION REPORTS Section 6 LOCAL INFORMATION LOCAL BASED SQUADRONS AIRPORT VEHICLES LANDING ZONES LOCATION IDENTIFIERS AIRSPACE AND APPROACH FIXES INTERFACILITY LANDLINES INTRAFACILITY LANDLINES CHERRY POINT LANDLINE NUMBERS LOCAL FREQUENCIES ADJACENT FACILITY FREQUENCIES CLASS D SURFACE AREAS Section 7 PUBLICATIONS GENERAL TRAINING BRANCH LIBRARY TOWER BRANCH LIBRARY RADAR BRANCH LIBRARY SIMULATOR LIBRARY 111 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 4 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2
92. 5 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 2 ORGANIZATION 2 200 ORGANIZATION The is a division of the Airfield Operations Department The division consists of the ATC Facility Office Radar Branch Control Tower Branch and the Training Branch 2 201 PURPOSE AND MISSION The primary purpose of the is to prevent a collision between aircraft operating in the system and to organize and expedite the flow of traffic Additionally the mission of the is to train entry level Marines for service with Fleet Marine Forces 2 202 TASKS Tasks of the ATCF include but are not limited to the following services are provided in accordance with current manuals directives and Letters of Agreement a Provide terminal and enroute ATC services b Monitor assigned air navigational aids and frequencies c Interface with other ATC facilities regarding air traffic control matters which affect safety of flight 2 203 COMBINING OF POSITIONS At the discretion of the FWO the following positions may be combined in the specified circumstances indicated a Reduced Operations TAC flying has been secured significantly reduced or none are scheduled throughout the remainder of the watch RADAR APE APN APW AR 2 2 1 TOWER GC FD LC TS b Associate positions are considered closed if not operational and therefore have no requirement to be combined with
93. 7 09 2014 Supersedes Previous Edition 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Job Task SEPARATION Job Subtask Indicator 1 Separation is ensured Provides control instructions or restrictions to ensure separation standards are maintained at all times a Issues appropriate control instructions or restrictions including speed control vectoring techniques and visual separation b Ensures traffic entering departing his her airspace is not in conflict or about to lose separation c Obtains specific approval prior to entering another position s facility s area of jurisdiction 2 Safety alerts are provided Recognizes that safety alerts are a first priority duty along with separation of aircraft and remains constantly alert for unsafe proximity situations a Informs pilot or appropriate controller when unsafe situation has been observed b Issues alternate course of action when feasible Job Task CONTROL JUDGMENT Job Subtask Indicator 1 Awareness is maintained 2 Good control judgment is applied Issues control instructions or restrictions that are correct Carefully plans procedures prior to issuing instructions to provide a safe expeditious traffic flow a Uses correct speed control procedures and techniques b Applies effective vectoring techniques c Considers aircraft performance capabilities in control decisions and demons
94. 7 2 4 7 208 GENERATORS 7 2 5 7 200 RESERVED 7 2 5 7 210 7 2 5 7 211 OD 152 SURVEILLANCE RADAR INDICATOR 7 2 9 7 12 DAIR 7 2 9 Section 3 NAVIGATIONAL EQUIPMENT 7 300 GENERAL 7 3 1 7 301 AIRFIELD LIGHTING AND CONTROL SYSTEM 7 3 1 7 302 NAVAID MONITORS 7 3 2 7 303 NAVIGATION AIDS 7 3 2 Section 4 WEATHER EQUIPMENT 7 400 GENERAL 7 4 1 7 401 CLOCKS 7 4 1 7 402 DASI 7 4 1 7 403 WEATHER VISION 7 4 1 7 404 WIND INDICATORS 7 4 1 APPENDIX A SPECIAL OPERATIONS Section 1 GENERAL A 100 GENERAL A 1 1 A 101 PRIORITY A 1 1 Section 2 UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE OPERATIONS A 200 GLOBAL HAWK INTRODUCTION A 2 1 A 201 AIRCRAFT SPECIFICATIONS A 2 1 A 202 COORDINATION PRIOR TO MISSION A 2 1 A 203 EMERGENCY LANDING A 2 2 A 204 EMERGENCY CONSIDERATIONS A 2 2 A 205 LANDING PROFILES A 2 3 Section 3 PRACTICE PRECAUTIONARY APPROACH 15 Aug 15 Change 2 A 300 A 301 A 302 A 303 A 304 A 400 A 401 B 100 B 101 B 102 B 103 B 104 B 105 B 106 B 107 B 200 B 201 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL GENERAL PRIORITY AND COORDINATION WEATHER MINIMA PATTERN STRUCTURE PROCEDURES Section 4 AC 130 WITH HOT GUNS PROCEDURES GENERAL PROCEDURES APPENDIX B WEATHER Section 1 GENERAL GENERAL OBSERVATIONS WEATHER DEFINITIONS PILOT WEATHER REPORTS WEATHER ADVISORIES AND WARNINGS THUNDERSTORM CONDITIONS DESTRUCTIVE WEATHER CONDITIONS DESTRUCTIVE WEATHER Section 2 WEATHER SEQUENCE GENER
95. 722 1Q PES OF FDIO MESSAGES AND SEQUENCE OF FIELDS 02 AID 12 Field 17 Data 2 17 etc Field Data 35 Altimeter Entrance Time 13 Location ID Data 34 13 34 etc Altimeter 02 AID 07 TIM 08 01 02 07 08 ALT A maximum of Six Dept Per MSG 02 AID 03 TYP 07 TIM 09 ALT 10 RTE 04 05 BCN SPD 06 FIX 02 03 09 ALT 10 RTE 04 05 BCN SPD 06 FIX 16 Output 16 etc Rte O No Oxygen 02 AID 21 Hold Data FIX Time 02 AID 18 Progress FIX or Strip No Time 13 ARTS Facility 02 13 AID ARTS Facility 02 AID 02 03 05 07 TYP SPD TIM 08 09 10 ALT RAL RTE 11 RMK 02 16 AID 13 Location Identifier or Strip No Output Routing 16 Output Routing 13 Location ID 35 Altimeter Data Time 45 1335 45 13 35 45 Weather Data preceded by O allows additional WX sequence 13 Location ID 7 1 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q CHANNEL REC 2 REC 3 REC 4 REC 5 1 POS 1 POS 10 POS 17 243 0 POS 7 2 POS 2 POS 11 POS 18 268 7 POS 8 3 POS 3 POS 12 POS 19 340 2 POS 9 4 POS 4 POS 13 POS 20 119 35 POS 14 5 POS 5 POS 14 POS 21 377 175 VIDEO 6 POS 6 POS 15 POS 22 121 5 OPEN 7 POS 7 POS 16 ATIS 121 3 OPEN 8 POS 8 466 5960 TROJAN OPEN 132 5
96. 75 OPEN 9 POS 9 OPEN CRASH A 124 1 OPEN Figure 7 1 4 7 110 TAPE RECORDERS a The purpose of recorders in ATC facilities is to record video and audio conversations between controllers and aircraft These recordings are used for aircraft accident analysis checks on circuit discipline analyzing adequacy and accuracy of ATC instructions and for immediate playback for assistance in search and rescue b Figure 7 1 4 lists the positions recorded on each of the five recorders at MCAS Cherry Point c Audio tapes are changed once daily at 2300L d Video tapes are changed twice daily at 1100L and 2300L REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 4 6 7 111 REMOTE RECORDER MONITOR a ATCM maintains eight audio recorders 4 upper decks and 4 lower decks to record ATC audio communications and two video recorders 1 upper deck and 1 lower deck to record secondary radar display When the primary tape deck fails either upper or lower the other transport instantly starts recording When a recorder is recording normally the amber and green lights will be illuminated When a deck fails an audio alarm is sounded at the local comm shop and remote IFR room sites and a visual alarm red light is illuminated b At the remote sites there are two alarm shut off switches The upper switch silences the alarm for either of the audio recorders and the lower switch silences the alarm for the video recorders c When a tape alarms the
97. 960 and training take prompt action c Blank forms are located in the FWO desk DISPENSARY PERMIT PRIVACYACT CASE NUMBER OPNAV 5100 9 Rev 11 88 DIO STATEMENT ON REVERSE TO DISPENSARY Location DATE OF REPORT SUPERVISOR S REPORT EMPLOYEE S NAME TIME amp DATE OF INJURY TIME LEFT JOB TIME RETURNED SOCIAL SECURITY NO GRADE RATE JOB TITLE OCCUPATIONAL YES 1 No L QUESTIONABLE REASON FOR REFERRAL INJURY ILLNESS EMPLOYEE S REQUEST OTHER Specify REMARKS SUPERVISOR S SIGNATURE SHOP OFFICE TELEPHONE NUMBER MEDICAL OFFICER S REPORT TIME REPORTED TIME RELEASED OCCUPATIONAL DEGREE OF INJURY YES NO QUESTIONABLE L FIRST AID _ MEDICAL TREATMENT JOTHER Explain DISPOSITION OF EMPLOYEE RETURN TO PERM JOB TEMP TRANSFER TO ANOTHER JOB TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT RESTRICT ACTIVITY UNTIL PERM TRANSFER TO ANOTHER JOB L SENT HOME BY DISPENSARY REFERRED TO PRIVATE PHYSICIAN HOSPITAL 1 OTHER Explain REMARKS DIAGNOSIS MEDICAL OFFICER S SIGNATURE INITIAL TREATMENT DETERMINATION C DISCHARGED TREATMENT COMPLETED RE TREATMENT REQUIRED Figure 1 4 6 b Action The PEB shall meet as necessary to d FWO Upon completing the form give the review and research all facility recommendations original to the employee and the copy to the Figure 1 4 5
98. ADRON CALL SIGN MODEX TYPE ODO OPS MAINT FREQ VMR 1 LOBO 560 9 5745 3476 2684 323 7 PEDRO H 46 VMAT 203 MARS KD AV 8 TAV 8 3151 2025 3332 361 45 VMA 223 STONE AV 8 2158 2332 3350 307 4 VMA 231 SPADE AV 8 4137 4487 4227 261 225 VMA 542 LUSTY WH AV 8 5008 4234 5008 252 625 NADEP DRIVER ANY TYPE 7999 7830 7820 293 825 VMAQT 1 BANSHEE CB EA 6B 6147 6146 6144 354 35 VMAQ 2 JESTER 6 6024 3759 6029 348 875 VMAQ 3 DOG MD EA 6B 2201 2576 6137 357 125 VMAQ 4 HOOK RM EA 6B 4205 4224 5976 360 975 VMGR 252 OTIS BH C 130 3800 3800 2011 236 25 VMU 2 NIGHTOWL SHADOW 4979 2 601 AIRPORT VEHICLES CALL SIGN TYPE AGENCY CHERRY 9 WHITE TOOLBOX TRUCK FACILITIES CHERRY 33 YELLOW EMERGENCY TRUCK RECOVERY CHERRY 35 SMALL WHITE FLATBED PICKUP RECOVERY CHERRY 37 WHITE VAN CHERRY 38 WATER TRUCK CFR CHERRY 39 NEON GREEN EMERGENCY TRUCK CFR SEC LDR CHERRY 40 WHITE FORD RANGER CFR SEC LDR CHERRY 41 59 P19 CFR CHERRY 65 WHITE PANEL VAN ATC MAINT CHERRY 67 WHITE PICKUP TRUCK ATC MAINT CHERRY 68 GREEN PICKUP W WHITE CAMPER ATC MAINT CHERRY 69 WHITE PICKUP EOD CHERRY 90 LARGE YELLO NADEP TUG NADEP CHERRY ECHO ETC HAND HELD FOR ANY VEHICLE PADDLES 633 GREEN KING CAB PICKUP AIROPS PADDLES 635 RED JEEP CHEROKEE AIROPS PADDLES WHITE VEHICLE ALL SQUADRONS VAL 1 SILVER 2 DOOR DODGE PICKUP VAL VAL 2 WHITE EXTENDED CAB PICKUP VAL VAL 3 WHITE KING CAB FOLLOW ME VAL VAL 4 WHITE KING CAB PICKUP VAL VAL PAX VAN BLU
99. AGE TOO LONG To enter weather 13 3545 OC5X S symbol It is a free format not to exceed 78 observation data for characters REJECT FIELD OMISSION selected adapted reporting station s REJECT NON ADAPTED STATION WR WEATHER 01 13 WR EWN Allows up to three reporting stations REJECT NON ADAPTED STATION To receive weather observation data for selected adapted reporting station s REJECT MESSAGE TOO LONG H 1 6
100. AL SEQUENCE ELEMENTS APPENDIX C LETTERS OF AGREEMENT PROCEDURE APPENDIX D MIDAIR COLLISION AVOIDANCE PROGRAM APPENDIX E GUIDE FOR POSITION LOGS APPENDIX GUIDE FOR DAILY RECORD OF FACILITY OPERATION APPENDIX G ATCFacO P3722 1Q A 3 1 A 3 1 A 3 1 A 3 1 A 3 1 A 4 1 A 4 1 Ria a a a Aa 1 L DN B 2 1 B 2 1 1 1 D 1 1 E 1 1 F 1 1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING THE FOUR DAY POSITION EVALUATION 1 1 APPENDIX H FLIGHT DATA INPUT OUTPUT FDIO HANDBOOK xi H 1 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 15 Aug 15 Change 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Section 1 GENERAL 1 100 PURPOSE a This manual prescribes air traffic control procedures and phraseology for use by persons providing air traffic control services Controllers are required to be familiar with the provisions of this manual that pertain to their operational responsibilities and to exercise their best judgment if they encounter situations that are not covered by it b This manual also provides personnel with the Administrative and Operational guidance for the safe and efficient operation of the ATC Facility at Marine Corps Air Station MCAS Cherry Point N C 1 101 DISTRIBUTION This manual is distributed to all air traffic controllers at MCAS Cherry Point and posted on the
101. ANUAL 15 Aug 13 5 503 DEPARTURE STRIPS a For IFR departure strips and amendments 1 Annotate in block 11 the runway designator for the standard initial departure climb out instructions issued to the aircraft 32 2 If the initial departure climb out instructions are non standard annotate the departure climb out instructions issued to the aircraft in block 9 and associated runway designator in block 11 TR 090 b Subsequent change s to the initial departure climb out instructions stripmarking are as follows 1 If the runway for which the initial standard departure climb out instructions were given is changed the controller shall the runway designator in block 11 and enter the new runway designator in block 12 The strip above indicates that standard departure climb out instructions were originally given for runway 32 then the departure runway was changed to runway 5 and runway 5 departure climb out instructions have been issued to the aircraft 2 If the runway remains unchanged but the standard non standard departure climb out instructions are changed annotate the change in block 9 Line one line out departure climb out instructions in block 9 that do not pertain 32 FR 696 TR 140 5 5 4 ATCFacO P3722 1Q c If the runway changes and the standard non standard departure climb out instructions changed X out the runway which does not pertain and wri
102. ANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q reviews and updates as required c Posts data in correct area on strips d Ensures postings are legible e Detects and corrects strip errors ensuring that actual altitude and route agree with strip information 2 Clearances complete correct timely Transmits issues clearances in correct format is specific and uses correct phraseology a Uses specific terms to describe a fix b Adheres to readback procedures Adheres to predeparture clearance PDC procedures 3 LOAs LOPs Directives adhered to Ensures performance and control instruction duties is in compliance with handbooks facility procedures and directives Adheres to requirements b Adheres to facility directives and local routing Instructions 4 Navigation assistance is provided Follows the required format for providing navigational assistance weather information and traffic advisories a Provides navigational assistance when operational advantage would be gained by pilot or controller b Provides significant weather information in a timely manner to aircraft and controllers facilities c Solicits pilot reports PIREPs as required Adheres to SIGMETs CWA procedures e Issues complete traffic information in required format for both radar identified and nonradar identified aircraft as required f Provides chaff services and bird activity information when necess
103. ARS ATCFacO P3722 1Q 17 TA 14L NKT TACAN 14L 18 AIRPORT MINOR AIRPORTS BY NAME 19 MRH RDR MRHLOC 26 amp NDB 21 20 MRHO826 MRH RNAV 8 amp 26 21 MRHO321 RNAV 3 amp 21 22 MRH1432 MRH RNAV 14 amp 32 23 EWN GPS EWN RNAV 4 amp 22 24 EWN ILS EWN ILS 4 25 HSE GPS HSE 7 25 26 W95 GPS W95 RNAV 6 amp 24 27 NCA RDR NCA ASR RWY 5 amp 23 28 NCA GPS NCA RNAV 1 5 19 amp 23 29 1 5 19 amp 23 30 NCA ILS ILS 31 32 NON RDR USED 33 V ROUTE VICTOR AIRWAYS 34 J ROUTE JET ROUTES 35 TOWER VFR REPORTING POINTS 36 SHORE SHORE LINE 37 MOAS GAMECOCK 8 ECHO MOA 38 NJM23 NJM TACAN amp ASR 23 39 KIWI KIWI TRACK 40 R5303 SHADE R 5303 41 R5304 SHADE R5304 42 R5306A SHADE R5306A 43 R5306C SHADE R5306C 44 R5306D SHADE R5306D 45 R5306E SHADE R5306E 46 HAT F SHADE HAT FMOA 47 SUB 3A SHADE BLUE SUB AREA 3A 48 SUB 3B SHADE BLUE SUB AREA 3B 49 RNAV14L NKT RNAV 14L 50 PMZ GPS PMZ RNAV 3 8 21 51 OCW VOR OCW VOR 5 52 OCW LOC OCWLOC 5 53 OCW1735 OCW RNAV 17 amp 35 54 OCW0523 OCW RNAV 5 amp 23 55 MQI RDR 56 MQI 17 57 MQI0523 RNAV 5 amp 23 58 AIR 15B AIR
104. ATC personnel requesting a tour for family or friends must obtain prior approval from the FWO All visitors shall be escorted at all times 1 409 AIRFIELD TOURS ATC personnel must possess a ground control qualification airfield operator s certificate and a valid driver s license to conduct airfield tours for training or familiarization and check out an airfield operations vehicle to do so AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q wh wh Pi E e E 2 a ba 1 E gre Crew Chief eo ATC Officer Crew Chief ob Tower Chief Radar Chief 5 P Training Chief ere SNCOIC j eh BUILDING ere N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Figure 1 4 1 1 4 2 5 Feb 15 Change 1 1 410 PHONE USAGE a Telephones are provided in the tower radar break rooms for personal use Personal use of the phones in the tower radar room shall be kept at a minimum The FWO is responsible for answering the phone in the radar room b The 5960 line is a recorded line designated for Special Use Airspace It may also be used to issue clearances control instructions as necessary but is not to be used to make personal calls Anyone answering this line shall inform the caller that it is a recorded line c Calls that are made to break rooms may not be answered since they are not always occupied d Long distance phone calls are authorized for o
105. Actions that have improved the efficiency quality or safety of Air Traffic Control services provided at MCAS Cherry Point c Completed data sheet 2 A controller may be selected as Controller of the Quarter more than once during a given calendar year AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 e Board Composition 1 The Controller of the Quarter Board shall consist of the Training Branch Chief Tower Branch Chief and Radar Branch Chief 2 The ATCFO shall cast the deciding vote in the event of a tie f Recognition The Corporal Renehan Controller of the Quarter will receive a meritorious mast a 72 hour liberty pass and have his her photograph posted on the award plaque 1 303 MCAS CHERRY POINT CONTROLLER OF THE YEAR PROCEDURES a Selection The Controller of the Year for MCAS Cherry Point shall be selected in the second week of December for performance during the current calendar year Statistical information for the Marine selected will be from 1 January through 31 December Each ATC Crew will nominate at least one controller per year no later than 30 November The selections will be based primarily on the Marine s knowledge skill and motivation as a Marine air traffic controller Additionally nominees must meet the minimum requirements established by Marine Corps orders in the execution of his her duties as a U S Marine b Eligibility Any Marine air traffic controller me
106. Airfield Activities when the CALA is in use The FWO will inform the TS of scheduled CALA operations ATC will avoid aircraft activity in and around the CALA by aircraft not associated with CALA operations when it is in use Due to electromagnetic hazards radio transmissions in the area should be kept to a minimum 5 304 CENTERLINE REFLECTORS a The centerline reflectors for our RADAR systems are located in the vicinity of the runway threshold In the past the centerline reflectors have been actually hit by aircraft Personnel working in the vicinity of landing threshold shall be considered in the active area of the runway Landing aircraft over the top of personnel working on the reflectors is not a safe operation b ATC Maintenance will only perform repairs to centerline reflectors to runways that are designated an off duty runway If the tower requires an aircraft to land full stop or depart an off duty while maintenance is being conducted on the centerline reflectors the AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 maintenance personnel shall be clear of the runway so they are outside of the runway extended edges d Should a practice approach be made to an off duty runway while the centerline reflectors are being worked on the aircraft shall be cleared for a restricted low approach in accordance with FAA JO 7110 65 and personnel on the deck shall be notified REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3 10 10 5
107. Aug 13 INTENSITY VELOCITY OFFSET ATCFacO P3722 1Q Turns Fast Time Constant FTC on or off When selected will eliminate all but the leading edge of all video returns Used to reduce precipitation ground returns Controls the sweep intensity Detunes system slightly so that slow moving blocks of clutter such as weather fronts can be made to appear stationary and thereby canceled SYSTEM STATUS SYSTEM FAULT Indicator AIR TEMP AIR FLOW FC UNLOCK AFC LOCK Indicator CHAN A ON LINE CHAN A STANDBY CHAN A FAULT CHAN A MAINT CHAN B ON LINE CHAN B STANDBY CHAN B FAULT CHAN B MAINT PRCS FAULT PRCS MAINT 1 Indicator 2 Indicator 3 Indicator 4 Indicator 5 Indicator 6 Indicator Switch When AIR TEMP is lighted indicates overheat in transmitter cabinet when AIR FLOW is lighted indicates lack of airflow in cold air duct When AFC UNLOCK is lighted indicates AFC is in unlocked condition when AFC LOCK is lighted indicates AFC is in lock condition for online channel only When CHAN A ON LINE is lighted indicates channel A transmitter and receiver are selected remotely or locally and connected to PAR antennas when CHAN A STANDBY is lighted indicates channel A transmitter and receiver are in a standby status and connected to dummy load if channel B is on line When CHAN A FAULT is lighted indicates channel A transmitter and or remoting equipment is in a fault status whe
108. Aug 13 P3722 1Q Section 3 NAVIGATIONAL EQUIPMENT 7 300 GENERAL operating The menus are accessed by a trackball on screen arrow This chapter describes the function and capabilities of the Navigational Aids NAVAIDs Airfield Lighting b The console uses three screens and associated equipment used throughout the ATC facility It is intended to be used for information 1 Control display purposes only Procedures that have been established for the use of this equipment are listed in the 2 Airfield map appropriate section of this Manual 3 Maintenance display 7 301 AIRFIELD LIGHTING AND CONTROL SYSTEM c Macros have been designed to activate a specific combination of lights The airfield lighting available at MCAS Cherry Point is listed in the AOM Control of this lighting is from d Visibility setting icons will adjust all a computer console located in the control tower A previously selected airfield lights to the prescribed depiction of this console is shown below intensities by moving the trackball arrow to the reported visibility settings and pressing the left button a The airfield lighting control system operates on the trackball base similar to a standard lighting control panel except it uses computer graphics for the switch buttons and a e When using the macros to turn on off or display of the airfield map showing which lights are change intensity settings a delay can be expected as AIRFIELD
109. C ILM NKT GSB IR 012 Procedures 120715 ILM NKT NCA Approach Control Procedures 121001 NKT VMU 2 UAS Procedures GBSAA 121023 RMD Civilian Users R 5306A C Procedures 130116 RMD State Users R 5306A C Procedures 130321 ZDC MAG 14 NKT Stereo Routes 130404 Washington Center and NKT RATCF Approach Control Service 150205 FACSFAC VACAPES and NKT Inter facility Control and Coordination 150205 Procedures and NAS Oceana RATCF Approach Control Services 150205 and Norfolk ATC Tower Approach Control Services 150205 Washington Center and NKT RATCF Coordination and Use of Burner ATCAA 150205 Washington Center and NKT RATCF Coordination and Use of Neuse A and B ATCAA 150205 Washington Center NKT FACSFAC VACAPES Hatteras B East and West ATCAA 150205 Washington Center NKT FACSFAC VACAPES MOE OO Sce 1 x 150205 d rs 4 S WINE Phelps MOA and R 5314A B C D E F H J 150205 nd th z Mud MANT PW SINKE E hter Wing Use and Scheduling of Burner ATCAA 150205 2 MAW USAF 4 FW USN Strike Use and Scheduling of Neuse A and or Neuse B 150205 Fighter Wing Atlantic ATCAA C 1 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q APPENDIX D MIDAIR COLLISION AVOIDANCE PROGRAM 1 INTRODUCTION Reserved AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q
110. C SSC FAYETEVILLE NC FAY SKY MANOR NC N22 FLORENCE SC FLO SPUD SPUD FORT BRAGG NC FBG STAR HILL NC 60NC GRAND STRAND VORTAC SC CRE TAR RIVER VORTAC NC TYI NORTH MYRTLE BEACH AIRPORT CRE TOPSAIL AIRPARK NC 01NC HICKORY HILL NC 62NC TRIPLE M NC 4NC5 HODGES FARM NC73 WASHINGTON NC OCW HOLLY RIDGE NC Topsail Island N21 WILMINGTON NC ILM HYDE COUNTY 7W6 JACKSONVILLE NAS FL NIP KINSTON NC ISO LOCAL ID NOT FOR FDIO USE 2 6 2 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 604 AIRSPACE AND APPROACH FIXES MCAS CHERRY POINT FIX NAME AING LOCATION USE ASSOCIATED PROCEDURE LAT LONG ALPHA PTA NKT 140 27 W 122 ALPHA A ISO 093 50 IR 062 BEULA ISO 199 27 V56 34 56 04 89 077 41 40 51 BRAVO PTB NKT 184 16 W 122 BRAVO B CVI 241 15 IR 062 CHARLIE C ILM 013 37 IR 012 CLAPY ORF 211 85 J174 35 35 40 98 076 54 34 30 DELTA D NKT 316 30 IR 012 ECHO E NKT 020 24 IR 012 ECHO ONE E1 NKT 020 24 IR 012 EEGEL GSB 079 30 HI TACAN ILS RWY 26 GSB 35 29 48 04 077 23 33 43 ESTER ISO 302 014 V45 85 28 48 89 077 49 17 14 FEELY NKT 324 15 NON RADAR FEEDER 35 04 44 89 077 05 24 65 FOXTROT F NKT 031 029 IR 012 FOXTROT ALPHA FA NKT 030 024 IR 012 GOLF G NKT 039 052 012 GOLLA ILM 021 017 V70 34 37 36 04 077 47 23 57 GRAVY GV 055 006 9 RNAV GPS ILS RWY 23R 34 58
111. CEDURES FOOD AND DRINK IN THE FACILITY MEDICAL CLEARANCE NOTICE CELL PHONE USAGE PROCEDURE EVALUATION BOARD PEB PROCEDURE EVALUATION PROGRAM PEP DISPENSARY PERMIT CHAPTER 2 ADMINISTRATION Section 1 CHECK IN CHECK OUT PROCEDURES MARINES CHECKING IN CIVILIANS CHECKING IN MARINES CHECKING OUT CIVILIANS CHECKING OUT Section 2 ORGANIZATION ORGANIZATION PURPOSE AND MISSION TASKS COMBINING OF POSITIONS CIVILIAN EMPLOYEE BARGAINING UNIT INFORMATION Section 3 FORMS AND REPORTS GENERAL SUA VIOLATION CONTROL TOWER CRASH EMERGENCY CALL SHEET OPERATIONAL DISCREPANCY AIR TRAFFIC ACTIVITY REPORTS CLASS ROSTER FACILITY RECOMMENDATION FWO CHECKLIST SUA ACTIVATION LOGS TOWER VISIBILITY LOG VEHICLE OPERATOR S CERTIFICATE ELECTRONIC LIBRARY LOG AVOC ATTENDANCE ROSTER GCA RUN LOG POSITION EVALUATIONS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE DAILY RECORD OF FACILITY OPERATION POSITION LOG INITIAL INCIDENT REPORTING DAILY FLIGHT SCHEDULES AND AIR FLOW AIRFIELD ACTIVITIES WEEKLY TRAINING REPORT MONTHLY TRAINING REPORT ANNUAL TRAINING REPORT ATCFacO P3722 1Q 1 4 5 1 4 5 1 4 5 1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 7 1 4 7 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 15 Aug 13 2 324 2 325 2 326 2 327 2 328 2 329 2 400 2 401 2 402 2 403 2 404 2 405 2 406 2 407 2 408 2 409 2 410 2
112. CIAL USE STRIP MARKING NEUSE ATCAA RESERVED TRANSIENT AIRCRAFT USE OF SUA ATCAA RELEASE OF AIR 8 HATTERAS FOXTROT COORDINATION LOG ENTRIES FOR SUA R 5303B 5304B STRATUM SUA VIOLATIONS CORE MOA PROCEDURES ATCAA PROCEDURES Section 7 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES GENERAL INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION ARRESTED LANDINGS CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT Section 1 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT GENERAL ATIS IVCSS CRASH EMERGENCY ALERT SYSTEM DUKANE SYSTEM EMERGENCY COMM SYSTEM LIGHT GUNS RESERVED FDIO RESERVED 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 4 3 6 4 3 6 4 3 6 5 1 6 5 1 6 5 1 6 5 1 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 2 6 5 2 6 5 2 6 6 1 6 6 1 6 6 1 6 6 4 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 6 7 6 6 7 6 6 7 6 6 7 6 6 7 a d 1 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO 372210 7 110 RECORDERS 7 1 5 7 111 REMOTE RECORDER MONITOR 7 1 5 7 112 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS VISCOM 7 1 5 7 113 EMERGENCY GENERATOR LOAD TESTS 7 1 6 7 114 HAND HELD BACKUP RADIO 7 1 6 7 115 HAND HELD FM RADIO 7 1 6 Section 2 RADAR EQUIPMENT 7 200 GENERAL 7 2 1 7 201 AN GPN 30 CONTROL PANEL 7 2 1 7 202 STANDARD TERMINAL AUTOMATION REPLACEMENT SYSTEM STARS 7 2 1 7 203 BEACON INTERROGATOR 7 2 4 7 204 TOWER DISPLAY WORKSTATION 7 2 4 7 205 FPN 63 PRECISION RADAR 7 2 4 7 206 63 CONTROL PANEL 7 2 4 7 207 63 REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
113. D NOT STORED To remove from the An FDIO may input an RS message ifthe aircraft REJECT NOT YOUR CONTROL system all flight data for is proposed but center strip is not yet printed or a specified flight plan the flight is active and the tower or approach control has a strip either by normal routing or because of a strip request message RX ARTS NAS 0102 RX STONE24 Identification must match one in storage or an 02 AID NOT STORED CANCELLATION error message is returned to the source of this RX message input SP STEREO FLIGHT PLAN 01 02 03 05 07 Logic checking is first performed only on the MESSAGE 08 or 09 10 11 stereo tag data Field 10 The stereo tag entered must be an adapted stereo tag Otherwise results in an error message being returned SR STRIP REQUEST 01021316 Field 13 is a fix identifier The fix identifier must REJECT INVALID FIX STRIP be one of the following fix fix radial distance NUMBER Lat Long SR MARS31 Output routing Field 16 must contain the REJECT INCORRECT ROUTING NKTA adapted correct identification for an active sector approach control tower or manual center TD TEST DEVICE 0116 TD Field 16 must identify adapted tower or REJECT INCORRECT ROUTING To provide an output test approach control T tower D approach control message to a specific departure A approach control arrival FDIO printer in a terminal facility WX WEATHER 01 13 35 45 WX EWN 2355 Field 45 must begin with a Clear Weather REJECT MESS
114. DOWN LOGS The Pass Down Log is to be used for time critical entries of a short term duration not to exceed three 3 weeks Any procedure policy change or information of longer than a three 3 week duration shall be incorporated into a Facility Directive or Memo Entries shall be dated and include the originating source by operating initials 1 108 RETENTION OF RECORDS REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraphs 3 10 3 and 3 10 4 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 2 TERMS OF REFERENCE 1 200 WORD MEANINGS Word meanings used in this manual are the same as word meanings in FAA JO 7110 65 REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 1 2 1 1 201 ANNOTATIONS Annotations and pages are marked as follows a The change number and the effective date are printed on each revised or additional page b page that does not require a change is reprinted in its original form Bold vertical lines in the margin of changed pages indicate the location of substantive revisions to the order Bold vertical lines adjacent to the title of a chapter section or paragraph means that extensive changes have been made The annotation PHRASEOLOGY denotes the prescribed words and or phrases to be used in communications e The annotation EXAMPLE provides a sample of the way the prescribed phraseology associated with preceding paragraph s will be used If the preceding par
115. E PASSENGER VAN VAL VAL STAIRS WHITE STAIR TRUCK VAL RECOVERY 4 WHITE SINGLE CAB PICKUP RECOVERY RECOVERY 6 WHITE EXTENDED CAB PICKUP RECOVERY RECOVERY 31 WHITE FLATBED WITH RACKS RECOVERY 2 6 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 602 LANDING ZONES LANDING ZONE LOCATION SHADY GROVE LZ NKT 330 002 5 MILLER S LANDING LZ NKT 360 003 REFERENCE AOM 1002 9 2 603 LOCATION IDENTIFIERS AIRPORT ID AIRPORT ID ALBERT ELLIS NC OAJ LEE CREEK NC NC12 ANDREWS MD ADW MANTEO NC Dare Co Regional ANDREWS MD NSF MYRTLE BEACH NC MYR ATLANTIC NC Jackson Pvt NC54 NEW BERN NC Craven Co Regional EWN ATLANTIC FIELD MCOLF NC 12NC NEW RIVER MCAS NC NCA BAY CREEK Bayboro 4NC2 NORFOLK NAS VA NGU BEAUFORT M J SMITH MRH OAKGROVE HOLF NC 13NC BEAUFORT MCAS SC NBC OAKGROVE TACAN NKO BILLY MITCHELL NC HSE OCEANA NAS VA NTU BOGUE FIELD MCALF NC NJM OCRACOKE ISLAND NC W95 CAMP DAVIS MCOLF NC 14NC PAMLICO BAYBORO 7NCO CHARLESTON SC CHS PENSACOLA NAS FL NPA CHARLOTTE NC CLT PITT GREENVILLE PGV CHERRY POINT MCAS NC NKT POPE AFB NC POB CHOCOWINITY NDB RNW PLYMOUTH NC PMZ CIRCLE P 6NC7 QUANTICO MCAF VA NYG COLUMBIA SC CAE RALEIGH DURHAM NC RDU DIXON NC NDB DME DIW ROCKY MOUNT NC RWI DONALD 1NC7 SEYMOUR JOHNSON AFB NC GSB ELIZABETH CITY NC ECG SHAW AFB S
116. ED STATES MARINE CORPS MARINE ATTACK TRAINING SQUADRON 203 MARINE AIRCRAFT GROUP 14 POSTAL SERVICE CENTER BOX 8064 CHERRY POINT NORTH CAROLINA 28533 SKD WTR MAJ COLLINS JULIAN SDO 1STLT CHRIST SUNRISE DNCO CPL SHIROMA SUNSET SDC PFC MOORE MOONRISE MOONSET ODO 1130 LPOD CAPT BANTON ILLUM AODO 1130 LPOD 1STLT PADILLA EENT LLL PERIOD S HAWKS FLIGHT SCHEDULE FOR WEDNESDAY 20 OCT 2010 THIS FLIGHT SCHEDULE CONSTITUTES OFFICIAL ORDERS CS BRF ETD HR SRT AIRCREW T amp R CODE cn MSN FUEL TMR FREQ NOTES MARS 11 _ 1130 1330 1430 __ CAPT SCHAAFSMA 0274 FULL 1A6 1 1 2 W3 W4 AA MARS12 __ MAJMASON AA 074 __ FULL 1A6 W3 W4 MARS13 _ E MAJ RAMSHUR AA 0274 __ FULL 1A6 W3 W4 AA MARS 14 __ LTCOL RAHE 0274 FULL 146 W3 W4 E STBY MARS68 _ TBD TBD TBD __ MAJMURPHY DESG 0641 AR 2K2 BASE STBY MARS69 __ TBD TBD __ LTCDRGRAY DESG 0641 AR 2K2 BASE TAV 8B COMMANDER SECTIONLEAD DIVISION LEAD FLIGHT NOTES MAINTENANCE NOTES 1 A C ORDNANCE PROVIDED BY VMA 223 FOR EVENT 1 1 8 1 3 AV 8B E TAV 8B OR AV 8B 2 1330 1430 W 122 15 16 17 NKTO2 VFR 15 5 W3 1 CAIM 9 STA 1 WA TACTS STA 7 SIMULATOR SCHEDULE FOR WEDNESDAY 20 OCT 2010 DEV BRF ETR HRS MONITOR T amp R CODE NOTES RNWST A 0615 0700 0830 1 1STLTFORD LTCOL KILLIAN REQ 0025 0601 2L3 INSTRUMENT CHECK RNWSTA 0745 0830 100 7 COLSHORTER CSI RSAS 0180 1E7 RNWSTA 100
117. ERS Due to the maneuverability of helicopters they are controlled to ATC s advantage in regards to arriving departing via runways helipads Tower NADEP taxiways warm up areas and harrier pads Because of the helicopters characteristics ATC is more prone to instruct them to fly over those areas that may generate Foreign Object Damage FOD migration onto airfield movement areas Good judgement shall be exercised by ATC with regard to the movement of helicopters on the airfield to reduce this potential The following actions apply a Do not issue instructions that require helicopters to overfly any airfield construction sites b Instruct helicopters to transit to from parking via hard surface areas Avoid overflying grass areas fuel pits and ground taxi applicable type aircraft in the vicinity of parked taxiing aircraft c H 47 H 53 H 54 and V 22 These are heavy lift helicopters that while airborne generate excessively high rotor down wash and are to be handled differently Therefore instruct these helicopters to arrive depart via runways harrier pads NADEP pad centermat or warm up areas and ground taxi to their destination d Use of the following VTL pads by rotary wing or tilt rotor aircraft is prohibited except in case of emergency 1 VTL2 northeast pad AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 2 VTL3 southeast pad 3 VTLA south pad e Use of VTLI north pad by rotory wi
118. F DIALABLE RADIO 9 IFR 171 UHF DIALABLE RADIO 10 140 1 MHz GROUND c Radios 1 5 are fixed frequency radio sets GRRs and GRTs while 6 9 are tunable GRCs with the remote dial heads located in the console of the operator s positions in the tower and IFR rooms These GRC radios can be selected by either console but have to be dialed to frequency by the position that appropriately maintains that control head so coordination may be necessary for use by opposite control position NOTE The FM radio 10 is now incompatible with the trunking system used by ground units The hand held unit provided by Motorola must be used during ECS operations d When in standby mode all radios are wired into the IVCSS system to give the capability of secondary use NOTE ECS mode will disconnect all secondary radios e To use radios select from switch panel as you would any radio not in ECS or use the FSA 47 to select secondary The use of these radios in this manner is transparent to the controller f QMS Fault This should be ignored until further notice from ATC Maintenance because there is a hardware incompatibility at this time The radios are tested by external equipment and the internal test equipment is at fault or not available g Power Fault This will cause an audible alarm and should be reported to ATCM as soon as possible AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q MESSAGE FIELDS ENTERED REQUIRED
119. FIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q ned san un ve rin y ean has eh pui va sine al sat G 1 5 15 Aug 13 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q ATC INSTRUCTION EVALUATION REPORT 1 Name 2 Date 3 Position s 4 Hours 5 Weather O VFR O MVFR IFR 6 Workload O Light O Moderate O Heavy 7 Complexity Not Difficult O Occasionally Difficult O Mostly Difficult 8 Routing FWO BC TC L Other Very Difficult TSS 9 Purpose Scenario D Skill Check O Qualification O Classroom O Other Job Task Job Subtask Satisfactory Needs Improvement Unsatisfactory Separation is ensured A Separation Safety alerts are provided Awareness is maintained Good control judgment applied B Control Priority of duties is understood Judgment Control actions correctly planned Positive control of situation provided Prompt action taken to correct errors C Traffic Effective traffic flow maintained Management Aircraft identification maintained Professional manner is maintained Flight strip postings complete correct Clearances complete correct timely LOA s LOP s Directives adhered to D Operating Methods and Procedures Navigational assistance is provided Weather information is pr
120. FLOWCHART A graphic representation of the OJT and qualification process in the form of a flowchart is presented in Figure 4 3 3 5Feb 15 Change 1 4 316 GCA IFR TRAINING Trainees nearing FC qualification or who have achieved a prior FC rating may be authorized to control aircraft conducting radar approaches to NKT by meeting all of the following a Direct supervision of an OJTI b When the NKT weather is officially reporting a ceiling no less than 500 feet and visibility at least one mile c When a recommendation is made by the SATCS on a Performance Evaluation the SATCS will insert the statement Trainee s name is recommended for GCA IFR training in Block 12 and forward the form to the Radar Chief d The Radar Chief must concur with the recommendation of the prior to implementation The Radar Chief shall sign the form with either of the following Concur Disapproved Signature Signature e This GCA IFR Training recommendation will be retained in the trainee s MPR until FC qualification or termination of training REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 3 3 2 1 4 317 DESIGNATIONS a TS RS In order for a controller to be designated a TS RS the following shall be completed 1 Meet all requirements to be designated an OJT Instructor for all operating positions within the appropriate branch 2 Complete T amp R Supplement 3 Receive recommendation from the FWO on a position evaluatio
121. FWO need only silence the alarm and notify a communication shop technician d A log entry is not required unless informed by a technician of a period of time that communications or video were not being recorded 7 112 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS VISCOM a The VISCOM system is a coordination device between the radar controller and the control tower VISCOM provides a sequence of lights and switches that supplements other circuits on the interphone system and serves to reduce the number of voice contacts between the tower and radar controller b There are four VISCOM units in the IFR room located at positions 1 2 3 and 7 These tie into three switching indicator units in the control tower on position 18 A set of units located above position 6 allows monitoring of the information in the system The monitoring units on position 6 and the indicators in the tower are equipped with LED readouts that indicate which position is transmitting the information See figure 7 1 5 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 7 113 EMERGENCY GENERATOR LOAD TESTS a Load tests on the following generators will be accomplished during the biweekly FOD walks Bldg Equipment Supported 1640 RATCF Tower 1695 Receiver Site 1776 Transmitter Site 4150 ASR 8 Site 4303 PAR Site Load tests on the following generators can be accomplished at any time with at least 24 hour notice from Facilities Maintenance and with pr
122. HECKLIST SHIFT 7 3 3 11 DATE 1 Airport Status 5 Traffic position brief Runway Construction 6 Training See back of sheet 2 Equipment Radar 7 Special Events Radios Exercises Landlines Distinguished Visitors NAVAIDs Flight Demonstrations Quiet Hours 3 Weather UAV Ops Current Forecasted 8 Pertinent NOTAMS Warnings post on NOTAM Board after brief 4 Special Use Airspace R 5306A see status boards pos brief CORE MOA see status boards pos brief R 5306C see status boards pos brief R 5306D E see status boards pos brief Hat Fox MOA see status boards pos brief 9 Position Assignments R 5303 R 5304 see status boards pos brief R 5314 see status boards pos brief Specialist Trainee PHELPS MOA see status boards pos brief TS R 5313 see status boards pos brief LC Pamlico A MOA see status boards pos brief GC Pamlico B MOA see status boards pos brief FD STUMPYPT B MOA see status boards pos brief APE Neuse A ATCAA see status boards pos brief APN Neuse B ATCAA see status boards pos brief APW BURNER see status boards pos brief RAE RAW RAA WEST ATCAA see status boards pos brief AR HAT B WEST ATCAA see status boards pos brief FC W 122D AIR 8 see status boards po
123. IC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Page 1 of 3 AIRFIELD ACTIVITIES AS OF 14 OCTOBER 2010 AIRFIELD SECURITY ALL VEHICLES ACCESSING THE AIRFIELD WILL BE STOPPED AT GATE 9 FOR 100 ID CHECK PRIVATELY OWNED VEHICLES POV ARE NOT AUTHORIZED OUTSIDE DESIGNATED CENTRALIZED PARKING AREAS VEHICLES ARE NOT AUTHORIZED TO PARK IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO BUILDINGS AIRFIELD OPERATIONS NOTICES ALL VEHICLES OPERATING ON AIRCRAFT MOVEMENT SURFACE AREAS WILL BE IN CONTACT WITH CHERRY POINT GROUND OPERATOR MUST HAVE A VALID PICTURE ID amp AIRFIELD OPERATORS LICENSE IN THEIR POSSESSION THE AIRFIELD VEHICLE OPERATOR INDOCTRINATION COURSE AVOIC IS GIVEN EVERY TUESDAY AT 0800 IN THE ATC CLASSROOM LOCATED IN THE BUILDING ADJACENT TO THE CONTROL TOWER THE CLASSROOM CAN ACCOMMODATE UP TO 20 PEOPLE POC 466 4146 VEHICLE TRAFFIC HANGER 250 HOTEL TAXIWAY AND THE HEAVY FUEL PITS RESTRICTED TO EMERGENCY VEHICLES AIRFIELD VEHICLES AND GSE GEAR ONLY ALL VEHICLES ARE REQUIRED TO ENTER THE AIRFIELD VIA ELECTRONIC VEHICLE SWIPE CARD GATES AND PERFORM A FOD CHECK PRIOR TO ENTERING AIRCRAFT OPERATING AREAS RAMPS OR HANGAR AREAS VEHICLE SWIPE CARD ACCESS CAN BE OBTAINED BY A LETTER FROM CO OIC TO THE PASS AND ID OFFICE DO NOT USE FREQUENCY 239 025 FOR ANY KIND OF TESTING THIS IS OUR GROUND FREQ AND WE CONTINUE TO HAVE SOMEONE TRANSMITTING TEST TONES ON IT AND INTERFERING WITH AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SCHEDULING TO SCHEDULE SERVICES OR PUB
124. IX C LETTERS OF AGREEMENT Seven new LOAs added APPENDIX E STANDARD POSITION LOCATION CODES New identifiers added APPENDIX G POSITION EVALUATION Four day evaluation form added APPENDIX H FDIO HANDBOOK New appendix added for FDIO procedures AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY Airfield Operations Department Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point North Carolina 28533 5010 ATCFacO P3722 1Q ATCFO 4 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY ORDER P3722 10 Change 1 From Air Traffic Control Facility Officer To Air Traffic Control Facility Personnel Subj AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL CHANGE 1 1 Purpose This change transmits revised pages to Facility Order P3722 1Q 2 Distribution This manual is distributed to all air traffic controllers at MCAS Cherry Point and select offices under the cognizance of Commander Marine Corps Air Bases East 3 Effective Date 5 Feb 15 4 Explanation of Changes See the Explanation of Changes attachment 5 Disposition of Transmittal Retain this transmittal until superseded by a new basic order 6 Page Control Chart See the Page Control attachment Air Traffic Control Facility Officer Maj USMC Distribution Airfield Operations 5 ATC Facility 95 EXPLANATION OF CHANGES 3722 10 Change 1 5 Feb 15 CHAPTER ONE 1 105 EFFECTIVE DATES Dates changed 1 106 PUBLICATION DATES Dates changed 1 202 ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviations ACPM
125. LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 5R 23L 23R 5L 14L 32R 32LA14R 32L 23R MACROS BE FE m LEN EE LE BL E W LE BE m m m S32 4 VTOL PADS Lead In Lead Out PHOTOCELL TWY D TWY Ca Du La 22 m m m m m m m E m m M Visibility Miles Taxiways DAY Sb m m Maintenance B E G H JL IN OUT a EE Spor E Map 7 3 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 the system cycles through the changes This delay occurs only on the indicator screen the lights on the airfield change at a normal speed An audible tone is heard when selecting macro functions This tone indicates that the command was expected by the computer and the lights are in the process changing to the macro settings g Airfield lights can be operated from the airfield map screen by moving the cursor around and highlighting the intended area Press the left button on the trackball base to bring up a menu then select the desired intensity REFERENCE AOM paragraph 1006 AIM 7 302 NAVAID MONITORS a A malfunction of NAVAID equipment could place a pilot in a critical position therefore it is necessary that some automatic means be provided for continuously checking a NAVAID system This is accomplished by electronic NAVAID monitoring devices which are located in the radar branch Most monitor equipment is simil
126. LISH AIRFIELD ACTIVITIES CONTACT AIRFIELD ODO AT 466 2233 OR E MAIL PATRICK EDWARDS USMC MIL CC THE BELOW STEVEN LEWIS1QUSMC MIL JEFF DILLONGUSMC MIL AIRFIELD HOURS NORMAL STATION FOD WALK S FIELD CLOSED 01 NOV 10 0730L 0930L 06 DEC 10 0730L 0930L 10 JAN 11 0730L 0930L FOD COORD MTG IN THE AIRFIELD OPS CONF ROOM BLDG 199 ON THE BELOW DATES 29 OCT 10 1030L 03 DEC 10 1030L 07 JAN 11 1030L LEVEL III DEMO PRACTICE WX BACKUP DAYS FIELD CLOSED NONE https intranet mcieast usmc mil sites CHPT Operations OperationsDirectorate AirFieldOps Dept Shared 20Documents Forms AllItems aspx Figure 2 3 22 2 3 26 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 15 Aug 13 uo 0102 390 E1 en yoo geas 1 W A E 71 7108 A A A A A DAS O I su 000 Jjooolormos or dos za un Pel euog sz 06 8021 veo ormwo e orwror vn OD on I os Jo zus OO O1 00 E1 0190 8 01 9 Qu oJ o9 d4 frm swe M P Ido iU sz 6 ve sez sro orocr ordesii sv _ 4684 sowey yidol 0 06 0092 79 150 01 90 61 or dver vn 09 Ins a S Ido 2 su eco orooer 04 458 24
127. MCIEAST ATC Training amp Readiness Office is located at MCB Camp Lejeune and am REFERENCE MCIEASTO 3722 3 Chapter 6 1 302 CORPORAL RENEHAN CONTROLLER OF THE QUARTER a Selection The Corporal Renehan Controller of the Quarter shall be selected during April July October and January for performance during the preceding quarter 1 3 1 b Eligibility Marines who meet the following criteria will be considered eligible for the award 1 Sergeant and below 2 No adverse actions during the preceding quarter i e Page 11 entry court action etc 3 The top performer from each crew Procedures award nominees will be based purely on individual performance within the structure of the ATC Training Program Statistics will be collected for the entire quarter and calculated using a set formula The statistics will include the following 1 Total hours accumulated as an instructor for OJT Simulation and Classroom 2 Total hours accumulated as a trainee for OJT Simulation and Classroom d Submission of Nominees The top individual from each crew will be announced to the crew staff by the 5 working day following each quarter 1 Nominations will be in standard Naval correspondence format and are due to the ATCF NCOIC by the 15 of the month following the end of each quarter The nomination shall at a minimum specifically include a Noteworthy accomplishments during the quarter year b
128. N d At midnight the midwatch will stamp the flight strips with the appropriate date and collect all position logs that have been used during the previous day e Obtain time checks with ZDC at the beginning of each watch f Notifying appropriate positions of equipment status g Forward flight plan information on arrivals to FD when appropriate h Notify NVF Giant Killer when ATCAA Neuse is assumed returned from to ZDC by NKT REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 1 3 6 6 2 4 15 Aug 15 Change 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 3 RADAR PROCEDURES 6 300 GENERAL Specific references contained as an appendix the Airfield Operations Manual and publications instructions available in the facility library form the basis for procedural application in this section All controllers must be thoroughly familiar with the specific reference material to fully understand the procedural application 6 301 AOM TOPICS 8 Harrier operating procedures Local terms c Quiet hours Landing procedures e Helicopter operations f Ordnance Jettisoning fuel and ordnance Planned ejection area 1 FCLPs CCA j Traffic patterns Noise sensitive areas complaints 1 VER straight in approach m Lost communication procedures Overdue aircraft o DV procedures p Emergency arresting gear q Navigational aids r Local channels 6 3 1 s Civil transient aircraft
129. NING AREAS RADAR WATCH CHECKLIST Section 2 OPERATING POSITIONS TERMINAL RADAR TEAM POSITIONS SATCS RADAR SUPERVISOR APPROACH WEST APPROACH EAST APPROACH NORTH RADAR ASSOCIATE POSITIONS Vil ATCFacO P3722 1Q 5 4 7 5 4 7 5 4 8 5 4 8 5 4 8 5 4 8 5 4 8 5 4 9 5 5 1 5 5 1 5 5 3 5 5 4 5 7 1 5 7 1 5 7 1 5 7 2 5 7 2 5 7 2 5 7 2 15 Aug 15 Change 2 6 207 6 208 6 209 6 210 6 300 6 301 6 302 6 303 6 304 6 305 6 306 6 307 6 308 6 309 6 310 6 311 6 312 6 313 6 314 6 315 6 316 6 317 6 318 6 319 6 320 6 321 6 322 6 323 6 324 6 325 6 326 6 327 6 328 6 329 6 330 6 331 6 332 6 333 6 334 6 400 6 401 6 402 6 403 6 404 6 405 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ARRIVAL CONTROL RADAR ASSOCIATE ARRIVAL FINAL CONTROL RADAR FLIGHT DATA Section 3 RADAR PROCEDURES GENERAL AOM TOPICS CONTACT APPROACH GCA AND ILS PATTERNS FDIO TEST FLIGHT PLANS INSTRUMENT APPROACHES RADAR APPROACH MINIMUMS ASR RECOMMENDED ALTITUDES FOR NKT CLIMBOUT INSTRUCTIONS SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT STATUS NOTIFICATION VISCOM COORDINATION SPEAKER LANDLINE POSITION ASSIGNMENT NEW BERN WAVEOFFS SIMULATED FLAME OUT PPA DEPARTURE HEADINGS CHERRY POINT WAVEOFFS AV 8 MINIMUM FUEL GCA CLOSED CONTROL TOWER AT MCAS NEW RIVER MISSED APPROACH INSTRUCTIONS LOST COMM INSTRUCTIONS RESTRICTED LOW APPROACH RADAR APPROACH CONFIRMATION RUNWAY THRESHOLD AND APPROACH LIGHT CALLS FOR PAR INFORMATION AND STAT
130. NM 3000AGL j 11 Radar contact D Sy WARD CREEK 12 Not used 6 603 SPECIAL USE STRIP MARKING 13 Not used Information recorded on the flight progress strips FAA Form 7230 7 2 shall be entered in the 14 Additional radar contact correspondingly numbered spaces See Figure 6 6 1 15 Not used 1 5 8 9 10 11 12 2 2A 13 14 15 3 4 7 9A 16 17 18 a Special Use Area Arrival Enroute Figure 6 6 1 1 Aircraft identification 16 Time accepted radar contact 2 Revision number FDIO 17 Not used 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or 18 Time of transfer position that requested a strip be printed 3 NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 6 6 4 15 Aug 15 Change 2 IN AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q SUA Area Abbreviation R 5306A A R 5306C R 5306D D R 5313 13 R 5314 14 R 5302 02 R 5303 03 R 5304 04 BURNER BURNR PHELPS MOA P PHELPS MOA R 5314 14P STUMPY POINT MOA 5 HATTERAS EAST WEST HATE HATW NEUSE A B NA NB NA B HATTERAS FOXTROT MOA F R 5306C D HATFOX TACP R 5306A A Description Abbreviation Remarks Non standard Circle number flight of aircraft in block 2 Multiple entries into SUA for same aircraft OO Written number of entries into SUA circled CHIEF32 F15 1 125 4630 GSB E2328 170 GSB NKT
131. NTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 LOW LANDS That area over land within Sub area 3B where crop dusting is conducted below 300 feet Military aircraft authorized to operate in Sub area 3B below 750 feet MSL shall avoid this area below 500 feet when advised it is in use De LOWLANDS 77 x BELOW 500 we 1 Ww O A lowland a B Point J416 415 Ar x 1415 SID 42 x m m lt E Pico A 322 56 Pe eu 9 Brant Island nd For clearance thrd Cherry Poin Point App 20 20 pes TP 6 N 4 T TER 7 7 us 422 4 32 3 y U cel 122 2 o 2 IR 31 hoe E EW BERN 8 6 Ch 83 ALERT AREA fits IS a Uy A830 NOTA fass D E ste Ye IR e EPAR ISLAND NATIONAL Te 22 f JACKSON CORRIDOR That area within Sub area 3A below 750 feet MSL from the center of the Jackson airport on a heading of 160 degrees magnetic terminating at the boundary of R 5306A one mile wide Military aircraft shall avoid this area when advised it is in use JACKSON CORRIDOR Nex SFC 750 N CA PES LOOKOUT SEASHORE g BAYBORO CORRIDOR That area within R 5306A below 750 feet AGL within a 2NM radius of the center of the Bayboro Airport with a 3NM extension to the West the Northern and Southern boundary of which is 1 Y2NM from and parallel to State Highway 55 terminating at the boundary of R 5306A
132. OCAL CONTROL Duties and responsibilities for the LC position are established in ATC NATOPS and local directives REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 8 1 3 1 5 203 ASSOCIATE LOCAL CONTROL The CCL position description is derived from FAA JO 7110 65 and is responsible for the following duties and those established in local directives a Ensure separation b Operate interphones c Maintain awareness of Tower Cab activities d Utilize tower radar display e Assist LC by accepting initiating coordination for the continued smooth operation of the Tower Cab and ensure that the Tower positions are made immediately aware of any actions taken f Manage flight plan information g Ensure strip marking is completed for instructions issued or received and enter instructions issued or received by a Tower Position h Insert airport operations into the ATAA The midwatch shall print out the totals for the previous day s operations and turn it in with the tower logs REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 10 3 c 2 15 Aug 15 Change 2 5 204 GROUND CONTROL Duties and responsibilities for GC are established in ATC NATOPS local directives and the following Ensure the PAPI lights are turned on for all runways when the field is open NOTE The PAPI lights do not coincide with the precision approach radar runways 5R 14L 321 REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 8 1 3 2 5 205 TOWER FLIGHT DATA
133. ODES VIDS Code Description Block 9 Code APE Approach East E APF Approach East OJF APW Approach West Approach Simulation AR Arrival Control A ARF Arrival Control OJF ARX Arrival Control Simulation PAR 1 Note1 FC2 ASR 1 Note1 FC3 PAR 2 Note1 FWF Facility Watch Officer OJF FWO Facility Watch Officer OT3 Other Other OT6 Other OT7 Other OT8 Other RAA Radar Associate Arrival Control Note 2 RAE Radar Associate Approach East Note 2 RAF Radar Associate OJF RAW Radar Associate Approach West Note 2 RAX Radar Associate Simulation RD Radar Flight Data F RDF Radar Flight Data OJF RDX Radar Flight Data Simulation RS Radar Supervisor RSF Radar Supervisor OJF CCF Tower Associate OJF CCL Tower Associate Local Control Note 2 FD Tower Flight Data F FDF Tower Flight Data OJF GC Ground Control G GCF Ground Control OJF LC Local Control L LCF Local Control OJF OT1 Other OT2 Other TS Tower Supervisor TSF Tower Supervisor OJF Used only on paper logs E 1 2 5 Feb 15 Change 1 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Field 6 Field 7 Field 8 Field 9 NOTE AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q DATE Enter the date in six 6 digit format YYMMDD All spaces must be used TIME ON Enter the Coordinated Universal Time UTC time that each controller or trainee begins a training session or skill check A new entry must be started when there is any change in the status of field
134. ONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 runway A depiction of this panel and associated controls are shown in figure 7 2 10 b When the PAR is scanning in normal mode it actually has parts that are continuously moving and wearing out the unit s antenna prematurely FWOs will ensure the PAR is in the standby mode during light traffic periods This only involves shutting off the high voltage then shutting off the scan and turning down the intensity To return the PAR back to normal mode reverse the sequence 7 208 GENERATORS All generators are Auto Start and come on line as a result of a power surge or power loss At the ATC Division s request Facilities Maintenance will place them on line during destructive weather conditions or at any other time when a power outage is scheduled They are maintained and serviced by Facilities Maintenance Department REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 4 4 7 209 RESERVED 7 210 IPART a The 15G33A Improved PAR Trainer IPART provides individual proficiency training capability to enhance PAR controller skills Skill objectives are achieved through simulation of normal and abnormal PAR operations b Hardware Realistic equipment training Integration of ancillary equipment via touch screen including VIDS ETVS VISCOM Software Common Access Card login required for training maintenance and system security Site specific training Automated generation of training rec
135. OR Duties and responsibilities are listed in ATC NATOPS FAA JO 7110 65 local directives and the following a RS will normally be combined with the FWO When the FWO will not be in the Radar branch for an extended period of time or deems it necessary otherwise the FWO may delegate the RS b RS will only be decombined when a Marine controller is present to perform the duties of RS At no time will a civilian controller be tasked to perform the duties of RS when the positions are decombined c The RS shall be an OJTI on all radar operating positions and will be designated in writing by the ATCFO REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 1 2 2 FAA JO 7110 65 6 203 APPROACH WEST Duties and responsibilities are listed in ATC NATOPS FAA JO 7110 65 local directives and the following a Relay clearances to EWN Tower and NCA Tower when applicable b Post current runway and weather data for satellite airports within the APW airspace c Notify NCA of any SUA activity upon NCA opening REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 10 2 NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 1 3 1 and 9 1 3 2 LOA Between NKT Approach and EWN Tower LOA Between NKT Approach and NCA Tower 6 204 APPROACH EAST This position performs the duties and responsibilities of terminal area control service and SUA control as outlined in the references within the designated airspace and the following 6 2 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P37
136. Override ECS and Handheld FM TDW ALDIS Lamps Lighting Panel Clocks Wind Indicators Weather Monitor FDIO ATIS VISCOM Binoculars Status Board Accuracy Pass Down Log PAR Bailout Alarm VIDS 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 1 VMGR 252 2 VMAQ 2 3 4 VMAQ 4 5 VMR 1 MALS 14 gt RECEIVER 6 VMAT 203 amp 231 x d 7 223 amp 542 ORDNANGE Figure 5 1 1 5 1 3 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 1 RUNWAY 321 14 32R 7553 8399 8124 75 200 316 200 When departing Runway 14R the runway length is 8399 When landing Runway 32L the runway length is 7553 Figure 5 1 2 8984 200 316 200 8784 Tez 6550 8268 RUNWAY 14L 32R 5L Figure 5 1 3 5 1 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q RUNWA Y 23R 5L 7553 p UNI 200 401 200 8201 i e 9491 co CN 32R When departing Runway 5L the runway length is 8491 When landing Runway 23R the runway length is 7553 Figure 5 1 4 RUNWAY 5R 23L rm 7197 m B 7798 200 401 200 nt Figure 5 1 5 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO
137. PART AT COACH STARS TOWER SIMULATOR SIMULATOR POSITION LOGS ATCFacO P3722 1Q 4 3 1 4 3 1 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 4 4 3 4 4 3 4 4 3 6 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 4 3 8 4 3 8 4 3 8 4 3 9 4 3 9 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 2 15 Aug 13 4 705 5 100 5 101 5 102 5 103 5 104 5 105 5 106 5 200 5 201 5 202 5 203 5 204 5 205 5 300 5 301 5 302 5 303 5 304 5 400 5 401 5 402 5 403 5 404 5 405 5 406 5 407 5 408 5 409 5 410 5 411 5 412 5 413 5 414 5 415 5 416 5 417 5 418 5 419 5 420 5 421 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL SIMULATOR TRAINING REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER 5 CONTROL TOWER Section 1 GENERAL GENERAL TOWER TRAFFIC COUNT OBSTRUCTIONS WITHIN CDSA FOD WALKS FOD AND HELICOPTERS FOD SWEEPERS TOWER WATCH CHECKLIST Section 2 OPERATING POSITIONS CONTROL TOWER TEAM POSITIONS TOWER SUPERVISOR LOCAL CONTROL ASSOCIATE LOCAL CONTROL GROUND CONTROL TOWER FLIGHT DATA Section 3 AIRFIELD INFORMATION GENERAL MOVEMENT AREAS VTL PAD OPERATIONS COMBAT AIRCRAFT LOADING AREA CENTERLINE REFLECTORS Section 4 PROCEDURES GENERAL PATTERNS AOM TOPICS APPLICATION OF VISUAL SEPARATION STANDARD IFR DEPARTURE CLIMB OUT LOCAL IFR CLEARANCES SPECIAL VFR PRESS UP VFR ON TOP DELTA PATTERN ARRESTING GEAR STATUS VIP NOTIFICATION BIRD AIRCRAFT STRIKE HAZARD BASH USE OF TOWER RADAR DISPLAYS SUSPENSION OF VFR OPERATIONS SIMULTANEOUS PARALLEL RUNWAY OPERATIONS VISCOM COORDINA
138. PPROACH WEST nn 377 175 EWN CLNC DELIVERY 120 52 MRH CLND DELIVERY 125 65 MQIRCO 124 72 299 6 11 ARRIVAL 132 575 351 825 12 290 3 13 257 725 14 118 35 15 GCA 16 278 8 17 305 2 18 317 525 19 235 975 20 121 LOCAL CONTROL 340 2 128 62 GROUND CONTROL 239 025 125 NKT CLNC DELIVERY gt 316 125 127 47 NKT ATIS 244 875 METRO 343 5 126 2 BASE OPS 305 7 VHF GUARD 121 5 UHF GUARD 243 0 Local Channels may be issued to local based aircraft 2 6 10 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO 372210 2 609 ADJACENT FACILITY FREQUENCIES FACILITY UHF FREQUENCY VHF FREQUENCY GSB NORTH 290 9 123 7 GSB SOUTH 273 6 119 7 GSB GLOBAL 273 6 127 3 ILM APPROACH 317 425 135 75 ILM CLEARANCE DELIVERY 121 4 OAJ UNICOM 123 0 ZDC EWN LOW 281 42 135 5 ZDC SAMPSON 285 5 135 3 ZDC NORTHEAST OF HSE 124 72 NVF FACSFAC 251 6 310 1 135 875 EWN TOWER CTAF 124 25 EWN ASOS 118 52 NCA RADAR 279 575 124 85 NCA TOWER 360 2 120 0 BLACKBURN 233 8 119 5 NJM TOWER 341 3 126 45 MRH ASOS 135 375 MRH UNICOM 122 8 ISO TOWER 335 55 120 6 RDU FSS EWN RCO 122 2 122 4 HSE RCO TO FSS 122 3 HSE UNICOM 122 9 HSE ASOS 118 375 W95 UNICOM 122 9 7W6 UNICOM 122 7 BIG ROCK R 5306A CORE MOA
139. PS MOA R14 0125 0219 Flight of three aircraft operating in PHELPS MOA and R 5314 Circle around the 3 indicates a nonstandard formation flight Six 6 IFR operations inbound outbound and 33 SUA operations 6 6 7 15 Aug 15 Change 2 6 604 NEUSE ATCAA The Neuse ATCAA A amp B overlies a portion of Cherry Point s airspace from FL180 to and including FL230 The upper altitude may be increased to FL290 through coordination with Washington Center This airspace is used primarily for refueling tracks and a vertical extension of R 5306A See Figure 6 6 2 6 605 a The ATCAA East amp West overlies a portion of Cherry Point s airspace from FL180 to and including FL230 The upper altitude may be increased to FL290 through coordination with Washington Center This airspace is used primarily for refueling tracks and a vertical extension of delegated airspace See Figure 6 6 2 b APN will activate and release the Hatteras B East and or Hatters West FL180 FL230 when operationally required c When the participant is first in control with Cherry Point APE APN will APREQ the participant with Giant Killer for the area requested ATCAA airspace will be activated and released at that time and APE APN will approve participant into area 6 606 TRANSIENT AIRCRAFT USE OF SUA ATCAA a When transient aircraft is enroute to SUA the sector c
140. RAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 1 2 4 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND AWARDS 1 300 GENERAL a Eachcontroller is responsible for maintaining the highest possible level of quality performance Quality performance begins with a commitment and adherence to agency directives standards and policies This quality performance commitment extends to each administrative and operational element of the facility including service provided to the public cooperation within the organization and the cost effective use of resources b Quality assurance is two fold in its objective 1 Identifies commendable activities and efforts which enhance individual facility or system performance and service and 2 Identifies individual facility or system deficiencies that detract from the quality of air traffic service It ensures that prompt corrective action is taken by those responsible through procedural change training counseling and when appropriate disciplinary action Effective quality assurance provides a follow up mechanism to ensure that the specific action has corrected the identified deficiency It then provides for management controls to ensure that problems do not recur and also assures that identified successful activities are shared throughout the system 1 30 MCIEAST TRAINING amp READINESS The
141. RAINING FWO should suspend vice terminate 4 703 TOWER SIMULATOR Use of secondary tower simulator added 4 704 SIMULATOR POSITION LOGS Position Identified for BOARD added CHAPTER FIVE 5 404 STANDARD DEPARTURE CLIMB OUT Climbout procedures for runways 23L and 5L changed FacDir 013 13 5 405 LOCAL IFR CLEARANCES All phraseology updated to show new climbout procedures FacDir 020 12 and 013 13 5 407 VFR ON TOP All phraseology updated to show new climbout procedures FacDir 013 13 CHAPTER SIX FIGURE 6 1 2 Altitudes revised FacDir 003 13 FIGURE 6 1 4 Several subareas deleted or revised 6 305 INSTRUMENT APPROACHES ILS RNAV approaches revised Copter RNAV approaches for Onslow Hospital added Localizer Rwy 26 at MRH deleted 6 318 UNMONITORED ILS Removed due to the monitor no longer being located in the control tower 6 602 R 5306A AREAS Several subareas deleted or revised APPENDIX A SECTION 2 UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE PROCEDURES New section added to include procedures from VX 20 Letter of Agreement SECTION 3 PRACTICE PRECAUTIONARY APPROACH PROCEDURES Entire section moved from section 5 to section 3 to replace deleted space shuttle procedures SECTION 4 AC 130 WITH HOT GUNS PROCEDURES Entire section moved from section 6 to section 4 to replace deleted section Sections 5 and 6 deleted APPEND
142. RONIC LIBRARY LOG The electronic library log MCAS Form 3722 18 is used to track and confirm updates to the electronic library on numerous facility computers See Figure 2 3 12 2 312 AVOC ATTENDANCE ROSTER The Airfield Vehicle Operator Course roster MCAS Form 3722 19 is used to record the personnel attending the weekly course Copies of this form are forwarded to Airfield Operations at the end of each month See Figure 2 3 13 2 313 GCA RUN LOG The GCA Run Log MCAS Form 3722 21 is used to record data for each approach in a format that can be used for coordination and to database information for controller proficiency and training See Figure 2 3 14 2 314 POSITION EVALUATIONS Two forms are used for the reporting and evaluation of training and qualification a The is used to record events other than OJT and simulation such as annual proficiency qualification designation or one on one classroom instruction See Figure 2 3 15 5 Feb 15 Change 1 b The Four Day Position Evaluation MCAS Form 3722 17 is used to record progress performance and proficiency for trainees during OJT and or simulation sessions See Figure 2 3 16 Appendix G provides detailed guidance for the completion of these forms 2 315 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE The Air Traffic Control Specialist Certificate FAA Form 7220 1 or Pink Card is normally issued after completion of School ATCS ratings are e
143. RRY POINT APP ON 119 OR 360 775 FOR CORE MOA STATUS 1700 mss D LOCALIZER AREA 06 5 SFC 3000 MSL 4 a Figure 6 1 4 6 1 5 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q RESTRICTED R 5306A Figure 6 1 5 6 1 6 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Was NAL ds 2 SFC 30 INCLUDES AREA 1 amp 4 RE EXCLUDES CDS Fe PETT wm ZZ TA RESTRICTED R 5306A IAN Ze Figure 6 1 6 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q SFC 30 EXCLUDES 527 Figure 6 1 7 6 1 8 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ADJACENT FACILITIES ATCFacO P3722 1Q NORFOLK SFC 40 OCEANA 50 230 OCEANA 50 230 OCEANA 110 230 FACSFAC 110 230 FACSFAC VACAPES SFC 600 Figure 6 1 8 15 Aug 15 Change 2 6 103 MINIMUM VECTORING ALTITUDE CHARTS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Minimum Vectoring Altitude Charts have been developed for single sensor and multi sensor displays See Figures 6 1 9 and 6 1 10 REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 2 3 6 104 FIXES AIRWAYS AND AIRPORTS See Figures 6 1 11 and 6 1 12 REFERENCE paragraph 2 603 and 2 604 6 105 DISCRETE ASSIGNMENTS BEACON CODE 6 106 RADAR VIDEO MAPS The following maps are available on each ST
144. Range Control changed 2 324 MCIEAST MONTHLY REPORT Name of report changed 2 329 ANNUAL SKILL CHECKS New paragraph for annual skill check form FacDir 024 12 2 402 TRAINING CHIEF Removed QA and QMB functions 2 403 CONTROL TOWER CHIEF Removed QA and QMB functions 2 404 RADAR CHIEF Removed QA and QMB functions 2 604 AIRSPACE AND APPROACH FIXES Fix names and locations updated 2 707 PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE NATOPS Manual for UAS Shadow added CHAPTER FOUR 4 204 POSITION EVALUATIONS Annual skill check form added FacDir 024 12 4 205 TOWER VISIBILITY OBSERVERS Frequency of course added 4 302 FACILITY TRAINING REQUIREMENTS Number of qualifications to calculate control limits changed to 12 Simulation requirements are required for initial qualifications only Training on combined positions updated FacDir 006 13 and 022 12 4 303MINIMUM OJT POSITION TIME Minimum time can be a combination of OJT and simulation FacDir 019 12 4 314 TAPE TALK PROGRAM Requirement changed from 25 to 50 FacDir 017 12 4 501 NAVAIR 655 MARADMIN changed to NAVAIR 655 NATOPS 6 5 5 4 503 NAVAIR 655 PROGRESSION MARADMIN changed to NAVAIR 655 NATOPS 6 5 5 4 504 MCAS CHERRY POINT SUPPLEMENTS Sentence added to define orientation program 4 603 CONTROLLER EVALUATION BOARD Simulation added to documentation available 4 604 SUSPENSION OF T
145. Rs and PARs Example OKC V14S TUL to the ARTCC Not only does this system permit controllers to receive and transmit aircraft flight plan information automatically but it also provides a quicker and more simplified exchange of data the possibilities of human error are reduced during the relay of essential clearance information b For description and use of the system s hardware components refer to the Flight Data Input Output System Training for ATCS Users Guide located in the branch libraries See figures 7 1 2 and 7 1 3 7 109 RESERVED AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 PURPOSE To amend one or more fields in a Computer Stored flight plan To enter Altimeter Data for selected reporting stations Depart aircraft having Computer Stored flight plan a To enter a Proposed flight plan b To enter an Active flight plan To request a Flight Plan Readout To enter General Information messages and specify Output To initiate a Hold or modify existing Hold Data To update an Active flight plan To Retransmit to ARTS To force flight data transfer to ARTS system To remove a Flight Plan from Core Storage To remove a data from NAS storage but retain in ARTS storage To Enter a Stereo Flight Plan To request a specific flight plan strip To provide a limited output test To enter Weather Information To request Weather Information TY MESSAGE DESIGNATOR AM 01 AM ATCFacO P3
146. TACAN z 8 Y NKT R 154 NDB RWY 14 HLD 21 DME INBOUND ILS RWY 23R HLD 7 DME DEPARTURE RBX 281 V266 8 DME RBX R 319 V189 8 DME NOTE MRH ARRIVALS WILL BE ROUTED EWN R 110 TO INTERCEPT MRH 180 COURSE TO MRH MRH DEPARTURES WILL BE ROUTED MRH 360 BEARING FROM TO INTERCEPT EWN R 110 DIRECT EWN 6 4 6 Figure 6 4 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 5 Feb 15 Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q DISTANCE TO CLEAR PROTECTED AIRSPACE AT EWN ROUTE OF FLIGHT RADIAL TO BE PROTECTED SPEED DISTANCE ON RADIAL 175 11 DME VOR or GPS RWY 22 HLD 2808188 15 DME 139 NORTH EWN R 014 5 DME VOR or GPS RWY 4 HLD EU ILS RWY 4 HLD 230KIAS 5DME VOR or GPS RWY 22 HLD EE Dv or 230KIAS 7 DME 10 DME V139 SOUTH EWN R 232 VOR or GPS RWY 4 HLD En ILS RWY 4 HLD 230KIAS 15 DME NCA AIRSPACE 16 DME 175 8 7 DME VOR or GPS RWY 22 HLD 2808185 s DME v45 EWN R 313 6 DME VOR or GPS RWY 4 HLD or ILS RWY 4 HLD 230KIAS 7DME 175 5 DME VOR or GPS RWY 22 HLD 2808155 7 V56 EWN R 264 175KIAS 9DME VOR or GPS RWY 4 HLD 230KIAS 13 DME ILS RWY 4 HLD 230KIAS 12 DME Figure 6 4 5 6 4 7 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 5 Feb 15 Change 1 ATCFa
147. TE SIGNATURE OF FWO DATE SIGNATURE OF ATCFO MCAS FORM 3722 4 06 2008 Supersedes Previous Edition Figure 2 3 3 15 Aug 15 Change 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL RADAR TOTALS ATCFacO P3722 1Q DATE Navy Marine Other Military Air Carrier General Aviation IFR NKT VFR IFR EWN VFR IFR MRH VFR IFR VFR IFR OCW VFR IFR HSE VFR IFR W95 VFR IFR PMZ VFR IFR Enroute VFR NCA Arrivals and Departures fall into the Enroute column RADAR APPROACHES CONTAINMENT VV VM OM GA R 5314 BURNER NEUSE INSTRUMENT APPROACHES NKT EWN OCW MRH HSE W95 2 GA ML AC GA AC GA MU AC GA MIL AC GA MIL AC GA MU AC GA MIL GA A MCAS FORM 3722 6 02 2015 Supersedes Previous Edition 2 3 8 Figure 2 3 4 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q NEUSE ATCAA USAGE REPORT 1 703 771 3493 TOTAL HOURS SCHEDULED TOTAL HOURS ACTIVATED USED FOR PARTICIPATING FOR PARTICIPATING AIRCRAFT TOTAL AIR OPERATIONS A FLIGHT OF 4 EQUALS 4 HATTERAS ATCAA USAGE REPORT TOTAL HOURS SCHEDULED TOTAL HOURS ACTIVATED USED FOR PARTICIPATING FOR PARTICIPATING AIRCRAFT TOTAL AIR OPERATIONS A FLIGHT OF 4 EQUALS 4
148. TENSITY CONTROL Adjusts the volume of the audible tone TABLE IN MOTION Indicator When lighted indicates that the FPN 63 Radar is in motion on the turntable RUNWAY Indicator Switch When selected initiates platform position change Runway selected illuminated in yellow POSITIONED Indicators Illuminated in green when rotating platform has arrived at selected position TROUBLE When illuminated indicates Emergency Stop Overforce or Overtravel condition Figure 7 2 10 7 211 OD 152 SURVEILLANCE RADAR INDICATOR The OD 152 surveillance radar indicator displays the information received and processed by the ASR 8 surveillance radar and the RATCF DAIR The OD 152 is located in the radar room on positions 2 6 7 8 9 12 13 and 14 Descriptions and control functions are detailed on pages 7 2 11 and 7 2 12 7 212 RATCF DAIR a The RATCF DAIR system reduces the bookkeeping functions associated with comparing flight strip information to a beacon reply and aids in reducing verbal coordination associated with handoffs b The RATCF DAIR system is used and initiated by the controller when information is entered into the RATCF DAIR keyboard KY 862 T See figure 7 2 13 c The many presentations that the RATCF DAIR system provides to the radar scope are detailed in figure 7 2 14 REFERENCE APPENDIX H AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 7 2 10 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15
149. TION FDIO TEST FLIGHT PLANS TAXI RESTRICTIONS USE OF ACTIVE RUNWAYS DATA ENTRIES FOR NJM AIRPORT STATUS BOARD ATIS vi P3722 1Q 4 7 3 5 4 1 5 4 1 5 4 1 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 4 3 5 4 4 5 4 4 5 4 5 5 4 5 5 4 5 5 4 5 5 4 5 5 4 5 5 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6 15 Aug 15 Change 2 5 422 5 423 5 424 5 425 5 426 5 427 5 428 5 429 5 500 5 501 5 502 5 503 5 600 5 601 5 700 5 701 5 702 5 703 5 704 5 705 5 706 6 100 6 101 6 102 6 103 6 104 6 105 6 106 6 107 6 108 6 109 6 110 6 200 6 201 6 202 6 203 6 204 6 205 6 206 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL OPERATIONS ALONG AN ACTIVERUNWAY TAXIWAY LIGHTS GCA DEPARTURES BACK TAXI FOR DEPARTURE PAD OPERATIONS CRASH CIRCUIT TEST RADIO CHECKS STEREO ROUTES AND VFR FLIGHT GUARDING Section 5 TOWER STRIP MARKING PROCEDURES GENERAL TERMINAL DATA ENTRIES CONTROL SYMBOLOGY DEPARTURE STRIPS Section 6 COORDINATION PROCEDURES GENERAL HOURLY WEATHER FORECAST Section 7 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES GENERAL INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION HOT BRAKES CRASH amp VEHICLE NET ARRESTED LANDINGS CONTROL TOWER EMERGENCY EVACUATION PLAN CHAPTER 6 RADAR Section 1 GENERAL GENERAL AIRSPACE ADJACENT AIRSPACE MINIMUM VECTORING ALTITUDE CHARTS FIXES AIRWAYS AND AIRPORTS DISCRETE BEACON CODE ASSIGNMENTS RADAR VIDEO MAPS EWN AEROBATIC PRACTICE AREA MRH AEROBATIC PRACTICE AREA VER PILOT TRAI
150. US BOARDS PRIMARY RADAR IDENTIFICATION REPORTING LASER ILLUMINATION OF AIRCRAFT TERMINAL DATA ENTRIES CONTROL SYMBOLOGY POINTOUTS STRIPMARKING FOR LOCAL IFR CLEARANCES HIWAS MULTISENSOR RADAR amp MVA PRECIPITATION INTENSITY SINGLE FREQUENCY APPROACH PROCEDURES Section 4 NONRADAR GENERAL STRIP MARKING NCA DEPARTURES MRH OPERATIONS NKT DEPARTURES HOLDING PATTERNS AND APPROACHES viii ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 3 1 6 3 1 6 3 1 6 3 1 6 3 1 6 3 4 6 3 5 6 3 5 6 3 5 6 3 5 6 3 5 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 7 6 3 7 6 3 7 6 3 8 6 3 8 6 3 8 6 3 8 6 3 11 6 3 11 6 3 11 6 3 14 6 3 14 6 3 14 6 3 15 6 3 15 6 3 15 6 3 17 6 4 1 6 4 1 6 4 3 6 4 3 6 4 3 6 4 3 15 Aug 15 Change 2 6 406 6 407 6 408 6 500 6 501 6 502 6 503 6 504 6 505 6 506 6 507 6 508 6 600 6 601 6 602 6 603 6 604 6 605 6 606 6 607 6 608 6 609 6 610 6 611 6 612 6 613 6 700 6 701 6 702 6 703 7 100 7 101 7 102 7 103 7 104 7 105 7 106 7 107 7 108 7 109 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL APPROACH TIMES RESERVED EWN NCA OPERATIONS Section 5 COORDINATION PROCEDURES GENERAL SCRATCH PAD MSAW CA STARS DATA ENTRY REQUIREMENTS STARS TDW QUICK LOOK FUNCTIONS MULTI SENSOR RADAR STARS OPERATIONAL MODE TRANSITION PROCEDURES STARS VIDEO MAPPING SENSOR MODE CHECKLIST Section 6 SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE POLICY SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS 5306 AREAS SPE
151. VOICE CALL GP 5011 RANGE BT 11 AUTO RING 05 EWN TOWER AUTO RING ROC BIG ROCK RANGE OPERATIONS AUTO RING NJM UAS NJM UAS UAS COORDINATION AUTO RING MACS CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER AUTO RING 4 MACS CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER AUTO RING 2 6 8 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 5 Feb 15 Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q NTU NTU CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER VOICE CALL DSN 751 3064 can be used in the event that the 50 line is out of service or no answer is received from Blackburn Blackburn can coordinate with Chieftain DASC 24 hours day during exercises when Blackburn releases R 5306D E to Chieftain 2 606 INTRAFACILITY LANDLINES LINE STATION USE ACTION NKT 2 WEATHER POSITION 22 PUSH RING NKT 4 CFR DISPATCHER ONLY FROM 17 PUSH RING 5 VAL DESK ONLY FROM 17 PUSH RING 2 607 CHERRY POINT LANDLINE NUMBERS LINE STATION USE ACTION APPROACH EAST DIAL 25 GP 1732 NKT APPROACH WEST DIAL 33 TOWER DIAL 58 APPROACH EAST DIAL 25 GP 1774 NKT APPROACH WEST DIAL 33 FLIGHT CLEARANCE DIAL 30 GP 659 NKT RADAR DIAL 33 TOWER DIAL 22 2 6 9 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 2 608 LOCAL FREQUENCIES AGENCY FREQUENCY BUTTON 124 1 APPROACH EAST 268 7 119 7 APPROACH NORTH 8 360 775 119 A
152. WAYS AND AIRPORTS New Title FIG 6 1 11 New FIG 6 1 12 New FIG 6 1 13 Upgraded FIG 6 1 14 Upgraded FIG 6 1 15 Upgraded FIG 6 1 16 Upgraded 6 200 TERMINAL RADAR TEAM POSITIONS Positions moved 6 201 SATCS GS 13 replaced with SATCS FacDir 014 14 6 204 APPROACH EAST Approval Request procedures added 6 206 RADAR ASSOCIATE POSITIONS Abbreviations changed 6 207 ARRIVAL CONTROL ASL changed to CCL 6 208 RADAR ASSOCIATE ARRIVAL Title Changed 6 209 FINAL CONTROL Abbreviations changed 6 301 AOM TOPICS Familiarization flights Tow target procedures and A 4 hydraulic disconnect removed 6 302 CONTACT APPROACH ASL changed to CCL 6 305 INSTRUMENT APPROACHES OCW MQI and PMZ added 6 310 EQUIPMENT STATUS RATCF DAIR changed to automation 6 316 CHERRY POINT WAVEOFFS Tower directs waveoff added to phraseology 6 317 AV 8 MINIMUM FUEL 8 added for clarity 6 318 CLOSED CONTROL TOWER AT MCAS NEW RIVER Closed tower procedures added FacDir 004 14 6 324 INFORMATION AND STATUS BOARDS Description of status board menu items added FacDir 023 14 FIG 6 3 5 New Status Boards and procedures FacDir 023 14 6 328 CONTROL SYMBOLOGY Numbers given to associated figures FIG 6 3 7 Symbols for Norfolk and Oceana added FIG 6 3 8 Hammerhead and Sabre removed FIG 6 3 9 through 6 3 16 Renumbere
153. Y 14 34 47 33 45 076 44 24 17 ITOLE IF RNAV RWY 8 34 40 36 77 076 50 14 67 JIDON IF RNAV RWY 3 MRH 34 35 31 38 076 44 21 38 LAVTE IF IAF RNAV RWY 32 34 37 40 76 076 31 23 00 MOKEY MRH 076 003 RNAV RWY 26 34 45 22 07 076 35 59 79 NALAE IF IAF RNAV RWY 8 34 45 15 21 076 52 31 53 PEPKE IF RNAV RWY 21 34 52 25 33 076 34 41 05 RIXOE IAF RNAV RWY 21 34 54 55 67 076 41 18 74 SEDUE MAP HLD RNAV RWY 14 34 40 46 96 076 35 27 93 ULVAQ RNAV RWY 14 34 50 56 45 076 48 52 84 WABIK IAF RNAV RWY 26 MRH 34 52 16 15 076 31 28 05 WOVIP RNAV RWY 3 MRH 34 40 57 50 076 41 1519 2 6 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 5 Feb 15 Change 1 ATCFacO 372210 HATTERAS BILLY MITCHELL FIX NN LOCATION ASSOCIATED PROCEDURE LAT LONG BECAC MAP RNAV RWY 25 HSE 35 14 22 47 075 36 18 72 ZOLMN HLD RNAV RWY 25 HSE 35 38 42 35 075 24 27 41 CULAT IAF RNAV RWY 7 HSE 35 12 31 49 075 54 49 04 HULIP RNAV RWY 7 HSE 35 07 46 77 075 48 31 92 IPKOH RNAV RWY 25 HSE 35 24 05 67 075 28 53 27 JIKON FAF RNAV RWY 7 HSE 35 11 04 99 075 42 25 16 ONOKY FAF RNAV RWY 25 HSE 35 18 06 64 075 32 14 75 OTMIE IAF RNAV RWY 25 HSE 35 32 29 06 075 29 03 86 OCRACOKE ISLAND CAXIT FAF RNAV RWY 6 W95 35 0
154. Y MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 2 WEATHER SEQUENCE B 200 GENERAL On July 1 1996 the United States changed the format in which weather is disseminated The international Aviation Routine Weather Report is called METAR B 201 SEQUENCE ELEMENTS Unless specifically indicated in this section each element of aMETAR report is separated by a space is spoken as less than when used in conjunction with visibility or minus when used in conjunction with temperatures is spoken as COR MODIFIERs for the METAR report MODIFIER will be COR or AUTO COR indicates the report is correction of previously transmitted manual report AUTO indicates a fully automated station without augmentation ASOS The type of sensor equipment used at the station will be encoded in the remarks section 22015G25KT WIND direction is reported relative to WIND true north in three characters Wind direction is reported normally in two characters or three when necessary The speed is followed by to indicate the speed is in knots rather than kilometer per hour KPH or meters per second MPS as used in some other countries more than METAR KNKT 011955Z COR 22015G25KT 3 4SM 171 2600 een WIND VISIBILITY RVR ree OCB Md ALTIMETER PK W ND 28045 15 a T
155. a that reduce visibility but are not a form of precipitation Fog Smoke Haze etc Except for hail or ice crystals the intensity of precipitation is shown by placing a plus sign after the weather symbol for heavy precipitation or a minus sign for light precipitation Absence of the intensity symbol indicates moderate precipitation AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 f Temperature The degree of hotness or coldness of the ambient air as measured by any suitable instrument Announce temperature in degrees Fahrenheit and the Celsius equivalent Temperatures below zero are announced by prefixing the word minus before the values g Dewpoint The temperature to which a given parcel of air must be cooled at constant pressure and constant water vapor content in order for saturation to occur When the drybulb is 30 F or below the dewpoint shall be reported missing h Wind Wind direction is reported to the nearest 10 degrees and shall be considered variable if it varies by 60 degrees or more when the average wind speed is greater than 10 knots Wind speed is given is knots Describe the wind as calm when the wind velocity is less than 3 Knots 1 The character of the wind refers to the increase and decrease or variability of speed in gusts or squalls 2 A gust is defined as a change in speed of 10 Knots or more between peak and lull occurring over brief periods of time 3 Squalls are indicated b
156. acility or equipment Coordination between the radar tower branch will be accomplished at the time of the request b Anytime an inbound aircraft is not on the air flow the FWO should notify the ODO as soon as possible so the case can be resolved and a PPR issued if warranted REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 2 7 4 2 1 SECNAVINST 3770 1 AOM paragraph 5002 2 801 EMERGENCY LANDINGS Any aircraft may land at a VV VM aviation facility when necessary as a result of a bona fide However when the nature of the emergency permits the pilot to select the time and place of the landing it is preferred that the pilot land the aircraft at a civil field REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 2 7 4 2 2 SECNAVINST 3770 1 AOM paragraph 5001 2 802 AIRCRAFT WITHOUT PPR a The FWO shall be responsible for holding VFR pop up aircraft lacking a PPR and aircraft determined by Airfield Operations to not have a PPR outside of the CDSA until a PPR can be approved The holding area will be situationally dependant based on traffic b If an aircraft contacts the tower without first talking to approach control the TS shall be responsible for determining if the aircraft possesses 2 8 1 a valid PPR If the aircraft does not have a PPR ATC will advise the aircraft to remain outside of the CDSA and contact base operations as soon as possible to resolve the situation c If a military aircraft lands
157. affic At or above 2 000 feet MSL enter appropriate 6 NM initial based upon observance of local traffic Descend to 1 500 feet MSL by the approach end numbers rocking wings from the numbers to Pilots landing without radios in compliance with the instructions above must exercise extreme The GCA pattern altitude is 1 600 feet MSL GCA controlled aircraft normally begin descent at 1 600 feet MSL five 5 NM straight in on final Tower pattern altitude is 1 000 feet After landing the pilot should taxi will clear of the runway as soon as possible and look for further light gun signals from the tower A 3 2 Figure A 3 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q A 300 FEET Y 4 4 000 FEET Y HIGH KEY 6000 MSL 150 KIAS GEAR AND FLAPS UP 90 140 TO 150 KIAS FLAPS 20 OR 30 140 KIAS GEAR DOWN FLAPS 20 LOW KEY 3200 MSL 5000 MSL Figure A 3 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 3 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 4 AC 130 WITH HOT GUNS PROCEDURES A 400 GENERAL The following procedures were established on 25 Jul 98 in a Letter of Agreement with 16 SOS DO in order to standardize AC 130 Hot Gun recovery procedures at MCAS Cherry Point A 401 PROCEDURES a The AC 130 aircrew shall 1 Notify Range Control Blackburn of th
158. agraph s does do not include specific prescribed phraseology the EXAMPLE merely denotes suggested words and or phrases that may be used in communications f The annotation REFERENCE provides additional sources of information or more detail to a particular subject g The annotation NOTE indicates a statement of fact or of a prefatory or explanatory nature relating to directive material 1 202 ABBREVIATIONS As used in this manual the following abbreviations have the meanings indicated Abbreviation Meaning ABO Air Bases Order AC Air Carrier AIA Actual Instrument Approach AIM Aeronautical Information Manual AIREVAC Air Evacuation AIROPS Airfield Operations ALTRV Altitude Reservation APE Approach East APN Approach North APW Approach West AOM Airfield Operations Manual AR Arrival Control ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center ASO Air Station Order ASR Airport Surveillance Radar AT Air Taxi ATAA Air Traffic Activity Analyzer ATC Air Traffic Control Assigned Airspace ATCF Facility ATCFM Facility Manual ATCFO Facility Officer ATCM ATC Maintenance ATCMO ATC Maintenance Officer ATCS ATC Specialist ATCT ATC Tower ATREP Air Traffic Representative AWT Airman Written Test BUE Bargaining Unit Employee C NET Crash Vehicle Radio Network CALA Combat Air
159. aining with the trainee 5 Ensure that skill enhancement training is documented on Performance Evaluations 4 311 QUALIFICATION SKILL CHECK a General The trainee s application of the knowledge skills and abilities required for qualification shall be assessed through a single qualification skill check session on an operational position This may be supplemented by verbal questioning simulation or other methods Qualification is permitted on consolidated positions only if recommendation for qualification occurred while these positions were consolidated A qualification on consolidated positions qualifies the trainee on each of the individual operating positions involved b Requirements Any properly designated OJT Instructor can recommend a trainee for position qualification but the qualification skill check must not be given unless the Training Team either initiated or concurred with the recommendation The only exception is upon completion of an OJT Time Limit or Additional OJT in either case a qualification skill check must be conducted The qualification skill check shall be identified as a skill check prior to the session and shall not count toward OJT hours c Process Upon receipt of the recommendation the appropriate branch chief will schedule and proctor the final examination After successful completion of the exam the branch chief will coordinate with the to schedule a Qualification Skill Check to be given by the
160. aintained VEA omputer entries correct Adjustment of control display correct Capabilities fully utilized understood H Other Specify I Supervisor Only Crew coordination effectiveness Ability to lead motivate supervise t s a a gt Overall knowledge CREW OFFICER FWO BRANCH CHIEF MCAS Form 3722 17 09 2014 Supersedes Previous Edition 2 3 20 TRAINING CHIEF Figure 2 3 16 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Figure 2 3 17 2 3 21 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 372210 DAILY RECORD FACILITY OPERATION LOCATION IDENTIFICATION TYPE FACILITY OPERATING POSITION CHECKED BY SSGT LANGE M J J WOODIN VFR RY 23 ALL SUA INACTIVE CLSD AIR8 amp NCA 8 NJM CLSD SOME FREQUENCY ISSUES WITH ATIS amp 120 52 NO TRANSMIT CFPL EWN DME OTS RNAV RY 5R OTS amp CALL ATCM TO SWING PAR WCLC CLAY ON WCLC 124 1 NO TRANSMIT RY 32L CLOSED 268 7 TRANSMIT OTS NJM OPEN R5306D E ACTIVE R5303 ACTIVE NCA OPEN R5306C AND HAT F ACTIVE PAR TO MAINT 124 1 AND 268 7 RTS PAR RTS J KNIPPLE ON WCLC CORE MOA TO ROC NJM CLSD CORE MOA TO NKT EWN TWR CLSD J WOODIN R5303 INACTIVE COB CERTIFY that entries above are SIGNATURE S OF WATCH correct that
161. al therefore have no requirement to be combined to any other position Whenever an associate position is closed the associated position responsibilities revert to the primary position i e AR assumes RAA duties and responsibilities LC assumes CCL duties and responsibilities APW assumes RAW duties and responsibilities etc Field 10 POSITION TYPE 1 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q EXAMPLE 1 SIMULATION Position Position Identifier Simulated Position Number of Simulated Radar Approaches Code 1 4 5Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q EXAMPLE 2 POSITION TRAINING Position Log T Trainee Receiving OJT ATCS Trainee Receiving OJF Skill Check Pilot Participant Programmer MCAS FORM 3722 26 9 2014 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 1 6 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q APPENDIX F GUIDE FOR DAILY RECORD OF FACILITY OPERATION FAA Form 7230 4 INTRODUCTION This appendix contains instructions for completing FAA Form 7230 4 Daily Record of Facility Operation The RS and TS are responsible for preparation of the Daily Record of Facility Operations and shall ensure that entries are concise yet adequately describe
162. al directives to include the following a Notify CCL when IFR practice instrument approach departure is RTB and no longer going to remain within the GCA defined pattern b Verbally coordinate with the tower when a pilot has requested a PAR approach and identified a desired pad for landing REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 1 3 5 FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 10 2 6 208 RADAR ASSOCIATE ARRIVAL Responsibilities of ASA are listed in FAA JO 7110 65 local directives and the following a Coordinate ALL approaches to other than the active runway by VISCOM at 10 miles and verbally coordinate the intended runway b When more than 3 miles separation is required from preceding aircraft inform the final controller of the reason EXAMPLE Button following a heavy C 5 c When evaluating the weather environment prior to transition from no overhead approach es to overhead approach es coordinate with the final controller ensuring appropriate climbout instructions are issued during the evaluation period d Verbally coordinate the following with the control tower for aircraft conducting other than radar approaches to NKT 1 Flights 2 Ordnance 3 All other type aircraft including call sign if full stop 6 2 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 4 Options 5 Call sign of all transient full stop aircraft 6 AV8 full stop type landing if other than slow 7 Circling a
163. al qualifications a portion of this requirement shall be completed prior to the trainee beginning OJT The remainder is expected to be completed prior to qualification A trainee does not have to complete all required simulation to be qualified but must complete it prior to any recommendation for suspension on the grounds of inability to qualify Simulation requirements are listed in Figure 4 3 1 c Hours trainees except those on a subsequent position shall complete 5 hours of OJF prior to beginning OJT Additional OJF may be conducted during OJT under any of the following conditions 1 Controller on position is not an OJT Instructor 2 Controller on position is receiving a skill check 3 Another trainee is on position receiving OJT 4 Trainee is medically grounded 5 Assigned as skill enhancement training Training on Combined Positions The ATCFO has authorized training on certain consolidated positions These positions are APE APN APW AR LC CCL Training time during this period will be logged against the position the trainee is officially training on 5Feb 15 Change 1 4 303 MINIMUM OJT POSITION TIME a All trainees shall receive a minimum of 90 minutes total daily training time from a combination of OJT and or simulation per scheduled watch shift per position training EXAMPLE LCpl Smith is training on FD and GC trainee is required to receive 3 hours of OJT Sim per shift 90 minu
164. all AIREVAC aircraft when the information is received on the FDIO k Ensure that the appropriate BASH information is broadcast on the ATIS l Aircraft requesting VFR flight following or clearance to NJM from NKT will be manual copies FD will assign one of its delegated codes m Maintain the airfield status board and ATIS board Using a black grease pencil circle the appropriate status next to the equipment NOTAMs and other pertinent data shall be written on the board as necessary n Update and monitor broadcasts and disseminate current messages on the ATIS 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 3 AIRFIELD INFORMATION 5 300 GENERAL Reserved 5 301 MOVEMENT AREAS a Issue by radio or directional light signals specific approval or disapproval for the movement of aircraft vehicles equipment or personnel on the movement area Vehicles and aircraft are not allowed on the movement areas without prior tower approval except for the following 1 Fuels Division and VAL vehicles may transit Hotel and Bravo taxiways when proceeding to and from the fuel pits and APOE without authorization from GC This is due to the high volume of vehicle traffic transiting to and from the aircraft parking aprons and the fuel pits 2 VAL vehicles are authorized to proceed as required by their mission without radio communication with ATC between VAL Pits 1 3 tactical transien
165. all complete supplemental training prior to the utilization of new revised procedures regulations or equipment c Skill Enhancement Training for FPL Training administered by the operations supervisor when it is determined that a need exists to increase the proficiency of a specialist in a skill on a position on which the specialist is qualified 1 The specialist shall be advised in writing of the skill that is targeted for training 2 The FWO in collaboration with the specialist is responsible for developing the training to be administered to the specialist The methods and contents will be tailored to meet the identified needs of the individual and may include laboratory 5 Feb 15 Change 1 scenarios classroom instruction and OJT The FWO shall determine the most effective method 3 FPL Skill Enhancement training shall be documented on a Position Evaluation d Remedial Training Training conducted to correct specific performance deficiencies 1 An individual disqualified as a result of a performance deficiency shall receive remedial training 2 Training provided as a result of performance related disqualification shall be documented as remedial training 3 The employee shall be notified in writing of the specific subject areas to be covered and the reasons 4 The employee will have a reasonable opportunity to provide input on the development of his her remedial training 5 The methods and
166. all complete the following no later than the 5 working day of each month NMOS Tracking Report b Position Training Report Simulator Usage Report d Tower Simulator Utilization Maintenance Issue Requirements Report TSUMIRR REFERENCE MCIEAST ATC Order 3722 3 2 325 MCIEAST QUARTERLY SITREP The Training Branch shall draft the MCIEAST Quarterly Situation Report and forward it to the NCOIC for completion within 5 working days after the end of each quarter REFERENCE MCIEAST ATC Order 3722 3 2 326 MCIEAST NATOPS EVALUATION REPORT The facility will receive a NATOPS evaluation report from MCIEAST within 15 days of the completion of the evaluation REFERENCE MCIEAST ATC Order 3722 3 2 327 INTERNAL NATOPS EVALUATION REPORT Each odd numbered calendar year the facility will conduct an internal evaluation and forward the results to the commanding officer REFERENCE MCIEAST ATC Order 3722 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 328 ASRS NASA has established an Aviation Safety Reporting System ASRS to identify problems in the aviation system that requires correction This report NASA ARC 277 will not be made available to the FAA for civil penalty or certification actions for violations of the federal air regulations Your assistance is essential to the success of the program To access this system use the following link http asrs arc nasa gov report electronic html 2 3
167. altitude which is the lowest allowable altitude for the aircraft s current terrain clearance Alerts also exist for pairs of tracks that are in danger because the horizontal and vertical separations between the two tracks are predicted to be or actually are less than what is allowed These situations cause the MSAW or CA indicators to appear for the affected tracks and an entry for each appears in the LA CA MCI list 6 503 STARS DATA ENTRY REQUIREMENTS It is a primary responsibility of APE to ensure accurate STARS system altimeter setting ATIS code and other information will not be entered into the STARS current General System Information GSD because it is readily available on the VIDS 6 504 STARS FUNCTIONS TDW QUICK LOOK a The TDW will be set with the Quick Look function on for all positions This can be accomplished by entering the command MULTIFUNCTION QALL into the STARS keyboard 5 Feb 15 Change 1 b Automated data transfer between the TRACON and the Tower is prohibited at Cherry Point ATCF Inbounds or handoffs to the Tower will be accomplished via the landlines 6 505 MULTI SENSOR RADAR a The RS is the decisive authority on which RADAR mode is used b APN APE APW and AR should operate in single sensor mode but may be operated in multi sensor mode if an operational advantage will be gained When APE is using multi sensor mode aircraft being handed off from AR to APE will be separated using t
168. ance item Examples of exemplary performance and or specific comments shall be stated in Block 12 of the form for each job subtask indicated 2 NEEDS IMPROVEMENT A checkmark in this column indicates that the trainee s observed performance is acceptable at this stage of training but must improve in order to meet requirements Specific comments along with suggestions or requirements for B improvement shall be stated in Block 12 of the form for each Job subtask indicated 3 UNSATISFACTORY A checkmark in this column indicates that the trainee s observed performance is unsatisfactory at this stage of training Specific comments suggestions and recommendations for correcting each unsatisfactory Job subtask must be stated in Block 12 c To qualify on a qualification skill check all applicable items shall be marked satisfactory or not observed N O If an item is marked N O Block 12 must indicate the method used to determine satisfactory performance knowledge for that job subtask If necessary verbal questioning simulation or other methods shall be used to demonstrate knowledge of a job subtask when not observed d Ifajob subtask is not applicable to a position being observed it shall be recorded as N A not applicable Block 11 COMMENTS Used by the OJTI supervisor to document the trainee s performance during a skill check When the form is used for something other than a skill check describe the type of training being conduct
169. ancel their IFR flight plan or operate 5 Feb 15 Change 1 VFR ON TOP may request a climb to VFR ON TOP The ATC authorization shall contain either a top report or a statement that no top report is available and a request to report reaching VFR ON TOP Additionally the authorization may contain a clearance limit routing and an alternative clearance if VFR ON TOP is not reached by a specified altitude c Separation will be provided between all aircraft operating on IFR flight plans except during that part of the flight outside Class B airspace or a TRSA being conducted on a VFR ON TOP VFR CONDITIONS clearance Under these conditions ATC may issue traffic advisories but it is the sole responsibility of the pilot to be vigilant so as to see and avoid other aircraft REFERENCE AIM paragraph 4 86 and 4 89 FAA JO 7110 65 Chapter 7 Section 3 d The following responsibilities are established for the FD position 1 Request the intentions of any pilot that requests a VFR ON TOP clearance Specifically ascertain from the pilot his her intentions after reaching VFR ON TOP before issuing the local VFR ON TOP clearance PHRASEOLOGY call sign upon reaching VFR conditions on top say your intentions 2 When the pilot responds with Cancel and proceed VFR no expected recovery time FD shall take the following action Issue clearance call sign cleared to KIYEK after departure runway rwy head
170. and PA system REFERENCE AOM Paragraph 3018 5 704 CRASH amp VEHICLE NET a During an emergency GC will issue control instructions to CFR using channel 2 C NET on the handheld The monitor button will be keyed up on the console to ensure transmissions are recorded 5 7 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q When CFR secures the emergency GC is no longer required to monitor this channel b During trunking system outages C NET and V NET will become inoperative All movement with CFR both channel 1 V NET and channel 2 C NET VAL and Recovery will be coordinated via channel 14 CFR Conventional on the handheld During the period of outages vigilance is required to avoid runway incursions due to vehicles not capable of operating on channel 14 A communication technician shall be notified immediately of any trunking system outages During trunking system outages conventional channels are limited to Line of Sight reception 5 705 ARRESTED LANDINGS ATC shall request landing weight and speed from all aircraft that will make an arrested landing GC shall relay landing weight and speed to recovery personnel in a timely manner REFERENCE AOM paragraph 1009 and 5006 5 706 CONTROL TOWER EMERGENCY EVACUATION PLAN If it becomes necessary to evacuate the control tower for any reason i e fire terrorism destructive weather etc notify the FWO and reduce to minimum manning Personnel not required should depart the tower via the in
171. and attitude d Objectivity e Credibility b Upon satisfactory review of the candidates attributes the FWO shall submit Performance Evaluation to the Training Office recommending the candidate as an OJT Instructor for the position s identified REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 1 3 4 305 TRAINING TEAMS a A training team shall be established by each trainee s SATCS The training team shall facilitate the training of the trainee by continuously assessing progress and providing feedback The specific individuals on this team may change as the trainee progresses in order to meet individual and or facility needs The training team shall consist of 1 Two OJTIs 2 The trainee 3 The trainee s FWO supervisor b The training team shall 1 Develop and review the Training Plan and recommend modifications to the trainee s FWO supervisor The team shall meet periodically to ensure training plan objectives are met The training team shall determine the frequency of meetings 2 Review the trainee s training history prior to that individual starting OJT and ensure that all 15 Aug 15 Change 2 Pre OJT simulation and or OJF requirements are complete prior to commencing OJT 3 Determine the operational positions for which OJF is required OJF shall be completed prior to beginning OJT on positions for which OJF is assigned 4 Ensure continuous objective assessment of progress during training inclu
172. anually write an inbound strip 6 3 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 5 405 6 331 HIWAS After the broadcast of any alert from the Hazardous Inflight Weather Advisory Service HIWAS e g AIRMET SIGMET WST UUA CWA the controller shall initial the strip and write the time Z at which it was given on the back the strip will then be filed REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 6 2 6 332 MULTISENSOR RADAR amp MVA The Multi Sensor Radar and MVA enhancements of the STARS shall only be used when absolutely necessary to gain true track data and positive control of tracks with the following guidance a When using the Multi Sensor RADAR feed all controllers performing RADAR control functions shall use the Multi Sensor MVA map and the minimums associated with them When using the Multi Sensor RADAR feed JO 7110 65 states that when using STARS in a Multi Sensor mode all separation shall use the standards for targets 40 or more miles from the antenna b When using the Multi Sensor RADAR feed all normal operations may be conducted however use of this setup shall not be a normal operating standard but used only as necessary for safety of flight and position target detection and tracking The AR and APW positions shall only use this as a last resort when bad track data is being received The APE position is recognized as the normal position that would frequently use the
173. ar in that it provides both a light and an aural alarm to indicate that a particular NAVAID is malfunctioning Some monitor equipment provides for an automatic changeover to standby NAVAID equipment when the main system has failed TACAN only b When an alarm system of a NAVAID monitoring device goes off notify the technician responsible for maintenance of the NAVAID equipment and the FWO If the NAVAID has to be shut down or is unreliable you should notify the appropriate facilities ODO tower and the ARTCC 7 303 NAVIGATION AIDS a TACAN The AN URN 25 TACAN system employs 126 two way operating channels spaced two MHz apart from 960 to 1215 MHz Bearing information is available to an unlimited number of aircraft within line of sight range of the facility 7 3 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Distance information also limited to line of sight is available from 0 to 195 miles A ground facility can reply to distance interrogations from as many as 120 aircraft simultaneously The Cherry Point TACAN identification code NKT incorporates the OE 258 antenna and operates on channel 75 It has a backup transmitter and is serviced by a 25 kW generator for emergency power The AN URN 25 is located at 34054 13 N and 76952 50 W b ILS The Instrument Landing System AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 4 WEATHER EQUIPMENT 7 400 GENERAL This chapter describes the function and capabilities
174. are published in Flight Information Publications Low Altitude United States Vol 17 6 307 ASR RECOMMENDED ALTITUDES FOR NKT All Runways 5 miles 4 miles 3 miles 2 miles FAF 1300 1000 700 REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 11 1 6 308 CLIMBOUT INSTRUCTIONS Before an aircraft which plans to execute a low approach or touch and go begins final decent issue appropriate departure instructions to be followed upon completion of the approach The term overhead indicates that weather conditions at NKT allow aircraft to conduct VFR overhead approaches The term no overhead indicates that the VFR overhead pattern is not available and that aircraft are likely to encounter IFR conditions during the approach PHRASEOLOGY 1 OVERHEAD After completing low approach touch and go option climb and maintain 1000 at the field boundary climb and maintain 1600 fly runway heading or Maintain VFR squawk standby contact tower upwind 2 NO OVERHEAD After completing low approach touch and go option climb and maintain 1600 fly runway heading 3 EWN After completing low approach touch and go option climb and maintain 2000 fly runway heading REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 10 12 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 309 SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE SCHEDULE R 5306A C HAT F NEUSE schedule is obtained via E mail from Central Scheduling to include weekends and holidays if applicable
175. ary 5 Weather information is provided 6 Handoff procedures correct timely Job Task COORDINATION AND COMMUNICATION Job Subtask Indicator 1 Traffic advisories correct timely 2 Coordination thorough timely 3 Communication is clear concise Ensures that all data passed or received are understood Does not have to repeat information using different words to a Demonstrates a pleasant and positive voice b Demonstrates moderate rather than too fast or too G 1 12 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q convey the intended meaning slow speech rate c Listens carefully and verifies that correct information is transmitted and received d Demonstrates clear pronunciation Does not transpose words numbers or symbols 4 Makes necessary transmissions Transmits only information that is required over radio or interphone Uses radio interphone only when necessary b Transmits only required information and instructions c Does not use abusive or profane language d Does not transmit separate message when it would be more effective to combine information 5 Relief briefings complete and accurate Ensures that duty familiarization and transfer of position responsibility are complete and accurate Follows approved checklist when exchanging information and both individuals acknowledge the positive transfer o
176. at portion of R 5306A below 750 feet MSL located Southeast of the center of the Neuse River on the Cherry Point TACAN 069 radial not including the area within 5NM of BT 11 This area is used periodically by North Carolina Wildlife North Carolina Division of Fisheries and Oceanographic Agency dusters and Weyerhauser This area will be assigned on a first come first served basis between military and civil users SUB AREA 3A 4 BELOW 750 MSL c SUB AREA 3B That portion of R 5306A below 750 feet MSL located Northwest of the center of the Neuse River on the Cherry Point TACAN 069 radial not including the area within 5NM of BT 9 or BT 11 This area is used periodically by North Carolina Wildlife North Carolina Division of Fisheries and Oceanographic Agency crop dusters 6 6 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q and Weyerhauser This area will be assigned on a first come first served basis between military and civil users NX e n SUB AREA3B 252 BELOW 750 MSL 7 7 0 RESTRICTED R 5306 A d OPEN GROUNDS FARM Located in the southern portion of Sub area 3A where crop dusting is conducted below 300 feet Military aircraft authorized to operate in Sub area 3A below 750 feet MSL shall avoid this area below 500 feet when advised that crop dusting is in progress WILDLIFE REFUGE OPEN GROUNDS FARM BELOW 500 52 E AIR TRAFFIC CO
177. ation with potential emergency use airfields is helpful to all parties involved This document provides information for airfield management about the Global Hawk and what to expect in the event of an emergency landing b This document is not a letter of agreement but rather serves to coordinate information between the airfield manager and the Global Hawk operators as a matter of courtesy Because the aircraft will only recover to this field in an emergency situation no official letter of agreement is required A 201 AIRCRAFT SPECIFICATIONS Northrop Grumman RQ 4A Global Hawk Empty 9 200 Ibs Approx Endurance 35 hrs Payload 2 000 Ibs Loiter Velocity 342 KTAS Take Off Gross 26 750 Ibs Length 44 ft Wing Span 116 20 132 Height 15 ft Range 12 500 nm A 202 COORDINATION PRIOR TO MISSION For any Global Hawk mission that will use your airfield as an alternate 12 RS will contact the airfield operations manager at least 24 hrs prior and inform him of the approximate timeframe when an this airfield will be a viable emergency airfield A 2 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q A 203 EMERGENCY LANDING Two possible emergencies force the Global Hawk to make an emergency landing Engine Failure and Dual Generator failure In both cases 45 minutes of battery power remains to execute an emergency landing Normally as the aircraft progresses along its planned route it constantly updat
178. be at least five 5 statute miles A 3 1 A 303 PATTERN STRUCTURE a The PPA pattern is depicted in figure A 3 2 b PPAs shall be made to the duty arrival runway c PPAs to all runways will be left traffic d Straight in PPAs are not authorized A 304 PROCEDURES a PPAs are VFR operations and shall not be used in conjunction with any other approach or to any other airport IFR separation will not be provided after HIGH KEY b PPAs will be authorized on a permitting basis only traffic c All type landing except Stop and Go are authorized d Before effecting communications transfer to the Tower Approach Control shall 1 Provide basic radar service in accordance with FAA JO 7110 65 Chapter 7 Section 6 2 Resolve all potential conflicts between the PPA aircraft and known or observed traffic 1 accomplish point outs with Arrival and Departure Control and 3 Provide tower with a Aircraft callsign and type b Aircraft position c Beacon code and altitude if non mode C equipped d Single frequency assigned e Intentions i e full stop touch and go low approach AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 f climbout if required and g verbal frequency transfer e Tower shall 1 Approve the PPA on a traffic permitting basis only 2 Resolve all potential conflicts between the aircraft and other traffic before authorizing the PPA maneuver and or d
179. be immediately ejected from the SUA In addition if a squadron displays a definite trend of disregarding the SUA boundary then that Squadron would not be permitted SUA access for 30 days and would be required to receive a course rules brief CRB from Range Targets or Airspace personnel The 30 day suspension would be extended until the CRB is received Figure 6 6 4 6 6 12 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q Section 7 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 6 700 GENERAL Guidelines for handling aircraft emergencies are found in the current edition of the AOM and FAA JO 7110 65 NATOPS emergency procedures for locally based aircraft are available in the control tower REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 Chapter 10 AOM paragraphs 5001 and 5006 6 701 INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS a Start assistance and notification as soon as enough information has been obtained upon which to act Information requirements will vary depending on the existing situation Minimum required information for in flight emergencies is 1 Aircraft identification and type 2 Nature of the emergency 3 Pilot s intentions b After initiating action obtain the following items or any other pertinent information from the pilot or aircraft operator as necessary 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Last known position Persons on board Fuel on board Ordnance on board Landing weight and speed A
180. cO P3722 1Q NKT APPROACHES TYPE APPROACH PLATE SPEED ALT HOLDING FIX DIRECTION LEG LENGTH TACAN Z RWY 32L 16 ERP3 265KIAS AOBFL180 KIYEK LEFT 10 NM HI TACAN Y RWY 32L 11 230KIAS AOB 140 SHAKL LEFT 10 NM TACAN RWY 32L 6 230KIAS AOB 40 TARHL LEFT 5 ILS RWY 23R 6 ERP3 230KIAS AOB 40 GRAVY LEFT 4 EWN MRH APPROACHES 3 175KIAS 80 KATFI LEFT 1 MINUTE 6 230KIAS 40 KATFI LEFT 1 MINUTE era 3 175KIAS 60 EWN VOR R 218 LEFT 1 MINUTE 7 230KIAS AOB 60 EWN VOR 218 LEFT 1 MINUTE 3 175KIAS AOB 60 EWN VOR R 046 RIGHT 1 MINUTE dabo ds 7 230KIAS AOB 60 EWN VOR R 046 RIGHT 1 MINUTE NDB RWY 14 6 230KIAS AOB 40 NDB 328 Bearing RIGHT 1 MINUTE NCA APPROACHES En 3 175KIAS 80 MARVL RIGHT 4 NM 7 230KIAS 60 MARVL RIGHT 4 RWY 5 3 175KIAS 80 WADEL RIGHT 4 Figure 6 4 6 Divergence Distance Minima Distance NM Divergence Below FL 180 FL 180 through FL 450 15 17 18 20 13 15 25 11 13 30 9 11 35 8 11 45 7 11 55 6 11 90 5 11 This table is for DME application and compensates for DME slant range error Figure 6 4 7 6 4 8 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 5 COORDINATION PROCEDURES 6 500 GENERAL Reserved 6 501 SCRATCH PAD Workload permitting the following information should be placed in the following order Separated by the splat or slash using the F16 functi
181. categorically termed according to the wind force Type Warning Wind Force Tropical Depression up to 33 knots Tropical Storm 34 63 knots Hurricane 64 knots or more B 103 PILOT WEATHER REPORTS a Pilot Weather Reports PIREPS Solicit PIREPS when requested or when one of the following conditions exist or are forecast for your area of jurisdiction 1 Ceiling at or below 5000 2 Visibility at or below 5 miles 3 Thunderstorms and related phenomena 4 Icing of light degree or greater 5 Turbulence of moderate degree or greater including clear air turbulence 6 Windshear 7 Volcanic ash clouds 8 Braking action advisories in effect b Pilots are urged to cooperate and promptly volunteer reports of these conditions and other AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 atmospheric data such as cloud bases tops layers flight visibility precipitation visibility restrictions such as haze smoke and dust wind at altitude and temperature aloft Record with the PIREP 1 Time 2 Aircraft position and altitude 3 Type aircraft 4 Temperature if icing reported Relay all operationally significant PIREPS to concerned aircraft in a timely manner to appropriate intrafacility positions to the FSS serving the area in which the report was obtained to other concerned terminal or enroute ATC facilities including non FAA facilities REFERENCE FAA Order 7110 65 Chap 2 Section 6 AIM B
182. ce 05 SPEED 2 4 Characters 05 SPD FORMAT SPD True Airspeed d d dd 495 MACH Speed Mddd 087 Classified Speed sc SE Field Separator Space 06 DEPARTURE FIX aa a a a EWN 2 12 Alphanumerics 06 FIX FORMAT FIX a a a NKT14010 Same requirement as Field 10 a a a 3034 08248 Field Separator 07 TIME 1 4 or 5 Characters 07 TIM FORMAT TIM Type of time E Type of time shall be omitted in the DM message P D Time dddd 1450 Field Separator Space H 1 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 08 ASSIGNED ALTITUDE d dd 70 2 20 Characters 08 ALT FORMAT ALT Altitudes expressed in hundreds of feet OTP OTP 75 OTP dd d d ddBdd d 130B150 When Altitude Block is entered the lower altitude ABV 600 must be entered first ABV dd d VER 45 VFR VFR dd d When using d dd Fix d dd the fix must be a 2 12 character fix designator Field Separator Space RTE 2 12 Characters The limit of field elements in Field 10 is 40 10 RTE FORMAT This field is acceptance checked by element The oblique stroke when used as a tailoring indicator is considered a route element 10 RTE TOO MANY ELEMENTS 10 RTE SHORT ROUTE Fixed sequence field i e Fix Rte Fix Rte Fix The first and last elements must be a fix 10 RTE NOT STORED Departure Fix aa a a a ILM The fix name must include at leas
183. cks when requested by an FWO b Assist the FWO for all training conducted in the Tower Branch c Ensure annual classes conducted as directed proficiency are d Monitor tower training and update Training Chief as necessary f Qualify personnel in paragraph 4 311 of this manual accordance with g Possess a current CTO rating at MCAS Cherry Point REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 8 1 2 1 2 404 RADAR CHIEF The Radar Chief responsibilities are established by NATOPS to include the following a Conduct Performance Skill Checks when requested by an FWO b Assist the FWO for all training conducted in the Radar Branch and as directed c Monitor radar training and update Training Chief as necessary 5 Feb 15 Change 1 e Qualify personnel in paragraph 4 311 of this manual accordance with f Maintain qualification and currency on all radar branch positions REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 1 2 1 2 405 FWO FACILITY WATCH OFFICER REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 1 3 4 2 406 RESERVED Reserved 2 407 FACILITY CREW CHIEF a The Crew Chief is designated by the ATCFO The Crew Chief exercises administrative control and is responsible for the welfare of the Marines on his her crew b Forward all trouble calls regarding the maintenance of the facility to the NCOIC All emergency maintenance calls requiring immediate attention may be called to Facil
184. contents will be tailored to meet the identified needs of the individual and may include laboratory scenarios classroom instruction and OJT Supervisors shall determine the most effective method 4 202 REQUALIFICATION Personnel who fail to meet currency requirements and those restricted from working an operational position shall be requalified prior to the resumption of operational duties addition a Position Evaluation shall be used to document requalification see Appendix G To be requalified a person must demonstrate under direct supervision the ability to satisfactorily perform relevant operational duties during normal workload conditions Requalification is required under two circumstances a Performance related This circumstance results from unsatisfactory performance observed by the supervisor or discovered as the result of reviewing facility records data and or audio recordings 4 2 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 1 If requalification is unsuccessful the ATCFO shall take action in accordance with this manual 2 Training and requalification due to disqualification on an operational position shall be recorded as remedial training in the employee s training jacket and retained for one year b Non performance related This circumstance involves loss of currency as a result of nonperformance related absence e g medical detail temporary duty assignment collateral duty
185. craft Loading Area CBA Collective Bargaining Agreement Computer Based Instruction Crew Chief gar Carrier Controlled Approach CDSA Class D Surface Area CEB Controller Evaluation Board CFR Crash Fire and Rescue CIC Controller In Charge CMC Commandant of the Marine Corps CMS Communication Material Security CNO Chief of Naval Operations CPR Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation 1 2 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 5 Feb 15 Change 1 CTC Control Tower Chief CTO Control Tower Operator DAIR Direct Altitude Identity Readout DASI Digital Altimeter Setting Indicator DOD Department of Defense DV Distinguished Visitor EET Expected Exit Time EFC Expect Further Clearance EOD Explosive Ordnance Disposal ERT Expected Recovery Time FAA Federal Aviation Administration FC Final Control FCLP Field Carrier Landing Practice FD Tower Flight Data FDIO Flight Data Input Output FLIP Flight Information Publication FMH Federal Meteorological Handbook FOB Fuel On Board FOD Foreign Object Damage FWO Facility Watch Officer GA General Aviation GC Ground Control GCA Ground Controlled Approach H amp HS Headquarters a
186. critical to flying safety Weather conditions that involve limited visibility turbulence or icing may affect your control procedures as well as aircraft operations You will base many operational decisions on the current and forecasted weather situations The following information is a brief explanation of some of the weather elements that you may encounter while working as an air traffic controller For a detailed explanation you may want to review the Federal Meteorological Handbook FMH 18 NAVAIR 50 18 1 FMH 1 AIM and ASO P3140 2 Destructive Weather Procedures B 101 OBSERVATIONS Since July 1996 weather observations have been disseminated in an international format The types of reports are METAR for routine reports and SPECI for special reports B 102 WEATHER DEFINITIONS a Sky condition is a description of the appearance of the sky and may be evaluated either automatically by instrument ceilometer or manually mentally integrating the view of the sky from horizon to horizon b Obscuration There are times when the sky may be obscured by surface based phenomena other than clouds such as fog FG haze HZ or smoke Whenever obscurations occur the sequence will show a cloud layer whose height is less below 50 feet Visibility A measure of the opacity of the atmosphere and is expressed in terms of the horizontal distance at which a person should be able to see and identify specified objects It may
187. ctive Weather 1 AirStaO P11135 1 Aircraft Search Rescue Crash and Salvage 1 1 1 2 7 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q PUBLICATION NAME DESCRIPTION TRNG RDR TWR A1 AV8BB NFM 000 AV 8B Harrier 01 85ADC 1 EA 6B Prowler is A1 H46AE NFM 000 CH 46E Sea Knight A1 H46AE NFM 000 HH 46R SAR Supplement d 01 1 C 9B Skytrain II 01 C35CAA 1 UC 35C Citation 01 75GAJ 1 KC 130J Hercules m a 01 75GAH 1 KC 130T Hercules ii 01 110HCE 1 UH 1N Huey 01 110 1 UH 1Y Huey 01 1 1 AH 1W Cobra 1 5 000 5 Super Stallion A1 RQ2BA NFM 000 2 Pioneer UAV x 1 000 RQ 7 Shadow UAS 1 22 000 a i MV 22B Osprey Electronic Copy on Branch Computers 2 7 5 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 2 7 6 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 8 CIVIL AIRCRAFT REQUIREMENTS 2 800 CIVIL USE LANDING PERMIT a Civil aircraft shall not be authorized practice approaches touch and go or full stops unless they hold a landing permit and have been issued a PPR The practice approaches will not interfere with military requirements nor will they compromise the security of military operations the f
188. cumstances the ATCFO may establish or change ATC procedures without convening the PEB b In addition to managing this facility s Procedure Evaluation Program the PEB will be convened to consider the following subjects 1 Formal changes to this order 2 Recommended changes to the AOM REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 par 3 3 2 1 CUSTOMER PREPARES FORM 1 PARENT FWO RETURN FORM TO CUSTOMER YES REGISTER CREWS WITH TRAINING gt CONSIDERATION DAY 0 DAY 1 21 TRAINING PREPARES PEBCONVENED RECOMMENDATION DAY 22 60 DRAFT FACILITY DIRECTIVE NOTIFY CUSTOMER Figure 1 4 5 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 1 427 PROCEDURE EVALUATION 1 428 DISPENSARY PERMIT PROGRAM PEP a Civilian personnel requesting to use a Purpose The PEP has been established to Occupational Health services located in building assist the ATCFO in enhancing expediting and 3907 must present a Dispensary Permit See Figure researching Facility Recommendations The 1 4 6 program objective is to identify facility and system improvements that increase the quality of air traffic b Building 3907 is across from the main service The program ensures that ATC personnel entrance to NADEP Telephone number x5241 or that are responsible for affecting procedural changes x3
189. d FIG 6 3 10 TB changed to TK FIG 6 3 11 TB changed to TK FIG 6 3 12 TB changed to TK 6 334 SINGLE FREQUENCY APPROACH PROCEDURES Procedures for assigning frequencies for single piloted turbojet aircraft added FacDir 022 14 FIG 6 4 2 KTS changed to KIAS FIG 6 4 3 Distances added for new airspace FIG 6 4 4 added FIG 6 4 5 KTS changed to KIAS FIG 6 4 6 BENGY replaced with KIYEK KTS changed to KIAS 6 501 SCRATCH PAD Paragraph added for NATOPS compliance FacDir 001 14 6 502 MSAW CA Paragraph added for NATOPS compliance FacDir 015 14 6 503 STARS DATA ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Paragraph added for NATOPS compliance FacDir 015 14 6 504 STARS TDW QUICK LOOK FUNCTIONS Paragraph added for NATOPS compliance FacDir 015 14 6 505 MULTI SENSOR RADAR Paragraph added for NATOPS compliance FacDir 015 14 6 506 STARS OPERATIONAL MODE TRANSITION PROCEDURES Paragraph added for NATOPS compliance FacDir 015 14 6 507 STARS VIDEO MAPPING Paragraph added for NATOPS compliance FacDir 015 14 6 508 SENSOR MODE CHECKLIST Paragraph added for NATOPS compliance FacDir 015 14 6 604 NEUSE ATCAA Altitudes available updated 6 605 HATTERAS B ATCAA New paragraph and figure added to describe ATCAA 6 607 RELEASE OF AIR 8 Deleted FIG 6 6 3 Graphic for added 6 609 LOG ENTRIES FOR SUA ATCAA added 6 613 ATCAA PROCEDURES New paragra
190. ded Point Alpha moved to the 140 radial BENGY changed to KIYEK Airspace Expansion 2 605 INTERFACILITY LANDLINES Six landlines added for airspace expansion 2 608 LOCAL FREQUENCIES MRH and MQI frequencies added Airspace expansion 2 609 ADJACENT FACILITY FREQUENCIES ZDC NTU ORF and ECG added 2 707 PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE Typo corrected CHAPTER THREE 3 101 ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD Figures updated with position identifiers 3 201 BOMB THREATS Form updated CHAPTER FOUR 4 104 SATCS RESPONSIBILITIES GS 13 replaced with SATCS FacDir 014 14 4 203 CURRENCY REQUIREMENTS Realigned per NATOPS requirements FacDir 014 14 4 204 POSITION EVALUATIONS GS 13 replaced with SATCS FacDir 014 14 4 205 TOWER VISIBILITY OBSERVERS Reworded to include testing requirement 4 302 FACILITY TRAINING REQUIREMENTS Abbreviations corrected 4 305 TRAINING TEAMS GS 13 changed to SATCS FacDir 014 14 FIG 4 3 1 OJT TIME LIMITS Pre OJT Sim removed RFC limits now by approaches FacDir 018 14 FIG 4 3 2 TRAINING PLAN Form updated 4 308 PERFORMANCE SKILL CHECK GS 13 changed to SATCS FacDir 014 14 4 309 PERFORMANCE SKILL CHECK GS 13 changed to SATCS FacDir 014 14 4 311 QUALIFICATION SKILL CHECK Procedures updated FacDir 013 14 4 312 EXAMINERS GS 13 changed to SATCS FacDir 014 14 4 313 ADDITIONAL OJT Replac
191. departure 17 Flight Planning initials 18 Actual time of arrival REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 3 3 5 5 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 5 502 CONTROL SYMBOLOGY Use authorized control and clearance symbols or abbreviations for recording clearances reports and instructions Control status of aircraft must always be current You may use a Plain language markings when it will aid in understanding information b Locally approved identifiers Use these only within your facility and not on FDIO or interphone circuits See Figure 5 5 2 REFERENCE ATCFM Chapter 2 Section 6 c Plain sheets of paper to record information when flight progress strips are not used REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 3 9 ATCFacO P3722 1Q LOCAL SQUADRON TWO LETTER CODES FOR STRIPMARKING CALL SIGN ID LOBO LB PEDRO PE MARS MA STONE ST SPADE SP LUSTY LU CAMEL DRIVER DR BANSHEE BN JESTER JS DOG DG HOOK HK OTIS OT NIGHTOWL NO SYMBOLS MEANING 2 CIRCLE RWY 23 SYMBOLS MEANING L Low Approach Full Stop Option Touch and Go Tower Downwind ZIN A O m North Approach N O gt New River RADAR VACAPES Arrival East Approach West Approach Bogue Field gt lt Washington Center 5 5 3 Figure 5 5 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY M
192. detailed description a NKT RWY 32L TACAN RWY 14L TACAN RWY 5R HI TACAN RWY 14L HI TACAN 7 RWY 32L HI TACAN Y RWY 32L ILS or LOC DME RWY 23R RNAV GPS RWY 23R RNAV GPS RWY 5R RNAV GPS RWY 32L COPTER TACAN RWY 23R b EWN ILS or LOC RWY 4 VOR RWY 4 VOR RWY 22 RNAV GPS RWY 4 RNAV GPS RWY 22 c MRH NDB RWY 14 NDB RWY 21 RNAV GPS RWY 14 RNAV GPS RWY 3 RNAV GPS RWY 8 RNAV GPS RWY 21 RNAV GPS RWY 26 RNAV GPS RWY 32 d NJM TACAN RWY 23 e NCA TACAN RWY 5 TACAN RWY 19 RNAV GPS RWY 1 RNAV GPS RWY 19 TACAN RWY 23 ATCFacO P3722 1Q ILS or LOC DME RWY 1 TACAN RWY 1 RNAV GPS RWY 5 RNAV GPS RWY 23 When is holding at BADAD IAF for the RNAV GPS RWY 1 approach coordination is required with both ILM and NVF NCA does not have communication ability with NVF so they will point out the aircraft to AW which shall then point out the holding aircraft to NVF and relay back to NCA whether the point out is approved or not f W95 Ocracoke RNAV GPS RWY 6 RNAV GPS RWY 24 g HSE Billy Mitchell RNAV GPS RWY 7 RNAV GSP RWY 25 h 95N Onslow Hospital COPTER RNAV GPS 272 COPTER RNAV GPS 092 DEP REFERENCE FLIP Low Altitude United States Vol 17 6 3 4 5Feb 15 Change 1 FLIP High Altitude United States Southeast USGFIP Southeast Vol 2 of 4 6 306 RADAR APPROACH MINIMUMS Radar approach weather minimums and minimum descent altitudes
193. ding a review of all training documentation and input from all training team members 5 Provide recommendations on the trainee s readiness for qualification 6 Identify areas requiring improved performance and a Recommend the types of skill enhancement training to be provided and or b Recommend more OJT hours 7 Provide information during the training review process as requested AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q c The trainee s FWO supervisor shall act as the training team leader and shall retain the responsibility to direct the trainee s training by modifying the Training Plan after considering the recommendations of the training team The supervisor shall facilitate training team functions and seek support of facility management and staff personnel when necessary d The two OJTIs should be responsible for providing the majority of the trainee s OJT The primary OJTI will usually train the trainee The secondary OJTI will provide training when the primary OJTI is not available When neither the primary nor the secondary OJTI is available any OJTI may provide training e OJT performance feedback shall be provided to the trainee as soon as possible after each OJT session This discussion should include an overview of the session an identification of the trainee s strengths and weaknesses and specific recommendations to improve performance Position Init
194. e UTC time and location of NMAC Item 2 Fix or facility nearest NMAC Item 3 NMAC location in respect to the fix or facility in item 2 Item 4E through 4H Information on reporting aircraft Item SE through 5H Information on other aircraft Item 7 Type of flight rules during NMAC Item 10 Aircraft altitude during NMAC Item 16 Closest separation during NMAC Item 21 Brief description of NMAC and comments c Make every effort to locate and identify the other aircraft If identity of the other aircraft is determined obtain the same data as from the reporting flight crew If the traffic load does not permit this receive information over an alternate frequency Otherwise attempt to have the pilot call the facility on a recorded phone line 466 5960 d Notify the ATCFO as soon as a report is received During other than normal working hours attempt to notify the ATCFO Make a Facility Log entry of the time the NMAC was received Forward FAA Form 8020 21 to the ATC office with the daily paperwork 2 5 3 ATCFacO P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 2 5 4 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Section 6 LOCAL INFORMATION 2 600 LOCAL BASED SQUADRONS ATCFacO P3722 1Q SQU
195. e situation prior to departing R 5306D 2 Maintain VFR at or above 2000 feet and depart to the south 3 Once over water turn Northeast parallel coastline and remain within 3NM of the coastline 4 Contact Cherry Point approach control on frequency 268 7 upon exiting R 5306D stating that you have Hot Guns and request a visual approach to Runway 23R 5 Turn North once abeam Cherry Point unless otherwise directed by Cherry Point Approach Control and report Cherry Point in sight b Cherry Point ATC shall 1 Allow aircraft to proceed on its own navigation for the straight in unless traffic or airport conditions dictate otherwise 2 Direct aircraft to taxiway Echo ensuring Hot Guns are pointing in the direction of the ASR 11 site See Figure A 4 1 3 Notify the ODO 4 Secure the Southeast pad once AC 130 enters Echo taxiway ODO shall 1 Notify EOD A 4 1 2 Notify Ground Support 3 Secure perimeter road in vicinity of arm dearm area REFERENCE LOA between MCAS Cherry Point and 16 SOS DO AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q DEARMING HEADI 210 225 CLEAR AREA 120 135 Figure A 4 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Appendix WEATHER Section 1 GENERAL B 100 GENERAL Accurate knowledge of developing weather conditions within the immediate vicinity and within 50 miles of the airport is
196. e 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 5 TOWER STRIP MARKING PROCEDURES 5 500 GENERAL Use flight progress strips to post current data on air traffic and clearances required for control and other air traffic control services To prevent misinterpretation when data is hand printed use standard hand printed characters REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 3 1 5 501 TERMINAL DATA ENTRIES Information recorded on the flight progress strips FAA Form 7230 7 2 shall be entered in the correspondingly numbered spaces See Figure 5 5 1 8 Estimated time of arrival 8A Not used 9 IFR or SVFR with control symbology 9A Remarks Type Approach 10 Not used 11 Not used 12 Not used 13 Not used 14 Not used a IFR SVFR Arrivals 1 Aircraft identification 2 Revision number FDIO 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or position that requested a strip be printed 2 NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 4 Computer identification number if required 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Previous fix FDIO 7 Coordination fix 5 5 1 Figure 5 5 1 15 Not used 16 Not used 17 Flight Planning initials 18 Actual time of arrival b IFR SVFR Departures 1 Aircraft identification 2 Revision number FDIO 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or position that requested a strip be printed 3 NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted f
197. e base of the designated airspace Figure 6 3 5 NOTE The intent of these procedures is to give the controllers a visual cue for each of the status boards Data written in a particular area indicates to the controllers that there is pertinent real time information The lack of data in a particular area indicates nothing pertinent to broadcast or that a particular special use airspace is inactive NJM CLSD wer zw mean ARR 32L VFR NORMAL OPS 4 TFRRWY 231FR RWY 5 VFR DEP 32R PA VIS gt 4 gt 4 ILS gt 4 4 PA CORE 17999 R5306 17999 SELFEX R5306 0 4200 85314 1500 PHELPS R5302 R5306 E 0 R5303 1200 PAM B DARE DARE ABC HAT EAST R5313 0 ACTV ACTV ACTV 17999 17999 R5304 0 5 O ZOLMN NKT 0 HAT WEST 0 NEUSE A 0 NEUSE B 0 BURNER 180B230 AIR 15B 0 Figure 6 3 5 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q ARR 32L VFR NORMAL OPS DEP 32R PA TWR VIS gt 4 BOX AVAILABLE CHOICES NKT NKT NKT CLSD ARR 32L All Runways DEP 32R All Runways VFR NORMAL OPS VFR NO OA S VFR IFR REC ONLY VFR NORMAL OPS IFR BOX AVAILABLE CHOICES PA PA SA VA CORE Enter Altitude or 0 TWR VIS gt 4 SELECT VISIBILITY R5306 A Enter Altitude or O R5306 D Enter Altitude or 0 R5306 Enter Altitude or
198. e field a Remove tower logs flight strips library maps and other matter small equipment that may become water damaged b Ensure tower makes an ATIS concerning field closure due to destructive weather c Notify the ODO that tower personnel are evacuating and to NOTAM the field closed due to destructive weather d Monitor all tower frequencies at the supervisor s console in the IFR room e Release control of the FPN 63 to ATCM Advise the ODO to NOTAM outage NOTE ATCM SOP requires control of the FPN 63 when the wind is SUSTAINED at 20 knots 2 Secure non essential watch personnel B 1 5 ATCFacO P3722 1Q e When Hurricane force winds 64 knots or greater are forecast to be within 6 hours of NKT the on duty FWO shall 1 Coordinate with ATCM to free wheel the ASR 11 antenna 2 Release the airspace to ZDC Notify all affected agencies 3 Secure essential personnel to quarters to remain on standby for the duration of the watch f When ALL CLEAR is announced 1 The scheduled on duty crew shall report to work immediately to open the tower and IFR room 2 FWOs report all damage to the ATCFO ODO and ATCMO 3 FWOs report status of personnel to the ATCFO g Personnel having questions on current conditions or field status should contact the ODO at 466 2233 or the Severe Weather Information Line at 466 3093 REFERENCE ATCFM Chapter 8 ASO P3140 2J AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILIT
199. e requirements necessary to conduct the facility training program are submitted to the chain of command g Individuals entering qualification training receive adequate facility orientation and are thoroughly briefed on this Manual Civilian Personnel Manual and other associated directives prior to entering training h OJT is accomplished in accordance with this Manual i Training reports are properly completed and maintained 4 1 1 annual schedule of required proficiency training is maintained and that proficiency training is accomplished k Facility OJT time limits and OJF hours are established maintained and updated 1 OJTIs and supervisory ATCSs meet the qualification criteria in this order m OJTIs are recommended and designated in accordance with this Manual n Training teams receive support of the training support specialist and branch chiefs o The final determination is made regarding the suspension of OJT after considering training team recommendations p Controller Evaluation Boards are initiated 4 102 TRAINING AND STANDARDIZATION OFFICER TSO RESPONSIBILITIES Reserved REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 1 3 3 4 103 TRAINING CHIEF RESPONSIBILITIES The Training Chief shall a Administer the facility training program b Provide oversight for the Tower Chief and Radar Chief c Ensure that the facility training program is planned conducted assessed and
200. ector airspace is depicted in Figure 6 1 5 excluding airspace when open d Arrival Control AR Within 20nm of NKT surface to 3 000 excluding Approach West airspace departure corridor in use R 5306C when active R 5306A and the NKT CDSA See Figure 6 1 6 NOTE R 5306A Area 1 and R 5306C Area 4 are assigned to AR Prior to approving and activating these areas APE and or APN must coordinate 6 102 ADJACENT AIRSPACE a New River Radar Surface to and including 3000 feet See Figure 6 1 7 D 6 Washington Center altitudes not delegated to the agencies above adjacent 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Figure 6 1 1 6 1 2 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q or A B o S em ARO ZO gt S 3685 v E me if 65 AS O Soth am x 2 7 4 2 UD KINSTO o Edward A Creo 4 Dm 109 6 Ch 33 150 iz m A gt r ie No 54 AY s Z y A 2 x 649 w ss O y A NN d N e 4 2 b Yr T 20 hy Figure 6 1 2 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q RESTRICTED R 5306A Figure 6 1 3 6 1 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 372210 SUB AREA3B 777 gt BELOW750MSL gt C gt AN v SUB AREA3A BELOW 750 MSL i RSS CONTACT CHE
201. ectronic and is available on all computers Certain publications are necessary to be available in hard copy and are listed as such in this section and within the electronic library 2 701 TRAINING BRANCH LIBRARY Located within the Tower Chief Radar Chief office spaces 2 702 TOWER BRANCH LIBRARY Located within the tower cab to the right of Ground Control 2 703 RADAR BRANCH LIBRARY Located within the radar room behind the supervisor console 2 704 SIMULATOR LIBRARY Reserved 2 705 EXERCISE BINDERS Reserved 2 706 PUBLICATIONS CONTROL The Training Chief shall upon receipt of official publications review data pertaining to the facility to ensure accuracy and completeness a The Training Chief is responsible for ensuring the effectiveness and currency of the ATCF directives and technical libraries REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 1 2 2 b Publications in the three facility branches are not intended for check out purposes They are maintained for ready access to the operating positions 2 7 1 and branch managers An electronic library can be found on all facility computers 2 707 PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE The following tables describe the publications available within the facility for each library A number indicates the quantity of hard copies that should be maintained An asterisk indicates the publication is available on the electronic library for that branch REFERENCE FAA JO Order 7210
202. ed and or completed During Skill Checks This block shall be used to a Document performance progress The comments may include exemplary noteworthy or unusual events b Describe any observed performance deficiencies When a checkmark is placed in the Needs Improvement or Unsatisfactory column references shall be made to specific procedures LOAs orders directives etc in Block 12A During Classroom Training Simply state the type of class lesson number or test given Block 11A REFERENCES Used by the OJTVsupervisor and or lab instructor to list references to specific procedures LOAs or directives that should be reviewed by the trainee so that the performance problem may be corrected The OJTI supervisor and or lab instructor shall include paragraph numbers or other specific references in this block G 1 2 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q Block 12 RECOMMENDATION This block shall be used by the supervisor who conducted the skill check The supervisor shall recommend one of the following a b e IN skill check Qualification when appropriate Continuation of OJT Skill enhancement training Suspension of OJT Block 13 EMPLOYEE S COMMENTS This block may be used by the trainee for making comments pertaining to the training period or the skill check or for making general comments regarding training The trainee shall sign and date this block A signatu
203. ed for tornadoes lines of thunderstorms embedded thunderstorms of any intensity level areas of thunderstorm greater than or equal to thunderstorm intensity level 4 with an area coverage of 40 or more and hail 3 4 or greater NOTE Since thunderstorms are the reason for issuing the WST severe or greater turbulence severe icing and low level wind shear gust fronts down bursts microbursts etc are implied and will not be specified in the advisory e Hazardous Inflight Weather Advisory Service Continuous recorded hazardous in flight weather forecasts broadcasted to airborne pilots over selected VOR outlets defined as a HIWAS Broadcast Area f Hazardous Weather Information Summary of significant meteorological information SIGMET WS corrective significant meteorological information Convective SIGMET WST urgent pilot weather reports urgent PIREP UUA CWA AIRMET WA and any other weather such as isolated thunderstorms that are rapidly developing and increasing in intensity or low ceiling and visibilities that are becoming widespread which is considered significant and are not included in a current hazardous weather advisory g Severe Weather Avoidance Plan A Severe Weather Avoidance Plan SWAP is an approved plan to minimize the effect of severe weather on traffic flows in impacted terminal and or ARTCC areas SWAP is normally implemented to provide the least disruption to the ATC system when flight through port
204. ed holding NOTE 15 Time commenced approach Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 16 Ti for AT A WO RS Times for ATA M 3 4 Computer identification number required 17 Type approach 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 18 Frequency 6 Previous fix FDIO b Departures 7 Coordination fix 1 Aircraft identification 8 Estimated time of arrival at the 2 Revision number FDIO coordination fix destination airport point outs AIA 6 4 1 15 Aug 15 Change 2 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or position that requested a strip be printed 3 NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 4 Computer identification number required 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Proposed departure time 7 Requested altitude 8 Departure airport point outs 8A Not used 9 Computer generated Route destination and remarks Manually enter altitude altitude restrictions in the order flown if appropriate 9 Hand prepared Clearance limit route altitude altitude restrictions in the order flown if appropriate 9A Headings speed adjustments remarks 10 Clearance delivered B 11 Not used 12 Not used 13 This will be a split block when aircraft are held for release HFR will be written in the left upper portion When aircraft is released a check mark will be placed in the lower right portion HFR EXAMPLE 4 14 ZDC release
205. ed with NATOPS standard FacDir 003 14 4 316 GCA IFR TRAINING GS 13 changed to SATCS FacDir 014 14 4 317 DESIGNATIONS FWO designation procedures FacDir 014 14 4 504 MCAS CHERRY POINT SUPPLEMENTS ACPMs added 4 704 SIMULATOR POSITION LOGS Procedures moved to Appendix CHAPTER FIVE FIG 5 1 1 Airfield layout upgraded FIG 5 1 3 Distances updated 5 200 CONTROL TOWER TEAM POSITIONS ASL changed to CCL 5 203 ASSOCIATE LOCAL CONTROL ASL changed to CCL 5 302 VTL PAD OPERATIONS ASL and ASA changed to CCL and RAA 5 303 COMBAT AIRCRAFT LOADING AREA AirOps Calendar replaced with Airfield Operations 5 404 STANDARD CLIMB OUT Exception removed 5 405 LOCAL IFR CLEARANCES BENGY changed to KIYEK 5 407 BENGY changed to KIYEK 5 415 VISCOM COORDINATION ASL changed to CCL 5 502 CONTROL SYMBOLOGY Hammerhead and Sabre removed 5 702 EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION ASL changed to CCL CHAPTER SIX 6 100 GENERAL Manteo Plymouth and Warren added 6 102 ADJACENT AIRSPACE List updated for new airspace 6 103 MINIMUM VECTORING ALTITUDE CHART Description of figures added FIG 6 1 1 New FIG 6 1 2 Upgraded FIG 6 1 3 New FIG 6 1 5 New FIG 6 1 6 New FIG 6 1 7 Upgraded FIG 6 1 8 New FIG 6 1 9 MVAC updated FIG 6 1 10 updated 6 104 FIXES AIR
206. efing b The operational brief will follow the briefing checklist see Figure 2 3 8 The checklist will be turned in with the IFR room paperwork on the following day There will be one checklist from the day shift and one checklist from the eve shift c Crew Chiefs will schedule their military briefing prior to the operational briefing The military briefing will be completed in a timely manner so that the operational brief will commence at 10 minutes of the hour At the discretion of the FWO and or Crew Chief CBA employees may attend the military briefing 1 419 LEAVE AND LIBERTY The following policy is established for Marines civilian leave policy has been established by the CBA a Leave Annual Leave requests will be submitted via Marine On Line MOL to the ATCF NCOIC via the normal chain of command Requests must be submitted at least 3 working days in advance of the leave period b Emergency Leave During normal working hours the ATCF NCOIC will handle Emergency Leave Otherwise the senior SNCO shall coordinate with the H amp HS SDO c Liberty Standard liberty boundaries as defined by ABO 1050 1 shall be followed 1 4 5 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 1 Time off which is authorized by the Crew Chief is considered regular liberty 2 Facility personnel shall not be authorized more than two consecutive calendar days off without approval of the ATCFO or higher authority
207. el runways are not authorized REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3 5 1 5 415 VISCOM COORDINATION a The AR FC wil use the VISCOM to automatically coordinate with the Tower Branch The 10 mile button will be used when the radar 5Feb 15 Change 1 approach is being conducted to other than the active runway The LC CCL will acknowledge the VISCOM coordination from the Radar Branch When the 3 mile coordination is accomplished LC CCL will acknowledge with a response of clear wave off or continue If a continue is directed AR FC shall initiate a wave off at one mile if the LC CCL has not responded by that time b When VISCOM is out of service use the following format for interphone communications 1 Both the caller and receiver identify their position in a manner that insures they will not be confused with another position 2 Caller states the information that would normally be passed through the VISCOM 3 The receiver states the response to the caller s message EXAMPLE 1 Caller Eighteen One Receiver Eighteen Caller Six miles F 18 low approach Receiver Check three EXAMPLE 2 Caller Eighteen One Receiver Eighteen Caller Three miles Receiver Cleared low approach EXAMPLE 3 Caller One Eighteen Receiver One Caller Wave off REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 6 311 ATCFM paragraph 6 316 5 416 FDIO TEST FLIGHT PLANS When
208. emain on until the aircraft has completed taxi b Taxiway lights from the aircraft to the runway of departure shall be on at the appropriate setting before the aircraft begins taxi for departure and remain on until the aircraft has departed the airport c Asrequested by the pilot d As deemed necessary if not contrary to pilot requests CHERRY POINT INFORMATION Z WIND VFR IFR VISIBILITY SKY CONDITIONS o F C TEMP DEWPOINT LANDING RUNWAY DEPARTING RUNWAY ALTIMETER APPROACH IN USE NOTAMS WX WARNINGS PIREPS HIWAS REMARKS IFR RECOVERIES ONLY BASH NO OVERHEAD BAA ADVISE ON INITIAL CONTACT YOU HAVE 5 4 7 Figure 5 4 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 e Taxiway light setting will be in accordance with the current edition of FAA Order 7110 65 with the exception of all airfield taxiway lights that are flush Flush taxiway lights shall be operated at a minimum on step 3 unless required to be at a higher setting REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3 4 17 5 424 GCA DEPARTURES When Tower requests departure release LC shall request a SFA from APE for IFR practice approach departures NOTE The Tower override capability in this situation only exists through use of the Guard frequencies 5 425 BACK TAXI FOR DEPARTURE Airfield Operations has authorized aircraft to back taxi to
209. en be scheduled for an appointment with the Flight Surgeon in the afternoon Controllers will not be required to report back to the ATCF during that period between testing and scheduled appointment but will report back to work upon completion of their physical time permitting REFERENCE CFR Part 67 NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 3 1 3 and 3 3 4 3 1 422 CLIMATE CONTROL PROCEDURES The FWO is responsible for ensuring the temperature in the IFR room remains between 72 and 76 degrees Fahrenheit 1 423 FOOD AND DRINK IN THE FACILITY Personnel are prohibited from having food or drink in close proximity to electric or electronic equipment Close proximity is defined as The placement of food or drink containers upon the position console where it could fall or spill upon the electrical equipment 1 424 MEDICAL CLEARANCE NOTICE Upon receipt of a clearance notice NAVMED 6410 2 controllers shall deliver the original to the training office REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 3 1 3 1 425 CELL PHONE USAGE REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 4 6 7 1 426 PROCEDURE EVALUATION BOARD PEB a A PEB will be convened on an as needed basis for the purpose of recommending to the ATCFO action to be taken regarding ATC procedures The ATCFO will decide the 1 4 6 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q composition of the board and convening date through the issuance of a Facility Memo In certain cir
210. en pushed by the sending controller activates an aural alarm at the receiving controller s position and continues to flash until the receiving controller pushes the same button acknowledging receipt of the information Upon completion of an approach each controller must push the reset button to prepare the panels for the next approach d Do not clear VISCOM until over landing threshold for any approach except for contact approach This will allow tower to waveoff the aircraft at any time For a contact approach once the aircraft is over to tower frequency and it is confirmed by monitoring LC position contact approach VISCOM may be cleared REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 6 316 and 5 415 6 312 SPEAKER LANDLINE POSITION ASSIGNMENT The FWO will notify ATCM when the landline speaker s needs to be assigned to a certain position other than the one previously assigned 6 313 NEW BERN WAVEOFFS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q When waveoff issued on final by New Bern Tower or Cherry Point Approach PHRASEOLOGY and maintain 2000 fly runway heading acknowledge 6 314 SIMULATED FLAME OUT PPA Simulated flame out and practice precautionary approaches require Letters of Agreement with the specific unit requesting these maneuvers No SFOs are currently authorized at Cherry Point PPAs are authorized for E 2 aircraft through a Letter of Agreement with VAW120 REFERENCE VAWI20 and MCAS Cherry Poin
211. ents shall be stated in COMMENTS 2 NEEDS IMPROVEMENT A N T in this column indicates that the trainee s observed performance 1s acceptable at this stage of training but must improve in order to meet qualification requirements Specific comments along with suggestions or requirements for improvement shall be stated in COMMENTS 3 UNSATISFACTORY A U in this column indicates that the trainee s observed performance is unsatisfactory at this stage of training Specific comments suggestions and recommendations for correcting each unsatisfactory job subtask must be stated in COMMENTS b Ifajob subtask is not applicable to a position being observed it shall be recorded as N A ROUTING Route all evaluations through the four individuals listed prior to forwarding to the Training Support Specialist REF Enter the subtask that the comment is referring to Example When commenting on Good control judgment applied enter B2 OJTI COMMENTS DAY _ This block is used by the OJT Instructor to document an observation when a Needs Improvement or Unsatisfactory mark is made on the front of the form The comments a May be specific or general b May include exemplary noteworthy or unusual events c Shall describe any observed performance deficiencies OJTI INITIALS SIGNATURE The OJT Instructor that is responsible for writing the daily comments must enter his her operating initials and sign the evaluation 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAF
212. er simulator is a virtual traffic simulator that is located separate from the control tower It effectively simulates the LC and GC positions but is limited in the simulation of FD b A secondary tower simulator in the form of a miniature airfield can be used in the classroom for LC and GC positions 4 704 SIMULATOR POSITION LOGS Procedures for completing position for simulation are included in Appendix logs 4 7 1 4 705 SIMULATOR TRAINING REQUIREMENTS Marine Corps directives have mandated that simulation represent 20 of each operating position training The purpose of this requirement is to enhance each trainee s exposure to diverse traffic volume and complexity and to increase the opportunity of success for each trainee Some simulation may be required prior to the trainee A beginning OJT REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 2 4 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 4 7 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Chapter 5 CONTROL TOWER OPERATIONS Section 1 GENERAL 5 100 GENERAL a MCAS Cherry Point Figure 5 1 1 is located 34054 2 N 76052 9 W and is designated a Class D Surface Area which is a 5 nautical mile radius from the geographical center of the airport from the surface up to and including 2500 feet above the elevation of the airport Numerous water towers are not lighted in the Southwest through Northwest
213. er team during normal operations There are two ATIS boards located in the tower that shall be maintained by FD b Between the hours of midnight and 0500 local if there are no local flights scheduled the following message may be placed on the ATIS For current Cherry Point weather and airport conditions contact Cherry Point Tower on 340 2 121 3 or Cherry Point Approach Control on 268 7 124 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 c Resume normal ATIS broadcasts at 0500 d When the tower is closed for operations the ATIS will continue to broadcast with the following statement Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point Tower is closed for updated weather and information contact Cherry Point Approach on 268 7 124 1 Cherry Point will reopen on date at time NOTE Do not turn the ATIS off unless it is out of service and so stated in the daily log 5 422 OPERATIONS ALONG AN ACTIVE RUNWAY Authorization for aircraft vehicles to taxi proceed on or along an active runway for purposes other than crossing shall be provided via direct communications on the appropriate ground control or local control frequency ATCFacO P3722 1Q REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3 1 3 d 5 423 TAXIWAY LIGHTS Operate taxiway lights as follows a Taxiway lights from the landing runway to the aircraft s destination on the airport shall be on at the appropriate setting before an arriving aircraft enters the CDSA and r
214. erator as necessary a Last known position b Persons on board c Fuel on board d Ordnance on board e Landing weight and speed f Aircraft altitude g Pilot reported weather h Pilot capability for IFR flight i Heading since last known position j Airspeed 5 7 1 k Navigation equipment capability 1 NAVAID signals received Visible landmarks n Aircraft color o Point of departure and destination p Emergency equipment on board NOTE Requirements listed above in bold type are those that are part of the Control Tower Crash Emergency Call Sheet See Figure 2 3 2 REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 10 2 1 5 702 EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION When an aircraft accident occurs or when it is determined an emergency exists the LC CCL will activate the crash PA system and FD will be responsible for activating the appropriate crash net The TS will notify the FWO of all emergencies initiated by the tower as soon as he she feels it will not interfere with duty requirements PA Notification Crash Crash Crash notifies agencies of actual on or off station crash Crash Crew Dispatch Used when CFR resources are immediately required to respond to an emergency on the airfield SAR aircraft will be manned and ready for launch but will hold until receiving further instructions from the tower ODO or CFR officer This is normally used when the aircraft is on a runway in a parking area or on s
215. es its default emergency airfield based on pre programmed logic Should engine or electrical failure occur the aircraft will initiate a turn towards its currently selected emergency airfield and perform the following actions as it prepares for emergency landing a Squawk 7700 b As soon as the pilot receives notification in the control shelter that the aircraft is in an emergency state he will contact via phone the current ATC and the tower at the intended emergency airfield to begin preparing for the emergency landing The Global Hawk crew will also notify the installation command post and base operations as soon as time permits c Upon crossing the IAF see charts included in this document the aircraft will lower its gear and shutdown the engine if still operating If it is too high to make a safe landing it will orbit at the designated IAF until reaching the appropriate altitude before proceeding inbound The flight path of the last orbit will be adjusted to cross the at the planned altitude d From the IAF inbound it will descend on a 5 25 degree glide slope along the approach path as depicted on the included charts until touchdown on the runway e The Global Hawk will begin its flare between 40 and 70 ft AGL The aircraft is normally programmed to touchdown approx 1500 ft beyond the approach end of the runway wind conditions and runway slope may cause longer shorter touchdown f Brakes will automatically be applied
216. escent out of HIGH KEY 3 Not clear other traffic in front of the PPA after the approach has started 4 Issue landing clearance i e cleared to land cleared for touch and go etc before the aircraft reaches LOW KEY 5 Not terminate the PPA or issue additional restrictions once a clearance has been issued unless required for safety of flight ATCFacO P3722 1Q NOTE Pattern adjustments defeat the PPAs effectiveness 6 Before effecting communications transfer back to radar coordinate with the appropriate radar sector to achieve release climb out instructions frequency assignment aircraft intentions upwind and resolve all potential conflicts between the PPA aircraft and know or observed traffic f Lost communications procedure If communications with air traffic are lost before receiving a landing clearance the pilot will not descend below 2 100 feet MSL attempt to contact Cherry Point Approach on 268 7 or 124 1 and proceed VER If unable the pilot will squawk 7600 and proceed with the NO RADIO LANDING VFR procedures contained in figure A 3 1 NO RADIO LANDING VFR Should the pilot of an aircraft experience radio failure and desire to land at the Cherry Point Air Station the following shall apply 1 During daylight hours a Squawk 7600 b and wind direction the midfield break point enter downwind descending to 1 000 feet MSL for landing 2 caution and remain will clear of other tr
217. esults of the qualification skill check and training team recommendations 4 105 OJTI RESPONSIBILITIES The OJTI is responsible for assisting the trainee in acquiring the knowledge and skills necessary to qualify The OJTI shall a Ensure that the OJT process includes preferred methods of teaching through a combination of instruction demonstration and practical application OJT instruction shall be based on handbook requirements and procedures and shall provide guidance on control judgment Alternative techniques should be demonstrated by the OJTI b Be familiar with the trainee s previous training performance prior to commencing c Document OJT results on the four day evaluations Document all training sessions conducted during the assigned shift Discuss the trainee s performance as soon as possible after each OJT session e Perform only OJT duties during training sessions f Ensure that the instructor and the trainee are plugged into the same control position when OJT is being conducted g Provide OJT to no more than one trainee at the same time h Satisfy training objectives as specified in the training plan i Keep the trainee s FWO supervisor informed of progress AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q j Assume the responsibilities of a training team member when assigned to a training team k Be responsible for all positions combined during training even if the trainee i
218. eting the following prerequisites may be nominated 1 Staff Sergeant and below 2 Assigned to the facility for minimum of 120 days during the award period c Submission of Nominees Nominations will be in standard Naval correspondence format as depicted in ATC NATOPS Appendix S and shall be forwarded to the ATCF NCOIC The nomination shall at a minimum specifically include 1 Introduction or development of and air traffic control concept by the individual has led to ATCFacO P3722 1Q overall improvements in the efficiency and or safety of naval aviation 2 Controller s sustained outstanding performance has significantly contributed to the efficiency or flight safety of naval aviation 3 Any actions where the controller was personally responsible for executing lifesaving action in response to an emergency situation 4 Description of controller s outstanding leadership or other individual achievement in the field of air traffic control d Board Composition 1 The Controller of the Year board shall consist of a Senior Member designated by the b ATCF NCOIC Training Chief Radar Chief and Tower Chief c One SNCO from each crew 2 The senior member of the board shall cast the deciding vote in the event of a tie but shall otherwise be a non voting member 1 304 PERFORMANCE AWARDS The Federal Employees Pay Comparability Act of 1990 FEPCA Public Law 10
219. f interrogating in four different modes However the MSSR is currently configured to interrogate only modes 3 A mode C and mode B which are utilized to interrogate the radar parrot in measuring the radiation patterns of the radar antenna AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 Raytheon RADAR SITE EOUIPMENT STATUS amp CONTROL SELECTED A B 4 UPS POWER STAT STATUS AC UPS ERS E G XMTR STAT ej jo 7 2 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q CONTROL PANEL ANTENNA e jo POLARIZER LIN POLARIZER CONTROL BRIGHTNESSS DOWN RELEASE CONTROL Figure 7 2 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q Control Indicator Function ASR 1 CONTROL PANEL Provides notification of either a no alarm or system alarm status The illuminated green light SYSTEM ALARM indicates that no system alarms are present An illuminated red light indicates a system alarm s is present A flashing red light indicates an unacknowledged system alarm s is present Provides control and status of Primary Surveillance Radar PSR channel A A green light indicates PSRA PSR A is in the on line mode A red light indicates PSR A is faulted An amber light indicates PSR A is in the maintenance mode Provides control on status of Secondary Surveillance Radar SSR channel A A green light indicates SSRA SSR is on the on line mode A red light indicates PSR A is faulted An amber light
220. f responsibility a Communicates pertinent status information b Communicates weather information to relieving specialist as necessary c Communicates overall traffic situation d Ensures that unresolved questions about the operation of the position are resolved before transfer of responsibility e When assuming a position completes the appropriate position log to indicate responsibility for a specific position or combined position Job Task PHRASEOLOGY Job Subtask Indicator 1 Standard phraseology is adhered to Uses words and phrases in accordance with the requirements of the duty being performed a Uses approved procedures words phrases and formats b Issued instructions that are specific 2 Voice quality Speech rate Job Task E QUIPMENT Job Subtask Indicator 1 Equipment status information is maintained Maintains knowledge of equipment operating status a Determines status of equipment performance b Reports malfunctions 2 Computer entries correct 3 Adjustment of control display correct G 1 13 5Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 4 Capabilities fully utilized understood Uses available equipment to the fullest extent possible Displays knowledge of capabilities and limitations of equipment and its associated backup a Enters all required data into computer for required area disp
221. facility manning 1 412 AIRFIELD HOURS OF OPERATION MCAS Cherry Point provides airport services as published in the FLIP IFR Supplement United States REFERENCE FLIP IFR Supplement page B 102 1 413 ATCFO AND STAFF WORKING HOURS Normal work hours are scheduled from 0730 1630 Monday through Friday The Training Support Specialist work hours are from 0645 1445 1 414 ATC WATCH BILL The ATCFO publishes the watch bill monthly See example in Figure 1 4 2 1 415 HOLIDAY MANNING Facility manning during holiday periods will be at the discretion of the FWO 5Feb 15 Change 1 Schedule AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q a The Day crew is responsible for assigning the midwatch personnel for the control tower and the Eve crew is responsible for assigning the midwatch personnel for the TRACON b 0700 1500L Day Eve 1500 2300L The work schedule for each watch is a follows Midwatch 2300 0700L November 2010 P Aa 2 3 8 1 2M W DIH WON WN A Note Civilian Makeup Day 1 416 ADDITIONAL DUTIES Personnel may be assigned additional duties Every effort will be made to keep the disruption of training to a minimum Trainees are expected to devote off duty time while on a detail to the study of ATC 1 417 BRIEFING AREA A central briefing area located next to the RS desk is provided for all personnel to accomplish a mandatory self brief prior to ass
222. ff and Landing vv Navy Aircraft WCLC Watch Checklist Complete WO Wave Off ZDC Washington ARTCC 1 203 GLOSSARY Actual Instrument Approach AIA An aircraft making an instrument approach conducted when the visibility is less than 3 miles or the ceiling is at or below the minimum initial approaches altitude Bargaining Unit Employee BUE Represented GS 2152 civilian controller employed by MCAS Cherry Point Collective Bargaining Agreement CBA An agreement made by and between the National Air Traffic Controller Association NATCA and the Department of the Navy DON to promote and improve the efficient administration of the Federal Service and the well being of employees within the meaning of title VII P L 95 454 established a basic understanding relative to personnel policies practices and procedures and matters affecting other conditions of employment and to provide a means for amicable discussion and adjustment of matters of mutual interest at the Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point North Carolina Distinguished Visitor Military or civilian person that holds a position defined as a Very Important Person VIP 1 2 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Expect Further Clearance EFC Coordination time used to provide nonradar separation between aircraft that have lost communications Expected Exit Time EET Coordination time given by pilots to inform ATC of the time the a
223. fficial business only Personal long distance calls can be made as long as they are collect calls or a calling card is used e There is a 1 800 number that individuals can use to call MCAS Cherry Point The call will come in to the base operator who will ask for an extension Call 1 800 922 USMC f During normal working hours 0730 1630L Mon Fri do not forward any phone calls or other issues to the ODO Forward them to the Airfield Operations Officer at 466 3632 The ODO will handle any issues that arise after hours PHONE NUMBERS amp INTERCOM Weather 2761 01 Weather Training 4667 02 Weather Observer 2346 03 Weather Forecaster 2523 04 Flight Planning Sup 6768 05 Flight Planning Clerk 4334 06 VAL Spotters 3232 07 VAL NCOIC 2312 08 Air Ops Officer 6327 09 Asst Air Ops Officer 2048 10 Air Ops Chief 3632 11 ODO 2233 13 ATC NCOIC 4146 16 ATC Training Chief 4123 17 ATCFO 4664 18 1 4 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q ATCM Radar 2650 19 ATCM Comm Navaids 2284 20 Radar Branch FAX 4580 25 ATC Tower Chief 3894 26 ATCM Comm 5057 27 ATC Radar Chief 6350 31 ATC Training Support 3334 32 Radar Branch 5960 34 Tower Branch 7084 3687 35 Tower Break Room 5915 Radar Break Room 5904 1 411 BLOOD DONATIONS ATC personnel may be afforded the opportunity to donate blood if they so desire FWO is responsible for ensuring that the required 24 hour down time following a donation does not adversely affect
224. ficiency for each Marine and to manage his her progression throughout a career skill been The following have established designators 7252 Tower Controller Local Control 7253 Radar Controller Arrival Control 7254 Approach Controller REFERENCE NAVMC DIR 3500 98 ATC T amp R Directive NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 5 5 4 501 NAVAIR 655 The requirements of MARADMIN 230 04 have been established in ATC NATOPS and is now referred to as NAVAIR 655 REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 5 5 4 502 MOS MANUAL Reserved 4 503 NAVAIR 655 PROGRESSION The T amp R Directive establishes the requirements for position qualifications through a series Of specific events that detail the knowledge skills and abilities needed to progress through the OJT process It also establishes a timeline for Marines to progress through the MOS skill designators 4 5 1 a A Marine is required to complete qualifications for MOS 7257 within 12 months of graduation from ATC School b A Marine is required to complete qualifications for one Skill Designator within 3 years of graduation from ATC School c A Marine is required to complete qualifications for two Skill Designators within 9 years of graduation from ATC School d A Marine is required to complete qualifications for all three Skill Designators within 12 years of graduation from ATC School Marines that cannot meet this timeline are to be processed f
225. for suspension of training that require 1 Unsatisfactory progress The FWO and other instructors involved recommend suspension of training on an individual due to performance and progress 2 Trainees who cannot qualify within the target hours and in the opinion of the training team cannot qualify with additional hours 3 Trainees who have not qualified within the target hours and additional hours AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 b Reasons for suspension of training that do not require 1 Anticipated transfer An individual is in receipt of orders or has made the decision to separate from the Marine Corps 2 Trainee assigned to an excessive number of positions The FWO may decide that satisfactory training will not be afforded on a particular position due to the concentration of effort elsewhere 3 Excessive number of trainees assigned to one position The FWO may temporarily suspend training due to a backlog or shift in personnel assignments to a particular position 4 No training accomplished for a period of 30 days The FWO should suspend training due to the scheduled absence of a trainee in excess of 30 days or if circumstances cause the trainee to have no opportunity to train 5 Personal or medical problems that preclude the continuation of effective training 4 605 DISCONTINUATION OF TRAINING Marine Corps policy and guidance for discontinuation of train
226. force within 24 hours e Destructive Weather Condition 1 Trend indicates a possible threat of winds of destructive force within 12 hours or less B 107 DESTRUCTIVE WEATHER a When Destructive Weather Condition II is set the ATC NCOIC will coordinate with AirOps in accordance with ASO P3140 2J b When Hurricane Condition II is set within 24 Hrs the on duty FWO shall 1 Designate essential on duty personnel to remain until the field and TRACON are closed Coordinate with other FWOs to ensure essential personnel are on standby and available for 30 minute AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 recall throughout the projected duration of the destructive weather FWOs will determine number of required essential personnel based upon current conditions Employees will only be on recall during regularly scheduled hours Provide ATCFO and other FWOs with a roster of recall personnel 2 Notify ZDC Watch Desk at commercial 703 771 3470 of the anticipated time of NKT airspace turnover to ZDC 3 Coordinate with the ATC Maintenance Officer to determine if personnel are required to help secure equipment 4 Coordinate with the NCOIC for an immediate clean up of the outside areas and to assist maintenance Ensure all loose temporary objects are secured d When Hurricane Condition I is set within 12 hrs the on duty FWO shall 1 Take the following action after Airfield Operations authorizes closing th
227. g on the nominee s eligibility to receive the award d A board composed of the NCOIC and the three branch chiefs will then select the top two nominees and submit the names to the ATCFO for final selection e The winner will be presented the annual award at a formal ceremony Other incentives may accompany this award such as time off award or a cash award for a civilian or a special liberty pass for a Marine 1 306 WALL OF EXCELLENCE A Wall of Excellence has been established in the passageway adjacent to the radar room and shall be maintained by the Tower Chief AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q a Eligibility All Marine Controllers that receive a personal decoration or receive an award for noteworthy achievement by any authority outside of this facility b Marines that meet eligibility requirements will be required to provide an 8X10 color photo to be added to the wall AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 1 3 4 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 4 FACILITY ADMINISTRATION 1 400 ADMINISTRATION Reserved 1 401 DRUG AND ALCOHOL USE The policy set forth by the Department of the Navy shall apply in regard to the use of drugs and alcohol by ATC personnel REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 3 5 BUMEDINST 5300 8 MOU 1 402 FACILITY PARKING See The ATCF has a reserved parking policy
228. gure B 2 3 and within each column in the order of prominence Intensity or proximity is entered first then a descriptor in needed followed by a precipitation type AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 or obscuration in order of predominance The one exception to this is FC which will always be first when present OVCO10CB SKY CONDITIONS follow the c n us weather and obscuring phenomena associated with the visibility element Coverage precedes the cloud height with no space in between Cloud height will always be in three digits in hundreds of feet See Figure B 2 4 18 16 The TEMPERATURE and DEW PT is TEMP reported in 2 digits Celsius It is DEW PT important to note that the Celsius scale is not graduated to as small a degree as the Farenheit scale The temperature dew point spread for considering saturated air is 3 degrees or less M precedes all temperatures below zero 2992 ALTIMETER setting is in ALTIMETER inches of mercury and coded in four digits The decimal is dropped The element is preceded by an to indicate inches of mercury RMK PK WND 28045 15 REMARKS If there are remarks to be included in the report the element begins with the contraction ATCFacO P3722 1Q B 2 2 Increments of Separation Statute Miles 1 16 1 8 Ya 1 5 0 3 8 2 3 15 1
229. hange 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Tmg FOUR DAY POSITION EVALUATION POSITION DATE YYMMDD WX IFR VFR WORKLOAD L M H COMPLEXITY R O M DIFFICULT HRS APPROACHES M MOSTLY DIFFICULT TYPE OJT SIM EVALUATION LEGEND S Satisfactory N I Needs Improvement U Unsatisfactory N A Not applicable COMPLEXITY R ROUTINE O OCCASIONALLY L LIGHT MODERATE H HEAVY Job Task Job Subtask Day1 Day2 A Separation Separation is ensured Safety alerts are provided B Control Judgment Awareness is maintained Good control judgement applied Priority of duties is understood Control actions correctly planned Positive control of situation provided Traffic Management Prompt action taken to correct errors Effective traffic flow maintained Aircraft identification maintained Professional manner is maintained Procedures Flight strip postings complete correct Clearances complete correct timely LOA s LOP s Directives adhered to Navigational assistance is provided Weather information is provided Handoff procedures correct timely E Coordination and Communication Traffic advisories correct timely Coordination thorough timely Communication is clear concise Makes necessary transmissions
230. he over the approach lights call shall be made at gt mile from touchdown for runways 23R and 32L DH Marker arke RS DH lt DH Altitude 15 Aug 15 Change 2 NOTE Depending on the aircraft s track along the GS the aircraft will reach the DH altitude early if the aircraft is slightly below or below the GS The aircraft will reach DH altitude later is the aircraft is slightly above or above the GS 6 324 INFORMATION AND STATUS BOARDS There are several Information and Status Boards located above various positions in the radar room a The Information Boards contain permanent information on local airports frequencies minimum vectoring altitudes etc b The Status Boards contain real time status of local airports weather runways special use airspace and other information that affects the facility throughout each watch Procedures 1 Information Boards FWOs shall ensure the accuracy of the information boards Forward any discrepancy to the Training Support Specialist AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 Status Boards RD shall maintain the Status Boards for timeliness and accuracy All information shall indicate current status of the appropriate areas Scheduled hours of activation for special use airspace are not written on the status boards the real time activation shall be indicated by the affected altitudes Unless otherwise indicated the altitudes begin at th
231. he following minima 3NM increasing to 5 or greater provided The aircraft are on diverging courses and or the leading aircraft 1s and will remain faster than the succeeding aircraft c FC shall operate in single sensor mode d When operating in single sensor mode all positions will utilize the NKT STARS RADAR site unless there is a failure in the NKT site e Transition to from multi sensor made shall be accomplished using the SENSOR MODE CHECKLIST 6 506 STARS OPERATIONAL MODE TRANSITION PROCEDURES a The RS is responsible for the decision to transfer from FSL to ESL in the event of known or coordinated outages b Specific transition procedures 1 The transition procedures for switching from FSL to ESL shall be CTRL E 2 The transition procedures for switching from ESL to FSL shall be CTRL F Notify ATCM if there is FSL failure d Notify facilities as as practicable adjacent soon 6 5 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q 6 507 STARS VIDEO MAPPING MCAS Cherry Point utilizes STARS video maps a Usage of STARS video mapping will be at the discretion of the individual controller and adhere to the guidance set forth in the NAVAIR 00 80T 114 6 508 SENSOR MODE CHECKLIST Single Sensor to Multi Sensor a Obtain RS approval b Notify APN APE APW AR c Select Multi Sensor mode from STARS DCB menu d Select Multi Sensor MVAC from STARS DCB menu e Ensure
232. he form is printed out shall sign the certification statement at the bottom of the form Items to be carried over from the preceding Daily Record of Facility Operation are those that will affect the current day s Daily Record e g equipment outages runway or F 1 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q airspace status or coordinated routes procedures The last entry on each day s form shall indicate the close of business COB consider midnight local time or facility closing time if earlier as the close of the day s business Due to the VIDS configuration ensure that the COB entry is entered as 0359 0459 EDST to prevent the log from carrying over to the next day If a Radar Supervisor RS is assigned enter RS name EXAMPLE Carry over indicated PAR OTS 0500 2 WOODIN ON VER RWY 32 PAR OTS 1150 J KNIPPLE ON RS A ORTON 1200 BT 11 MANN GI D E 1210 WCLC LATE ENTRY PAR RTS AT 0200 130316 1315 R 5306A ACTIVE 0300 LATE ENTRY 0145 R 5306A INACTIVE 0459 COB Certification The employee assuming responsibility for the watch shall sign on using their operating initials and shall sign the certification statement at the bottom of the form b Make an entry WCLC on Form 7230 4 when the watch checklist has been completed Notify the organization responsible for corrective action on
233. he information provided on the VIDS on the ATIS at the top of each hour b Weather will notify the tower via landline when SPECIs are taken Upon receipt of SPECIs FD will notify RD of the change and make appropriate changes to the ATIS broadcast c At anytime during the watch the TS may request an observation from weather if weather conditions are contrary to the reported values displayed on the VIDS Upon request of the SPECI FD shall take action as outlined in paragraph b above 5 6 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 5 6 2 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 7 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 5 700 GENERAL Guidelines for handling aircraft emergencies are found in the current edition of the AOM and FAA JO 7110 65 NATOPS emergency procedures for locally based aircraft are available in the control tower REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 Chapter 10 paragraph 5001 5 701 INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS Start assistance and notification as soon as enough information has been obtained upon which to act Information requirements will vary depending on the existing situation Minimum required information for in flight emergencies is a Aircraft identification and type b Nature of the emergency Pilot s intentions After initiating action obtain the following items or any other pertinent information from the pilot or aircraft op
234. he past it will be considered as next day s traffic FR FLIGHT PLAN READOUT 0102 If more than one flight plan is found with the same aircraft identification a list is output containing computer identifications departure point and for proposals departure times of all flight plans in storage with matching aircraft identifications REJECT FLID NOT STORED REJECT FLID DUPLICATION Gl GENERAL INFORMATION 0116 16 16 11 GI E2 O NOTAM NKT Output Routing Field 16 must be legal identifier REJECT INCORRECT ROUTING To enter information desired for output at locations specified in the output routing The last field 11 must be preceded by the remarks code the clear weather symbol REJECT NO REMARKS CODE HM HOLD MESSAGE 01 02 21 NIKEL31 180010 16 15 For the HM to be accepted the flight must be active The hold data field Field 21 is optional with fix and or time or either fix or time alone But if fix and time are used they must be separated by element separator REJECT FLIGHT NOT ACTIVE The fix must match one in the route of flight The hold will start at present position INVALID FIX The time input is the time released from hold Absence of a time causes indefinite hold INVALID TIME An approach control FDIO may enter an HM if they have received a strip through normal routing or strip request message and Sector FDIO Eligibility Rule
235. he sample METAR report shown above is described as follows METAR REPORT TYPE Report type is the first element of a METAR report Report type will be METAR for routine reports hourly observations and SPECI for special reports The LOCID is the second element of a METAR report The new format uses the international four letter LOCID All lower 48 state LOCIDs begin with K followed by the three letter identifier KNKT LOCID DATE TIME group in reports has six characters to include the date Z is placed at the end of the DATE TIME group to indicate coordinated universal time 011955Z DATE TIME B 2 1 3 4SM VISIBILITY VISIBILITY is reported as a separate element from its associated weather and obscurations SM indicating statute miles will always follow the reported visibility but is not spoken See Figure B 2 2 171 2600 Manual stations will report only one RVR RVR but automated stations can report up to 4 different locations The runway and visual range are separated by a solidus l The value is in hundreds of feet FT is added to the end of the element to indicate the visibility is in FEET versus meters TSRA BR WEATHER amp OBSCURATIONS WEATHER is reported whenever it occurs and OBSCURATIONS only when they restrict visibility to less than 7 statute miles The symbols are reported in the order left to right listed in Fi
236. he tower and or radar pattern downwind must be considered REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 6 101 and 6 315 FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 8 3 5 405 LOCAL IFR CLEARANCES Local clearances have been established at NKT to standardize the clearance limits and requested altitudes for the following NOTE There is no longer a requirement to call flight clearance with departure and arrival time for aircraft on local IFR clearances a GCA call sign cleared to TARHL After departure runway rwy fly runway 5 4 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q heading maintain 1600 Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code b TACAN RWY 32L call sign cleared to TARHL After departure runway rwy heading maintain 1600 Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code c Neuse Area call sign cleared to KIYEK via Neuse Area direct after departure runway rwy heading maintain 5000 Expect 17 000 one zero minutes after departure Contact cherry point approach one zero minutes prior to expected exit time of time Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code REFERENCE ASO 3570 2 Appendix D FAA JO 7110 65 Chapter 6 d VFR ON TOP call sign cleared to KIYEK after departure runway rwy heading maintain 5000 Expect 15 000 one zero minutes after departure Contact cherry point approach five minutes prior to expected recovery time of time Departure frequency will be 268 7 s
237. hich cause error message that is being answered 1 3 characters Field Separator Space 16 OUTPUT ROUTING Output Station dd 03 2 digits FORMAT Sector Identifier 42 Adjacent Manual Center LLL ZDC 3 letters must match stored facility identifier FSS BASOPS Terminal aaal AMGF The Lis format must be A Approach Control Arrival FDEP D Departure FDEP Tower FEDP F FSS M BASOPS General A or Primary A Ld E2 This format is used to designate Assistant Chief REJECT INCORRECT ROUTING Position Flow Controller WS FC Primary A General A and System Engineer position Broadcast Indicator L L must be A D T F M or G Field Separator Space 17 AMENDMENT OR Correction and Amendment data is merged with CORRECTION stored flight data reprocessed and acceptance checked in that context Corrected Data Format must correspond to that required for the designated field Contains the amended or corrected data for the field referenced by the proceeding field reference number Field 12 or the Error Message Field Separator Space 18 PROGRESS REPORT DATA 2 17 Alphanumerics Contains a fix or strip FORMAT number but not both and may contain a time Used only with FDEP eligibility REJECT NOT YOUR CONTROL Fix aala a a NCA040010 Element Separators are required to separate INVALID FIX MRH two entered elements Element Separator dddd INVALID TIME Field Separator Space 21 HOLD DATA Optional Fie
238. ho use various techniques and skills and to acquaint the trainee with the functions and operations of an operating position or area of specialization OJF will not be counted as OJT An evaluation does not need to be completed for OJF d Performance Skill Check An assessment used to compare the knowledge and skill levels of a trainee to those required for qualification or to evaluate the performance of qualified controllers as part of their annual review e OJT Time Limits The number of months allowed to complete training for each position These limits are tracked by the training office in order to ensure that each trainee is maintaining the training progression within established standards f Primary Designated individual responsible for ensuring all required position skills training is complete This is not necessarily the person listening to the trainee the most 4 302 FACILITY TRAINING REQUIREMENTS This facility has established simulation hours OJT time limits and OJF hours for each operating position 4 3 1 a OJT Time Limit A monthly standard based on a calculation of the upper control limit for the most recent 12 qualifications for each position The established limits for initial and subsequent training are shown in Figure 4 3 1 These time limits shall be evaluated at least annually b Simulation At least 20 of the practical training that an individual receives is required to be simulated For initi
239. hort final Crash Crew Standby Utilized when CFR resources are needed to standby for a pending emergency This is normally used when the pilot AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 has declared an emergency and is enroute to the airfield PHRASEOLOGY Crash Crew Dispatch Crash Crew Dispatch or whichever one of the above applies aircraft identification type aircraft nature of emergency 5 Crash Net Notification PHRASEOLOGY This is the tower with an emergency this is the tower with an emergency GIVE PERTINENT INFORMATION all stations acknowledge with initials when called This is the tower securing the emergency this is the tower securing the emergency all stations acknowledge with initials when called REFERENCE ASO P11135 1 5 703 HOT BRAKES a Aircraft reporting Hot Brakes shall be directed to taxi clear of the active runway other aircraft fuel trucks and refueling pits and will position themselves in such a manner that the wheel axle points away from the active runway and taxiways in use The aircraft will not be able to taxi until cleared to do so by crash crew b Hot brakes explode outward therefore extreme care should be taken not to allow other aircraft equipment or personnel to station themselves in the path of possible debris c All agencies shall be immediately notified when hot brakes are reported or suspected by activating the crash net
240. ht Data Radar Tower Branch Local Control Ground Control Flight Data Tower Annual Exam Notes MCAS FORM 3722 24 10 2012 Figure 2 3 26 2 3 30 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 4 BILLET AND POSITION DESCRIPTIONS 2 400 ATC FACILITY OFFICER ATCFO responsibilities are established by NATOPS REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 1 3 1 2 401 FACILITY NCOIC The ATCF responsibilities are established by NATOPS REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 1 3 5 2 402 TRAINING CHIEF The Training Chief responsibilities are established by ATC NATOPS to include the following a Provide study guides for Aviation Marines Awaiting Training AMAT b As the ATCS Examiner ensure issuance of ratings in accordance with NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 4 4 2 with c Qualify personnel in accordance paragraph 4 311 of this manual d Provide technical assistance to the ATCFO in development of procedures e Coordinate and track all trainees progress with the branch chiefs and FWOs f Maintain currency requirements in accordance with paragraph 4 203 of this manual h Provide annual proficiency guidance to the FWOs REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 1 2 2 2 4 1 2 403 CONTROL TOWER CHIEF The Control Tower Chief responsibilities are established by ATC NATOPS to include the following a Conduct Performance Skill Che
241. ial OJT Initial Sim Subsequent OJT Subsequent Sim FD 4 Months 19 Hours 3 Months 8 Hours GC 4 Months 20 Hours 3 Months 9 Hours LC Note 1 8 Months 31 Hours 5 Months 14 Hours RD 3 Months 20 Hours 2 Months 6 Hours FC Note 3 220 Live 34 Sims 40 Live 4 Sims APW Notes 1 2 10 Months 37 Hours 3 Months 7 Hours APE Notes 1 2 9 Months 35 Hours 8 Months 26 Hours AR Note 1 8 Months 17 Hours 5 Months 24 Hours Initial Applicable to controllers without previous position qualification at the position under consideration Subsequent Applicable to controllers with previous position qualification any facility at the positions under consideration Note 1 Training and qualification on an associate position is normally in conjunction with or subsequent to training and qualification on the assisted position therefore control limits and training times are not tracked Note 2 When more than one approach control position exists within a facility the initial position qualification is allocated the initial time limit Subsequent approach control positions are allocated subsequent time limits Note 3 Final Control maximum training times are in number of approaches Based on data compiled through 31 Dec 14 Figure 4 3 1 15 Aug 15 Change 2 4 306 TRAINING PLAN a The training team members shall develop and document in writing a Training Plan before beginning OJT An example of a Training Plan i
242. ifications and ratings shall also be documented in the record b For reporting purposes the terms student developmental trainee apply to anyone receiving training at the specialist instructor or supervisory level is to be turned over to the Training Chief upon check in and should include a copy of the ATCS pink card annual physical and AWT CTO REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 5 4 401 LQS LTG AND T amp R EVENTS All applicable T amp R events for each operating position are listed in the facility T amp R Supplements Upon completion of a position qualification the appropriate events will be entered into MSHARP 4 402 COMBAT READINESS PERCENTAGE REPORTING Reserved 4 403 RESPONSIBILITIES a The Training Chief shall be responsible for initiating and maintaining the employee s Training Jacket b Upon completion of a centralized training course the organization providing the course shall provide to the facility a record of each specialist s performance and achievement for inclusion in the specialist s Training Jacket 4 4 1 4 404 POSITION EVALUATIONS A report shall be completed for all OJT sessions classroom lectures simulation scenarios designation recommendations skill checks or suspensions The two forms used are described in paragraph 2 314 Specific instructions regarding completion of position evaluations are contained in Appendix G REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 parag
243. indicates SSR is in the maintenance mode Provides control and status of the Site Control and Data Interface SCDI channel A A green light SCDI A indicates the SCDI A is in the on line mode A red light indicates SCDI A is faulted An amber light indicates SCDI A is in the maintenance mode UPS STATUS Indicates the status of the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS A green light indicates the UPS is in the on line mode red light indicates the UPS is faulted XMTR STAT Indicates the status of the PSR transmitter A green light indicates PSR transmitter output is OK A red light indicates the transmitter is off or providing insufficient power SYSTEM ON LINE Indicates if radar data is available to the system A green light indicates radar data is available A red light indicates no radar data is available SELECTED PSR 2 A the selected primary surveillance radar channel and indicates which is SELECTED SSR 2 m A or B the selected secondary surveillance radar channel and indicates which is SELECTED SCD 1 the selected Site Control and Data interface and indicates which SCDI is Indicates and controls status of the engine generator A green light indicates the generator is EGEN running A flashing green light indicates a shutdown command has been sent A red light indicates the engine generator is faulted No light indicates the engine generator has stopped or the status is unknown Indicator only Indicates statu
244. ing maintain 5000 Expect 15000 one zero minutes after departure Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code Advise APE of pilot intentions Complete posting of flight strips 5 4 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 3 When the pilot responds with After reaching VFR ON TOP cancel and proceed VFR to R 5306 warning area VR1074 etc No ERT is required FD shall take the following action Issue clearance call sign cleared to KIYEK after departure runway rwy heading maintain 5000 Expect 15000 one zero minutes after departure Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code Advise APE of pilot intentions Complete posting of flight strips 4 When the pilot requests an ERT FD shall take the following action Issue clearance from paragraph 5 405 d of this Manual Pass ERT to APE Complete posting of flight strips 5 408 DELTA PATTERN During an emergency situation the pilot may use the terminology Delta Pattern which indicates he she wants to orbit the airport at a specific altitude PHRASEOLOGY A C ID orbit the airport at ALT normal traffic pattern Conform to the 5 409 ARRESTING GEAR STATUS The following terms are used to describe arresting gear status Donuts Rubber supports donut shaped attached to the cable permanently to support the cable above the ground Boots Cut aircraft tires used to support the cable above the ground in con
245. ing and revocation can be found in ATC NATOPS These procedures are administrative in nature and are not considered disciplinary action although cases that require disciplinary or other administrative action may be taken concurrently DOD civilian policy and guidance can be found in the appropriate MOU REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 4 7 MOU 4 6 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 15 Aug 15 Change 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 7 SIMULATORS 4 700 GENERAL The addition of simulators into the ATC training program has improved our ability to reduce the number of training days for several of our operating positions It has also increased our ability to maintain currency on Radar Final Control The simulators are no longer an optional tool for discretionary use They have become a mandated fixture of our complete training program It is incumbent upon us that we use maintain develop and improve upon these systems continuously 4 701 The 15G33A Improved PAR Trainer IPART provides individual proficiency training capability to enhance PAR controller skills Skill objectives are achieved through simulation of normal and abnormal PAR operations 4 702 AT COACH STARS The AT Coach is a menu driven radar traffic simulator that is built into the scopes on each operating position It provides effective simulation of APE APW AR and ASR approaches 4 703 TOWER SIMULATOR a The tow
246. ings speed adjustments remarks 10 Clearance delivered B This includes clearance information relayed to EWN Tower 11 Radar contact R 12 Not used 13 This will be a split block when aircraft are held for release HFR will be written in the left upper portion When aircraft is released a check mark will be placed in the lower right portion If AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q HFR is not required just put a check mark in this block HFR EXAMPLE 14 ZDC release 15 Not used 16 ATD RS time 17 FDIO departure message NOTE Used only when manual departure message required 18 Not used c Overflights 1 Aircraft identification 2 Revision number FDIO 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or position that requested a strip be printed 3 NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 4 Computer identification number if required 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Coordination fix 7 Overflight coordination indicator FDIO 8 Estimated time of arrival at the coordination fix point outs 9 Altitude and route of flight through the terminal area 6 3 13 15 Aug 15 Change 2 9A Headings speed adjustment remarks 10 Clearance delivered B 11 Radar contact R 12 Not used 13 Not used 14 Not used 15 Not used 16 Time entered airspace RS time 17 Not used 18 Time rada
247. ion received from the ASR 11 antenna and are digitally processed into STARS indicators There are nine STARS indicators located within the TRACON on positions 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 and 13 and a work station located in the control tower TDW c The AN GPN 30 system consists of a dual channel Monopulse Secondary Surveillance Radar MSSR and a Primary Surveillance Radar PSR made up of dual channel Receiver Exciters REX Signal Data Processors SDP with an eight module solid state trasnmitter d Primary The AN GPN 30 surveillance radar system provides aircraft position information for air traffic control purposes Primary Surveillance Radar PSR provides range and azimuth information for aircraft within 60 nautical miles of the antenna over 360 degrees of azimuth subject to radar line of sight constraints The major processing components of this system are the PSR channels A and B and the Site Control and Data Interface SCDI channels A and B 7 2 1 Secondary The MSSR interrogator is utilized with an Open Planar Array OPA antenna The MSSR antenna and equipment are synchronized and collocated with the primary radar system at the radar site The secondary radar system is mounted on top of the primary antenna and both rotate together at 12 5 revolutions per minute RPM Secondary radar coverage is set at the radar site to either 60NM or 120NM MSSR range coverage is not selectable by air traffic controllers The MSSR is capable o
248. ions of airspace is difficult or impossible due to severe weather h Severe Weather Forecast Alerts Preliminary messages issued in order to alert users that a severe weather watch bulletin WW is being issued These AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 messages define areas of possible severe thunderstorms or tornado activity messages unscheduled and issued as required by the National Severe Storm Forecast Center at Kansas City MO i Categorical Outlooks Categorical outlook terms describing general ceiling visibility conditions for advanced planning purposed are defined as follows 1 LIFR Low IFR Ceiling less than 500 and or visibility less than 1 mile 2 IFR Ceiling 500 to less than 1000 and or visibility 1 to less than 3 miles 3 MVFR Marginal VFR Ceiling 1000 3000 and or visibility 3 5 miles inclusive 4 VFR Ceiling greater than 3000 and visibility greater than 5 miles includes sky clear REFERENCE FAA Order 7110 65 Chapter 2 Section 6 FAA Order 7110 65 Glossary AIM Chapter 7 B 105 THUNDERSTORM CONDITIONS a Thunderstorm A storm emitting thunder and lightning which may be accompanied by extremely strong wind gusts of occasionally more that 100 knots rainfall of moderate to torrential intensity and hailstones with measurements up to 3 4 of an inch or more in diameter at the surface Thunderstorms are classified in the following categories
249. ior approval from the ATC Facility Bldg 1660 Equipment Supported TACAN b Responsibilities 1 Airfield Operations will provide Facilities Maintenance a schedule of FOD walks by the 5 day of the month prior to the beginning of the quarter and notify Facilities Maintenance when there are any changes or cancellations to the FOD walk schedule Point of contact is the AirOps NCOIC at 466 3632 2 Facilities Maintenance will provide Airfield Operations a schedule of quarterly load tests based on the FOD walk schedule by the 15 day of the month prior to the beginning of the quarter Point of contact is the Preventative Maintenance Coordinator FMD at 466 2304 Facilities Maintenance will also notify Airfield Operations when there are any changes to the schedule or when a load test is cancelled 3 Facilities Maintenance will contact ATC Maintenance prior to the start of a load test Contact numbers are 466 5057 2650 4179 ATC Maintenance will request approval from the FWO The FWO will give final approval for any change of existing power supply change to generator power and change back to commercial power An ATC Maintenance technician will be at the equipment site before commercial power is removed ATC ATCFacO P3722 1Q Maintenance will notify the FWO when load tests are completed Tests may be delayed based on existing traffic and or weather conditions at the time of request 7 114 HAND HELD BACKUP
250. ircraft is expected to exit Special Use Airspace in order to provide nonradar separation between aircraft that have lost communications Expected Recovery Time ERT Coordination time given by pilots on local IFR clearances in order for ATC to provide nonradar separation for aircraft that have lost communications Facility Directive Locally produced document used to establish or change procedures in lieu of promulgating a change to the Facility Manual or Airfield Operations Manual Facility Memo Locally produced document used to issue information or instructions that are not procedural in nature Letter of Agreement LOA Agreement between facilities and or organizations to detail procedures and coordination required for numerous subjects 1 204 POSITION RELIEF CHECKLIST a In compliance with requirements listed in FAA JO 7110 65 controllers being relieved from a position shall ensure the items listed on the appropriate position relief checklist located on the back of the Position Log clipboard have been briefed prior to transferring position responsibility Position relief checklists shall be posted and maintained at each operating position b Upon assuming the Radar Flight Data position during a shift change controllers will coordinate with all appropriate agencies to confirm all SUA activations and the altitudes assigned for each area REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 Appendix D FAA JO 7210 3 paragraph 2 2 4 AIR T
251. ircraft altitude Pilot reported weather Pilot capability for IFR flight Heading since last known position 6 7 1 10 Airspeed 11 Navigation equipment capability 12 NAVAID signals received 13 Visible landmarks 14 Aircraft color 15 Point of departure and destination 16 Emergency equipment on board NOTE Requirements listed above in bold type are those that are part of the Control Tower Crash Emergency Call Sheet and are considered essential REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 10 2 1 AOM paragraph 5001 6 702 EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION When an aircraft accident occurs or when it is determined an emergency exists the radar controller shall notify the following Aircraft Landing Notify NKT CCL FWO EWN EWN Tower FWO MRH FWO NJM NJM NCA NCA Tower FWO 7 FWO Outside NKT airspace Sommaling 6 703 ARRESTED LANDINGS When a pilot requests an arrested landing with the radar branch the controller will request the landing weight and speed Forward this information to the REFERENCE AOM paragraph 5006 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 6 7 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Chapter 7 EQUIPMENT Section 1 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT 7 100 GENERAL This chapter describes the function and capabilities of the communications equipment used throughout the ATC facility
252. is tested every Monday morning after the A test This circuit is activated when the receiver is picked up NOTE When the Z circuit is activated the circuit is disabled c Crash PA a quick alert loud speaker system used to notify Crash Crew SAR and personnel in the operations building of emergency situations Located on position 19 it is normally activated by the LA LC or as directed by the TS The PA is checked prior to the daily test at 0815L AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 7 104 DUKANE SYSTEM The Dukane door buzzer is located in the tower cab with remote phones located outside on the ground floor and on the 6th floor at the access to the tower cab The controls and an intercom are located near position 17 in the tower cab When a call is received in the tower push the lit button on the front of the console and use the push to talk button on the handset to verify the identity of the caller To allow access push the bottom button located under the counter for someone on the ground floor and the top button for someone at the cab door 7 105 EMERGENCY COMM SYSTEM The AN FSC 104 V 1 ECS is an independent system providing the capability to transmit receive and record up to ten separate VHF UHF radiophone channels nine for ground to air communications and one for the FM crash vehicle control communications The ECS also incorporates a switching unit that allows it to combine the emergenc
253. ity Maintenance in the absence of the NCOIC 2 408 TRAINING SUPPORT SPECIALIST The Training Support Specialist is responsible for the following a Compile data for statistical analysis of the following 1 Air Traffic Activity 2 4 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 Runway Usage 3 Special Use Airspace Usage 4 Simulator Time 5 Position Training Time 6 Manpower History and Projections b Complete monthly annual and biennial reports on the above data as required by NAVAIR 00 80T 114 c Provide data processing and administrative support to the ATCFO and other facility management staff as it relates to training d Prepare and distribute as directed updates to the Facility Manual and other facility directives e Provide graphics support to the ATCFO and Training Branch for the development of courses of instruction and briefings 2 409 ADMINISTRATIVE CLERK Reserved 2 410 TERPS SPECIALIST Responsible for facility Terminal Instrument Procedures TERPS Program Duties and responsibilities are established by NATOPS REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 1 3 8 2 411 TRAINING DEVICE PERSONNEL Reserved AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 5 HAZREP AND WESS REPORTING 2 500 GENERAL Any person who is aware of an operational error deviation or suspected error deviation shall report it to supervisory personnel immediatel
254. junction with or without donuts We currently do not use boots Rigged Arresting gear cable is connected on both sides of the runway and ready for use AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 Derigged Arresting gear cable is detached from one side and removed from the runway Rigged Flat The donuts are pulled to one side and the cable is attached on both sides and lay flat on the runway Down The arresting gear cable is removed from the runway and the arresting gear is not available for use Foul Deck Abnormally slack cable caused by aircraft during normal landings landing directly onto the cable Term also used during the initial phase of an arrestment to indicate and aircraft is in the gear One Trap Status Due to mechanical reasons the arresting gear is capable of arresting one aircraft and after that the arresting gear will be in a Down status 5 410 VIP NOTIFICATION When ATC becomes aware of an inbound VIP the FWO shall be notified to include the chock time The FWO shall forward this information to the ODO Should the ODO not be available the information should be forwarded to the senior member present in Airfield Operations Should there be any changes to the initial information passed the receiving controller shall pass the updated information to the FWO For Flight Plan VIP Codes refer to FLIP General Planning REFERENCE FLIP GENERAL PLANNING paragraph 4 5 AOM paragraph 6003
255. l be checked prior to the daily A test REFERENCE ASO P11135 1K paragraph 2001 7 5 428 RADIO CHECKS A station wishing to inform another station of its signal strength and readability will do so by means of a short concise report of actual reception a SIGNAL STRENGTH When giving signal strength reports the following prowords will indicate signal levels from best to worst Loud Good Weak Very Weak Fading b READABILITY When giving the readability portion of a radio check the following prowords will indicate clarity of signal from best to worst Clear Readable Distorted With Interference Unreadable 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q EXAMPLE Loud and Clear Weak but Readable REFERENCE Naval Telecommunications Procedures 8 Chap 7 5 429 STEREO ROUTES AND VFR FLIGHT GUARDING NKTO1 NKTO2 and NKTO7A stereo routes will no longer be entered by flight planning If there is not a flight plan to W 122 in the FDIO then FD shall enter the flight plan b Workload permitting controllers shall solicit destination airport and ETE to all VFR aircraft requesting departure If workload prevents the ability to do so then controllers shall advise aircraft to contact base operations 5 4 9 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 5 4 10 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Chang
256. lay b Displays appropriate area of jurisdiction c Adjusts radar presentation to present the best display possible d Displays appropriate filter limits e Demonstrates knowledge of required computer entries and ensures entries are complete and correct f Enters necessary corrections updates in a timely manner g Demonstrates knowledge of procedures for operating all equipment h Is aware of equipment peculiarities Job Task SUPERVISOR ONLY Job Subtask Indicator 1 Crew coordination effectiveness a Maintains a spirit of cooperation b Maintains a professional manner c Is receptive to instructor s supervisor s and team members suggestions for improvement of job performance d Remains calm under stress e Conveys pertinent information to other team members in a timely manner 2 Ability to lead motivate supervise 3 Overall knowledge G 1 14 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 APPENDIX H ATCFacO P3722 1Q FLIGHT DATA INPUT OUTPUT FDIO HANDBOOK 1 INTRODUCTION This handbook contains instructions for entering requesting data from the FDIO equipment FIELD DEFINITION AND ELEMENTS FORMAT EXAMPLE REQUIREMENTS ERROR INDICATION 01 MESSAGE TYPE LL FP Required for all messages except correction AM messages 2 letters DM Field Separator Space Ma
257. ld Contains two elements FORMAT Fix 2 12 Alphanumerics H 1 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Time 4 digits Fix Same as Fix ISO Elements are optional in combination as long as name in the sequence of fix time is preserved When both Field 10 elements are present they must be separated by a slash character The fix may optionally be a strip number Element Separator Fix must match converted fix the flight plan INVALID FIX route Time dddd The absence of a time causes and indefinite hold INVALID TIME at a fix if entered or at present position 34 ALTIMETER DATA This field contains one element of three digits ddd 992 992 inputs an altimeter setting of 29 92 REJECT INVALID ALTIMETER SETTING L M Missing Field Separator Space 33 DATA ENTRANCE TIME dddd 2359 The first two hour digits cannot exceed 23 the REJECT INVALID TIME last two digits can be not greater than 59 Field Separator Space 45 WEATHER DATA 1 78 OCX S This field must start with Clear Weather symbol Alphaneme rics Field Separator Space FIELD DEFINITION AND FORMAT EXAMPLE REQUIREMENTS ERROR INDICATION ELEMENTS AM AMENDMENT MESSAGE 01 02 MARS21 05 Identification must match one in storage 02 FLID NOT STORED 12 17 450 Computer identification number may be used 12 17 To modify add to or An FDIO may a
258. lief will conduct daily clean up c Facility field days are held each Sunday eve watch and at the discretion of the NCOIC d Prior to assuming the day watch a police call of the parking lot shall be conducted e The Marine assigned to the midwatch shall be responsible for the clean up of the IFR room daily This shall include vacuuming the inside of the horseshoe and wiping down the table in the middle of the room The maintenance personnel will continue to clean the TCWs and TDWs 3 1 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 3 104 ELEVATOR OUTAGE ATC personnel observing an elevator outage shall notify the FWO The FWO is responsible for calling AirOps and the fire department 3 105 CYPHER LOCKS Cypher locks are provided for the security and safety of the facility There are several cypher locks within the facility a doors below the tower cab b doors entering radar room door entering ATC break room The combinations for tower branch and radar branch may be different and can be obtained from the FWO 3 106 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Fire extinguishers are located in the tower cab radar room and passageway next to the ATCFO office 3 107 FIRE ALARMS Fire alarms are located in every room and passageway within the facility and are equipped with both aural and visual alarms 3 108 HERO PROCEDURES a When instructed by the ODO that a HERO EMCON condition has been set ATC shall post the condition on the ATIS This will remai
259. light transitioned into W 122 then back into the BURNER ATCAA multiple time concluding with RTB If requested ATCAA is not in remarks section already manually write it in Count a nonstandard formation flight as separate IFR operations Enter the number of transitions on the strip and circle Multiply the number in flight by number of transitions into ATCAA This strip counts as four 4 IFR operations and eight 8 SUA operations 6 6 6 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 P3722 1Q EXAMPLE 5 IFR VFR strip for Restricted Area MOA ATCAA WLDCT32 4630 E2328 160 VFR 125 RE 18 1 KNTU NTUOO4A KNTU KNTU R 691 PHELPS MOA 0125 0219 Inbound Go Home strip become the same EXAMPLE 6 IFR VFR strip for Restricted Area MOA ATCAA WLDCT32 4630 E2328 460 vFR 125 AR 18 1 KNTU NTUOO4A KNTU KNTU p 691 0 PHELPS R14 0125 0219 Single aircraft operating in PHELPS MOA and R 5314 hand write R14 if not in remarks R 5314 has eleven areas that are counted for SUA operations One 1 IFR operation eleven 11 SUA operations one 1 VFR operation for flight following RTB indicated by the absence of a B in block 11 EXAMPLE 7 IFR VFR IFR strip for Restricted Area MOA ATCAA WLDCT32 4630 E2328 460 VFR t25 110 B K 3 r18 KNTU NTUOO4A KNTU KNTU R 691 PHEL
260. ll Office POB Persons on Board PPA Practice Precautionary Approach PPR Prior Permission Request PEB Procedures Evaluation Board RATCF Radar Air Traffic Control Facility RD Radar Flight Data RDC Radar Chief RS Radar Supervisor RYL Rolling Vertical Landing SAR Search and Rescue SCATANA Security Control of Air Traffic and Navigation Aids SDO Squadron Duty Officer SECNAVINST Secretary of the Navy Instruction SFO Simulated Flame Out SIF Selective Identification Features SNCO Staff Noncommissioned Officer SOP Standard Operating Procedures STARS Standard Terminal Automation Replacement System SUA Special Use Airspace SVFR Special VFR TACAN Tactical Air Navigation TDW Tower Display Workstation TEC Tower Enroute Control TLS Terminal Landing System TLZ Tactical Landing Zone TQL Total Quality Leadership TS Tower Watch Supervisor TSS Training Support Specialist 5 Feb 15 Change 1 UAS Unmanned Aerial System UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle USA United States Army USAF United States Air Force USCG United States Coast Guard USMC United States Marine Corps USN United States Navy V NET Vehicle Radio Network VACAPES Virginia Capes VAL Visiting Aircraft Line VFR Visual Flight Rules VISCOM Visual Communications VM Marine Aircraft VIDS Visual Information Display System VIP Very Important Person VSTOL Vertical Short Takeoff and Landing VTL Vertical Takeo
261. mend a flight plan if the aircraft is REJECT NOT YOUR CONTROL delete previously filed proposed but center strip is not yet printed or Flight Plan Data the flight is active and the tower or approach control has a strip either by normal routing or because of a strip request message Duplicate field reference is not allowed in the REJECT DUPLICATE FIELD same amendment message REFERENCE If field 02 is the field being amended no other REJECT INVALID AMENDMENT field may be amended in this AM Amendments made to field 06 must be REJECT FIELD OMISSION accompanied by field 07 and or a field 10 amendment Amendments to field 07 letter prefix may be INVALID TIME PREFIX from P to D D to E or P to E Stated in negative it is an error to change D to P or E to P or D Two combinations to amend Field 10 are field 06 REJECT INVALID AMENDMENT and 10 combination with any other field or field 10 by itself All elements of field 10 are amendable but the departure fix must be amended alone and followed by departure arrow An amendment to Field 10 of a Stereo Flight Plan will cause deletion of the stereo tag AS ALTIMETER SETTING To enter altimeter data 01 35 13 AS 0030 Must be an adapted reporting station identifier REJECT NOT ADAPTED for selected reporting 34 13 34 LIT 000 stations 13 34 PBF 999 DM DEPARTURE MESSAGE 0102 An FDIO may send departures on as many as six 07 08 aircraft in one departure message 01 02 07 08 etc There mu
262. mp Headquarters Squadron HERO Hazards of Electromagnetic Radiation to Ordnance IFF Identification Friend or Foe IFR Instrument Flight Rules Investigator in Charge ILS Instrument Landing System IPART Improved PAR Trainer IVCSS Integrated Voice Communication Switching System JTFEX Joint Task Force Exercise LC Local Control LOA Letter of Agreement LZ Landing Zone MAG Marine Aircraft Group MAW Marine Aircraft Wing MCIEAST Marine Corps Installations East MCALF Marine Corps Auxiliary Landing Facility MCAS Marine Corps Air Station MCO Marine Corps Order MOA Military Operating Area MOA Memorandum of Agreement MOS Military Occupational Specialty MOU Memorandum of Understanding MVA Minimum Vectoring Altitude MVFR Marginal VFR NADEP Naval Aviation Depot NASA National Aeronautics and Space Administration NATOPS Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization NAWCAD Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division NAVAID Navigation Aid NAVAIR Naval Air Systems Command NAVREP Navy Representative NCOIC Noncommissioned Officer in Charge NMCI Navy Marine Corps Internet NORAD North American Defense ODO Operations Duty Officer OJF On the Job Familiarization OJT On the Job Training OJTI OJT Instructor OM Other Military OPNAVINST CNO Naval Instruction PAPI Precision Approach Path Indicator PAR Precision Approach Radar PEP Procedure Evaluation Program PMO Provost Marsha
263. n AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q b FWO REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 8 1 2 2 and 9 1 2 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 Establish Training Team Discuss Plan for Training Training Manual and OJF Sim Provide OJT Sim Reaches Monthly Time Limit Recommended for Certification Conduct Performance ATCFacO P3722 1Q Continue OJT Sim kill Chec Certification Skill Check Training Review Conducted Provide Skill Enhancement Training Review Satisfactory Suspend Training Convene CEB Continue OJT Sim Certified Provide Skill Enhancement Training __ Provide Additional Revocation Training Process Suspend Training Certification New MOS Convene CEB Complete Assigned 4 3 10 Yes Revocation Recommended Figure 4 3 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 4 TRAINING AND READINESS 4 400 MACCS PERFORMANCE RECORD a A MACCS Performance Record MPR shall be prepared for each ATCS and will be maintained as a permanent part of the employee s training file It shall be used to record the results and the completion of training requirements for each qualification course proficiency training and other agency approved courses Employment data as well as air traffic qual
264. n CHAN A MAINT is lighted indicates channel A transmitter receiver transmitter power supply processor remoting or remoting power supply is in a maintenance condition not available for use When CHAN B ON LINE is lighted indicates channel B transmitter and receiver are selected remotely or locally and connected to PAR antennas when CHAN B STANDBY is lighted indicates channel B transmitter and receiver are in a standby status and connected to dummy load if channel Ais on line When CHAN B FAULT is lighted indicates channel B transmitter and or remoting equipment is in a fault status when CHAN B MAINT is lighted indicates channel A transmitter receiver transmitter power supply processor remoting or remoting power supply is in a maintenance condition not available for use When PRCS FAULT is lighted indicates processor is in a fault status when PRCS MAINT is lighted indicates processor is in a maintenance condition not available for use MASTER POSITION ndicates that indicator 1 is selected for master control ndicates that indicator 2 is selected for master control ndicates that indicator 3 is selected for master control ndicates that indicator 4 is selected for master control ndicates that indicator 5 is selected for master control ndicates that indicator 6 is selected for master control Used to select indicator for control of PAR system INTERCOM PUSH TO TALK Jack Block VOLUME potentiometer When pressed
265. n on the ATIS until the ODO notifies ATC that the HERO EMCON condition has been lifted b HERO EMCON conditions will be entered into the ATIS as follows HERO CONDITION 3 IN EFFECT REFERENCE AirStaO 8000 1 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 P3722 1Q Section 2 ANTI TERRORISM AND FORCE PROTECTION 3 200 GENERAL Reserved 3 201 BOMB THREATS Bomb threat An instance where Air Traffic personnel receive information that a bomb threat exists to an aircraft airport facility or other elements of the Air Traffic System critical to the safety of Air Traffic a A bomb threat checklist is located near each phone Attempt to ask as many questions as possible Bomb threat procedures are contained in the CMS Emergency Action Plan located in the airfield operations office See Figure 3 2 1 b Release information on bomb threat incidents in accordance with the procedures established in current directives Where no applicable procedures have been established all information shall be treated as For Official Use Only 3 202 FACILITY BUILDING SECURITY Reserved 3 203 ACCESS AREAS The tower cab and radar room are limited access areas which are accessible only through coded cypher locks A list of authorized personnel is posted at the entrance of each branch MCAS 5510 2 10 86 MCAS CHERRY POINT BOMB DATA CARD PLACE THIS CARD UNDER YOUR TELEPHONE QUESTIONS TO ASK When is
266. n to the training office for entry into M SHARP and the MACCS performance record REFERENCE NAVMC 3500 94 MCIEASTO P3722 3 4 108 LESSON TOPIC GUIDES The LTGs detail the reference materials that support the Knowledge Skills and Abilities KSAs that must be satisfactorily completed in order to assign the applicable position qualification Primary Military Occupational Skill PMOS or Skill Designator All Knowledge Factors are checked with a written test Skills and Abilities may be accomplished through OJT or simulation LTGs and LQSs written in black are those required by the T amp R Directive those written in red are supplemental information specifically for MCAS Cherry Point REFERENCE NAVMC DIR 3500 98 4 109 TESTING Testing is an important tool used by the facility management to ensure proper material is being taught and mastered a After a trainee completes each lesson in the T amp R Supplement a written test shall be administered by the training department The trainee must score a minimum of 80 to pass each LTG test LTG tests will be completed prior to qualification recommendation After recommendation and prior to a qualification skill check a written final examination shall be administered by the training department Upon successful completion of the final examination the trainee is eligible to receive a qualification skill check Each test will be graded and made available to the FWO training team and st
267. nation revised 6 302 CONTACT APPROACH ASA corrected to RAA 6 323 RUNWAY THRESHOLD APPROACH LIGHT AND DECISION HEIGHT CALLS FOR PAR Title changed and description of Decision Height DH added 6 324 INFORMATION AND STATUS BOARDS Graphics for electronic SUA Status Board updated 6 327 TERMINAL DATA ENTRIES Block 3 use revised FIG 6 3 7 Strip marking symbols for radar sectors added 6 335 OPPOSITE DIRECTION IFR New paragraph added to establish required opposite direction procedures 6 401 STRIP MARKING Block 3 use revised 6 603 SPECIAL USE STRIP MARKING Local procedures for strip marking and counting for air activity reports added APPENDIX LETTERS OF AGREEMENT New LOAs added and or updated APPENDIX H FLIGHT DATA INPUT OUTPUT HANDBOOK Instructor for WR entries added 15 Aug 13 1 100 1 101 1 102 1 103 1 104 1 105 1 106 1 107 1 108 1 200 1 201 1 202 1 203 1 204 1 300 1 301 1 302 1 303 1 304 1 305 1 306 1 400 1 401 1 402 1 403 1 404 1 405 1 406 1 407 1 408 1 409 1 410 1 411 1 412 1 413 1 414 1 415 1 416 1 417 1 418 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Section 1 GENERAL PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION CANCELLATION MANUAL CHANGES FACILITY DIRECTIVES AND MEMOS EFFECTIVE DATES PUBLICATION DATES PASS DOWN LOGS RETENTION OF RECORDS Section
268. nce the 3 mile button is activated and subsequently the aircraft is waved off the tower expects the waveoff to be straight ahead unless otherwise coordinated REFERENCE for phraseology FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 10 13 5 10 14 5 11 6 FAA Order 8200 1 paragraph 216 3208 c PAR Target Interpretation and Safety Limits Exceeded REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraphs 9 2 6 7 4 and 9 2 6 7 5 6 317 AV 8 MINIMUM FUEL GCA An AV 8 minimum fuel GCA is flown by delaying gear extension until just prior to the descent point The controller should notify the pilot when the aircraft is approximately 30 seconds from the glideslope At this point the aircraft is configured for landing the checklist is completed and the remainder of the approach is flown normally REFERENCE NATOPS FLIGHT MANUAL AV 8 paragraph 19 2 1 8 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 319 MISSED APPROACH INSTRUCTIONS a Before an aircraft starts final descent for a full stop landing and weather reports indicate that any portion of the final approach will be conducted in IFR conditions issue a specific missed approach procedure approved for the radar approach being conducted PHRASEOLOGY 1 Climb and maintain 1600 fly runway heading acknowledge 2 EWN Climb and maintain 2000 fly runway heading acknowledge REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 10 11 b For surveillance approaches specify the location of
269. nd maintain the spirit and intent of this publication in carrying out assigned duties as professional Air Traffic Controllers 6 Explanation of Changes See the Explanation of Changes attachment 7 Certification Reviewed and approved this date MEA SCHMIT Air Traffic Control Facility Officer Capt USMC Distribution Airfield Operations 5 ATREP 2 Facility 100 RECORD OF CHANGES CORRECTION OR DATE OF DATE CHANGE NUMBER CHANGE ENTERED ENTERED ER SIONA BUBE Change 1 5 Feb 15 5 Feb 15 J G Hendrickson Change 2 15 Aug 15 15 Aug 15 J G Hendrickson EXPLANATION OF CHANGES ATCFacO P3722 1Q 15 Aug 13 CHAPTER ONE 1 202 ABBREVIATIONS Unmanned Aerial System added 1 204 POSITION RELIEF CHECKLIST Shift change procedures amplified FacDir 004 13 1 403 HEADSETS Replacement procedures added FacDir 015 12 1 405 LOCKER ASSIGNMENTS Assignment procedures amplified FacDir 015 12 1 419 LEAVE AND LIBERTY Leave policy for trainees added Authority for liberty changed from FWO to Crew Chief FacDir 011 12 1 420 UNIFORMS Uniforms for Fridays added CHAPTER TWO 2 102 MARINES CHECKING OUT Transportation of MPR added NATOPS 6 5 3 2 203 COMBINING OF POSITIONS Radar manning requirements added FacDir 022 12 2 308 DAILY SUA ACTIVATION LOG Responsibility for filling out log and forwarding to
270. nee is receiving OJT In addition performance skill checks may occur at any time based on the recommendation of the training team c Performance skill check time does not count toward OJT hours d Performance skill checks shall be performed by an SATCS or Branch Chief who maintains currency on the operational position In the event the supervisor or chief is temporarily grounded or is not current due to temporary grounding an OJTI shall be plugged in and responsible for the position during the performance skill check session e Performance skill checks are permitted on consolidated positions only if training occurred on these consolidated positions f The results of the performance skill check shall be documented on a Performance Evaluation see Appendix G The documentation shall include 1 A description of performance 2 Recommendations for improvement performance 5Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Section I ATCFacO P3722 1Q TRAINING PLAN TRAINING PLAN Trainee Date Position Initial Training SATCS Subsequent Training D OJT Start Date 25 Date Pre OJT Required 50 Date Simulation Required 75 Date 100 Date Objectives Trainee Signature Date Primary OJTI Signature Date Secondary OJTI Signature Date Ensure a copy of this training plan is on file in
271. ng or tilt rotor aircraft is authorized f In the event a sweeper vehicle is needed for FOD removal contact the ODO at 466 2233 or intercom 13 NOTE Helicopters with wheels when transiting to from the runway centermat or warm up area shall ground all wheels on the ground taxi Helicopters with skids when transiting to from the runway centermat or warm up area may hover taxi 5 105 FOD SWEEPERS The ODO is the point of contact regarding the airfield sweepers Assignments to the sweepers are under the ODO s purview Except for an emergency situation the ODO will coordinate and advise ATC where the sweepers are to sweep ATC shall take the following action a Any requests for a sweeper shall be directed to the ODO b ATC will direct the sweepers as directed by the ODO c Avoid those areas reported with FOD until the ODO reports them clear Regardless of what type of FOD was reported AirOps wants to observe the FOD before it is removed in order to make a determination of its origin These procedures allow for AirOps to inspect the area before the sweepers remove the FOD ATCFacO P3722 1Q 5 106 TOWER WATCH CHECKLIST Each watch Day Eve Mid the oncoming TS shall ensure that the following checks are completed during the conduct of the watch and that the entry WCLC is made to the supervisor s log with any discrepancies not previously noted in the log All Position Consoles All Radios including Departure
272. ng plan Supervisors shall stress that refresher training is for proficiency improvement not performance evaluation 1 This program will include but is not limited to training on the following topics a Unusual situations such as weather affecting flight aircraft equipment failure hijacking and other types of emergencies b Seldom used procedures such as transitioning to and applying nonradar separation and procedures for special flight handling c Safety alerts and traffic advisories d Wake turbulence information and application 4 2 1 e Line up and wait procedures f Bird activity information 2 Radar facilities shall administer airspace intruder refresher training at least once a year Scenarios shall include a Tracked and untracked depending on equipment resource capability targets b Mode C as well as non Mode C equipped targets c Situations involving airspace violators who have established two way radio communications and violators who have not established two way radio communications 3 All qualified tower visibility observers shall receive at least annually refresher training in tower visibility procedures 4 Air Traffic Facility Continuity Contingency Plan Annually ensure familiarity with procedures and airspace based on the facility contingency plans e g loss of radar communications failure etc b Supplemental Training Operational personnel sh
273. ns D CE Y f A 2 ree Rh 7126 45 Figure 6 1 16 6 1 19 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 6 1 20 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 2 OPERATING POSITIONS 6 200 TERMINAL RADAR TEAM POSITIONS a The Radar Branch consists of four Primary Radar Positions Approach East Approach North Approach West and Arrival Control as well as Associate Positions Approach East will provide all services to departing aircraft from NKT The Radar Branch also has a Flight Data position and Final Control operating positions The responsibilities of each position in the IFR room have been developed using the Team Concept and Intent and are listed below REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 10 1 b IFR Room team positions are shown below 6 201 SATCS An SATCS is considered available when he she is physically present in the operational area and is able to perform the primary duties of the SATCS If the SATCS leaves the operational area or is engaged in an activity which may interfere with or preclude the performance of duties then an ATCS must be assigned does not perform SATCS duties such as a Performance evaluation or counseling of employees b Explaining and gaining support of Marines employees for management policies and goals EMERGENCY CUTOFF BUTTONS 5 Feb 15 Change 1 6 202 RADAR SUPERVIS
274. ntered on the reverse side of the card as specified in ATC NATOPS See Figure 2 3 17 REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 4 3 2 316 DAILY RECORD OF FACILITY OPERATION The radar branch and tower branch shall maintain a daily record of facility operation FAA Form 7230 4 This log will be maintained by the RS TS Appendix F provides detailed guidance for the completion of this form See Figure 2 3 18 REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 2 1 FAA JO 7210 3 paragraph 4 6 5 2 317 POSITION LOGS A Position Log FAA Form 7230 10 shall be used for documenting training on operating positions and simulators It is no longer necessary for the midwatch to fill in blocks 1 4 in preparation for the next day because some logs may not be used Whenever OJT OJF or a skill check is commencing the controller trainee that is signing on block 6 first shall be responsible for filling out blocks 1 4 Appendix E and paragraph 4 704 provide detailed guidance for the completion of this form See Figure 2 3 19 REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 2 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 318 INITIAL INCIDENT REPORTING FAA Forms 8020 6 and 8020 6 1 are used for reporting aircraft accidents incidents involving civil aircraft FAA investigators See Figure 2 3 20 2 319 DAILY FLIGHT SCHEDULES AND AIR FLOW The squadrons provide flight schedules to Flight Planning The Air Flow is compiled by Air Ops The eve
275. of intensity 1 Thunderstorm A thunderstorm accompanied by wind gusts less than 50 knots and or hail less than 3 4 of an inch at the surface 2 Severe Thunderstorm A thunderstorm accompanied by wind gusts in excess of 50 knots and or hail 3 4 of an inch or greater in diameter at the surface b Thunderstorm Tornado Condition Destructive winds accompanying the phenomena indicated are expected in the general area 100 nautical mile radius of NKT and a possible threat to B 1 4 ATCFacO P3722 1Q the air station within 6 hours Lightning and thunder are also anticipated c Thunderstorm Tornado Condition I Destructive winds accompanying the phenomena indicated are imminent within 30 nautical miles of NKT and expected to pass within 5 miles of the center of the airfield within one hour and lightning and thunder are also anticipated B 106 DESTRUCTIVE WEATHER CONDITIONS For terminology purposes Destructive Weather Condition and Hurricane Condition are interchangeable a Destructive Weather Condition 5 Secure from destructive weather conditions threat of storm has passed b Destructive Weather Condition 4 Trend indicates a possible threat of winds of destructive force within 72 hours c Destructive Weather Condition 3 Trend indicates a possible threat of winds of destructive force within 48 hours d Destructive Weather Condition 2 Trend indicates a possible threat of winds of destructive
276. on for aircraft landing and within the arrival pattern Type approach Intentions Handoff to position Button EXAMPLE Aircraft during a PAR low approach to tower downwind on button 12 PA LZ 12 a Identifiers for type approaches Visual Approach VA Straight in Approach SI Overhead Approach OA Copter TACAN 23R CT TACAN TA Note 1 HITACAN Y RWY 321 TY HI TACAN Z RWY 32L TZ HI TACAN RWY 14L HT RNAV RN Note 1 ILS RWY 23R ILS PAR PA ASR SA or SAA Note 1 Add runway if not the duty b Identifiers for type landing Low approach LA Touch and go TG Option OP Full stop FS c Identifiers for handoff to position Tower downwind Z Arrival A Approach Fast E Approach West W Approach North N 6 5 1 EXAMPLE Aircraft conducting a surveillance approach touch and go on button 13 SA TG 13 Aircraft conducting a precision approach full stop on button 12 PA FS 12 Aircraft conducting a HI TACAN Z low approach on the go handoff to approach west button 17 TZ LW 17 6 502 MSAW CA a The Minimum Safe Altitude Warning MSAW Approach Path Monitor portion of MSAW and Collision Alert CA functions of STARS SHALL NOT be inhibited This does not apply to the inhibit and suppress functions for individual aircraft as authorized in FAA Order 7110 65 b MSAW CA Description Alerts exist for tracks that are predicted to be or actually are in danger from flying below an
277. ontrolling that aircraft will request the pilot s intentions after the use of such area When the pilot advises they will be IFR enroute to their destination that sector will request from RD a full route to establish if the flight plan has been filed See Figure 6 6 3 b ATC shall advise all Non 2 MAW aircraft using R 5306A to check in and state intentions on 244 8 and to monitor the CTAF at all times while in the SUA PHRASEOLOGY Check in with intentions and monitor 244 8 at all times while in R 53064A 6 6 8 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 607 RESERVED 6 608 HATTERAS FOXTROT COORDINATION a Requests for 3000 13 000 feet require coordination with MCAS New River and Washington ARTCC b Advise ILM and NVF when HAT F becomes active or inactive 6 609 LOG ENTRIES FOR SUA a Enter the time the restricted area ATCAA and or MOA activate and deactivate on the daily log b Indicate the actual time aircraft used the SUA during the 24 hour period c Eve Watch Normally this shift logs the last flight in the SUA for the calendar day Use the time the last flight departs the SUA as the inactive time EXAMPLE SUA scheduled from 1100 0300Z Last flight using the SUA departs at 0145Z No other participants use the SUA between 0145 0300Z At 0300 log the SUA inactive at 01457 0300 LATE 0145 R5306A INACTIVE ENTRY 6 610 R 5303 5304 STRATUM When portions of R 5303
278. op Option Touch and Go Tower Downwind gt gt Actual Instrument Approach Bogue Field Circle to Runway 23 Pointed out to APW Same as above your control Cleared for approach VFR aircraft receiving IFR separation services lt 48 E 6 3 14 15 Aug 15 Change 2 LB LOBO PE PEDRO MA MARS ST STONE SP SPADE LU LUSTY DR CAMEL DRIVER BN BANSHEE JS JESTER DG DOG HK HOOK OT OTIS NO NIGHTOWL Figure 6 3 8 6 330 STRIPMARKING FOR LOCAL IFR CLEARANCES Manual copy clearances shall only be used for NJM clearances and when the FDIO is inoperative Stripmarking for local IFR clearances has been standardized as indicated in the following figures Corresponding phraseology for these clearances is covered in paragraph 5 405 a GCA or TACAN Final See Figure 6 3 9 b Neuse Area See Figure 6 3 10 VFRon Top See Figure 6 3 11 d HI TACAN Z See Figure 6 3 12 e HITACAN Y See Figure 6 3 13 f ILS Figure 6 3 14 g NJM return strip Figure 6 3 15 h NJM departure strip Figure 6 3 16 Upon transfer of identification to NJM the strip will be filed and the radar branch will call FD to inform them that the assigned beacon code is no longer in use When NJM tower calls approach requesting beacon code and frequency APE will assign a beacon code via STARS assign an appropriate frequency and m
279. or local based aircraft 15 Aug 15 Change 2 4 Computer identification number required 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Proposed departure time 7 Requested altitude or SVFR 8 Departure airport 8A Not used 9 Computer Generated Route destination and remarks Hand prepared enter clearance limit route altitude restrictions in the order flown if appropriate 9A Remarks standard procedures or departure 10 B for clearance delivered 11 Departure runway for which climbout instructions were issued See 5 503 12 Amended departure runway if needed See 5 503 13 Release from departure Y 14 Center release if requested Y 15 Not used 16 Actual time of departure 17 Flight Planning initials 18 Not used c Local VFR SVFR 1 Aircraft identification 2 Revision number FDIO 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or position that requested a strip be printed AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q NOTE Type aircraft may be omitted for local based aircraft 4 Not used 5 Secondary radar beacon code assigned 6 Not used 7 The letters VFR or SVFR 8 Not used 8A Not used 9 Estimated time enroute destination airport Large V indicating flight is VFR and squawk has been issued 9A Altitude Type approach 10 Not used 11 Not used Not used Not used 14 Not used 15 Not used 16 Actual time of
280. or revocation of the 7257 MOS unless a waiver is approved by Headquarters Marine Corps 4 504 T amp R SUPPLEMENTS This facility has developed its T amp R Supplements to mirror the events prescribed in the ATC T amp R Directive The supplements cover the following events Supplement Event ACAD 8500 ACAD 8501 ACAD 8502 ACAD 8503 ACAD 8504 ACAD 8505 ACAD 8506 ACAD 8507 ACAD 8508 ACAD 8509 ACAD 8520 ACAD 8521 ACAD 8522 ACAD 8523 ACAD 8524 ACAD 8525 ACAD 8527 ACAD 8528 EQPT 2003 2004 2206 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO 372210 ACAD 8520 ACPM 8020 ACAD 8521 ACPM 8021 ACAD 8522 ACPM 8022 ACAD 8523 ACPM 8023 Radar Flight Data ACAD 8532 ACE ACPM 8024 ACAD 8533 ACPM 8025 Radar Final Control ACAD 8534 ACPM 8026 ACAD 8538 ACPM 8027 2018 8028 2019 8040 2206 8041 ACAD 8525 ACPM 8042 ACAD 8526 TRESS ACPM 8043 Tower Local Control ACAD 8529 ACPM 8044 ACAD 8530 ACPM 8045 ACAD 8531 ACPM 8060 ACAD 8525 ACPM 8061 ACAD 8526 ACPM 8062 Apus apail ACAD 8535 8063 ACAD 8536 ACPM 8064 ACAD 8539 ACPM 8065 ACAD
281. ords for completed training 7 2 5 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Trainer availability in the following modes Self Paced Increasingly challenging levels Instructor Maintenance Speaker independent voice recognition system No voice enrollment is required but it is available Approach Tower and pilot generated by the training device computer voices AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q VELOCITY OFFSET ANTENNA SCAN INTENSITY GAIN ON amp FOCUS O ANTENNA SERVO UP VOLTAGE PRECISION LEFT o RIGHT MTI INTERVAL DOWN Control Indicator Function FPN 63 RADAR SCOPE ANTENNA SCAN Turns antenna drive motor on or off VIDEO GAIN Adjusts brilliance of video signal on indicator ANTENNA SERVO Moves the elevation and azimuth antennas Positioning the antenna scan over the desired aircraft produces maximum target strength FOCUS Focuses presentation on indicator LIGHT Turns alignment aid lamp on or off PRECISION MTI INTERVAL Control portion of sweep MTI video presented on indicator HIGH VOLTAGE RESET Resets high voltage overload relay and turns high voltage on IF GAIN MTI Controls gain on MTI targets Normal Controls gain on normal targets Turns Sensitivity Time Control STC on or off When selected reduces target blooming and helps STC ON OFF reduce ground returns 7 2 6 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15
282. ormance and qualification skill checks in accordance with this manual h Brief the trainee s team leader on the performance and or qualification skill check results and recommendations 1 Ensure that performance feedback 15 provided to the trainee as soon as possible after each OJT session j Ensure that at least one OJT report for each position consolidated position is completed by each OJTI to include all training sessions conducted during the assigned shift It is permissible to combine reports if the OJTI trains the same trainee on the same position on the same day k Serve on Controller Evaluation Boards as needed l Administer assign monitor and facilitate training 1 Establish a training team for each trainee 2 Ensure that OJF is accomplished and documented 3 Ensure that members of the training team provide the majority of OJT 4 Identify recommend coordinate and schedule additional OJT hours and skill enhancement training m Maintain communication among the training team branch chiefs and crew chiefs n o Serve as team leader for his or her training team s and ensure that all T amp R Supplement tests 15 Aug 15 Change 2 Make the final determination to modify the plan for training by providing skill enhancement training or additional OJT hours after considering training team recommendations Make the final determination regarding qualification after considering the r
283. orrect an entry type or draw a single horizontal line through the incorrect data initial that part of the entry and then enter the correct data Authorized FAA abbreviations and phrase contractions should be used d The ATCFO shall review all reports prior to that report leaving the facility 2 301 SUA VIOLATION The SUA Violation MCAS Form 3722 2 is used to record minor flight violations as described in paragraph 6 611 by military aircraft within R5306A C Hatteras or Neuse The FWO shall ensure that the form is forwarded electronically to the Training Chief and Radar Chief within 3 hours to the ATCFO for resolution See Figure 2 3 1 REFERENCE AirStaO P3570 2R TGTOPSMAN NOTE Big Rock is responsible for filing this report for R 5306A C and Hatteras F MOA when they are operational 2 302 CONTROL TOWER CRASH EMERGENCY CALL SHEET The Crash Emergency Call Sheet MCAS Form 3722 3 is used in the control tower to record information regarding aircraft emergencies The information contained on this form is in the proper order for making crash phone notification Normally FD will initiate the form and accomplish crash phone notification This form shall be completed for 2 3 1 emergencies only Crash phone tests will be annotated on the supervisor s log See Figure 2 3 2 2 303 OPERATIONAL DISCREPANCY The Operational Discrepancy Report MCAS Form 3722 4 is used to report occurrences of adve
284. os start with Issue 101 year d Facility Memos self cancel one year from date of publication or as directed by disposition Facility Directives cancel as directed by disposition Memos and Directives shall be posted in the central briefing area REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 1 417 1 105 EFFECTIVE DATES P3722 1Q 15 Aug 13 Change 1 5 Feb 15 Change 2 15 Aug 15 Change 3 15 Aug 16 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q A A FACILITY DIRECTIVE Issue 021 10 From Air Traffic Control Facility Officer To ATC Facility Subj TOWER VISIBILITY OBSERVER PROCEDURES Ref a NAVMETOCCOMINST 1500 3H b NAVAIR 00 80T 114 ATCFacO 3722 1 Facility Manual Encl 1 Sample Tower Visibility Observer Certificate 1 Due to major change in reference a the certification of air traffic controllers as Tower Visibility Observers is no longer administered by the Weather Department The ATC Training Branch will be responsible for completing the requirements of reference b and the ATCFO now has authority to issue the certification All previously certified controllers are still certified and do not require attendance of the new course 2 Change reference c to read 4 205 TOWER VISIBILITY OBSERVERS a All controllers shall be certified as Tower Visibility Observers prior to completion of the Basic Tower Controller T amp R Supplement b Facility Watch Officers FWOs shall
285. ovided Performance Handoff procedures correct timely Traffic advisories correct timely di 1 7 ti E Coordination Coordination thorough timely and Communication Communication is clear concise Makes necessary transmissions Relief briefings complete and accurate Standard phraseology is adhered to F Phraseology Voice quality Speech rate Equipment status information maintained Computer entries correct G Equipment Adjustment of control display correct Capabilities fully utilized understood H Other Specify MCAS Form 3722 25 9 2014 Supersedes Previous Edition G 1 6 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 11 11A References Signature Date 12 Recommendation O Qualification Skill Check Qualification Continuation of OJT Skill Enhancement Training Suspension of OJT 13 Employee s Comments This report has been discussed With me Signature Date 14 Qualification Requalification certify that this employee meets qualification requirements and is capable of working under general supervision Signature of Examiner Date MCAS Form 3722 25 9 2014 Supersedes Previous Edition G 1 7 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL C
286. ph added with suggested phraseology 6 702 EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION ASL changed to CCL 6 703 ARRESTED LANDINGS ASL changed to CCL APPENDIX C LETTERS OF AGREEMENT New LOAs added and or updated APPENDIX E GUIDE FOR POSITION LOGS Simulation log procedures moved to this section APPENDIX G POSITION EVALUATION New forms and procedures FacDir 020 14 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY Airfield Operations Department Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point North Carolina 28533 5010 P3722 1Q 6 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY ORDER 3722 10 Change 2 From Air Traffic Control Facility Officer To Air Traffic Control Facility Personnel Subj AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL CHANGE 2 1 Purpose This change transmits revised pages to ATC Facility Order P3722 1Q 2 Distribution This manual is distributed to all air traffic controllers at MCAS Cherry Point and select offices under the cognizance of Commander Marine Corps Air Bases East 3 Effective Date 15 Aug 15 4 Explanation of Changes See the Explanation of Changes attachment 5 Disposition of Transmittal Retain this transmittal until superseded by a new basic order 6 Page Control Chart See the Page Control attachment CNA Air Traffic Control Facility Officer Maj USMC Distribution Airfield Operations 5 ATC Facility 95 EXPLANATION OF CHANGES P3722 1Q Change 2
287. pproaches 8 All MARS 9XX series aircraft REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 10 2 NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 1 3 3 6 209 FINAL CONTROL The responsibilities of FC are established by NATOPS and the following a Informs the RAA position when a wave off is initiated to include call sign frequency and control instructions issued b Conducts precision and surveillance approaches to NKT c After coordinating with CCL notify RAA of any aircraft landing at NKT that declares an emergency on final d Verify the radio channel being used and position when accepting a radar hand off e Inform CCL of any emergency aircraft requesting the jog f Verbally coordinate the following with the contro tower for aircraft conducting radar approaches to NKT 1 Flights 2 Ordnance 3 Circling approaches PHRASEOLOGY Radar contact button position 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 Notify CCL when IFR GCA departure is RTB and no longer going to remain within the GCA defined pattern REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 9 1 3 7 6 210 RADAR FLIGHT DATA The responsibilities of RD are established by NATOPS local directives and the following a Notify the FWO and adjacent positions of any change in Special Use Airspace status b Update the flight data status information board Forward initial inbound information EWN Tower on aircraft landing EW
288. quadrant of the CDSA SVFR reporting points for SAR helicopters are listed in the current edition of the AOM Chapter 6 Landmarks located within ten 10 miles of the airport are the Great Lakes WSW Neuse River NW NE Highway 70 Four lane West Highway 101 Two lane S E and the railroad tracks connecting NKT and NCA The two airports in the CDSA are Hickory Hill 62NC Northwest of NKT and Dogwood Farms West Southwest of NKT Just outside of the CDSA at 6 5 miles East Southeast of NKT is the Spud airport and at 7 miles South Southwest is the Circle P airport b Runways 32L and 23R end at the centermat for landing runway purposes The runway distances for landing and departing at intersections are detailed in Figures 5 1 2 through 5 1 5 5 101 TOWER TRAFFIC COUNT The Associate Local Control CCL is responsible for the statistical data for each operation within the CDSA via the ATAA REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 2 303 NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 10 1 3 1 a 5 102 OBSTRUCTIONS WITHIN CDSA The obstructions located within the NKT Class D Surface Area are listed in Figure 5 1 6 5 1 1 5 103 FOD WALKS FOD walks are published by message and are normally scheduled every other Monday If a holiday is on Monday or there is inclement weather the FOD walk is rescheduled to the following Wednesday As FOD walk schedules are published copies will be placed on the tower and radar supervisors board 5 104 FOD AND HELICOPT
289. quawk code Once the aircraft reaches VFR ON TOP reclear the aircraft to maintain VFR ON TOP in Alert Area 530 and VFR elsewhere NOTE A VFR ON TOP clearance is an IFR clearance VFR ON TOP authorization can only be authorized within airspace which is controlled by the facility issuing the VFR ON TOP clearance unless otherwise coordinated For an aircraft to proceed on top of a cloud layer outside the airspace authorized for VFR ON TOP flight the aircraft must proceed VFR PHRASEOLOGY call sign maintain VFR conditions on top in alert area 530 VFR conditions elsewhere contact approach control five minutes prior to your expected recovery time of time REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 Chapter 7 Section 3 e HI TACAN Z call sign cleared to KIYEK After departure runway rwy heading i 15 Aug 15 Change 2 maintain 5000 expect 15 000 one zero minutes after departure Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code f HI TACAN call sign cleared to LKOUT After departure runway rwy heading maintain 5000 expect 13 000 one zero minutes after departure Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code g RNAV RWY 23R call sign cleared to SAPLE After departure runway rwy heading maintain 1600 Departure frequency will be 268 7 squawk code h ILS call sign cleared to GRAVY After departure runway rwy heading maintain 1600 Departure frequency will be 268 7 1
290. r transfer or leaving airspace handoff communication NOTE A flight plan readout FR strip may be used for pointouts REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 3 3 6 328 CONTROL SYMBOLOGY Use authorized control and clearance symbols or abbreviations for recording clearances reports and instructions Control status of aircraft must always be current You may use a Plain language markings when it will aid in understanding information b Locally approved identifiers Use these only within your facility and not on FDIO or interphone circuits See Figures 6 3 7 and 6 3 8 REFERENCE ATCFM Paragraph 2 603 and 2 604 c Plain sheets of paper to record information when flight progress strips are not used REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 2 3 9 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q ATCFM Chapter 2 Section 6 NOTE Full Route flight strips may be used to record the above information on overflight pointouts 6 329 POINTOUTS All interfacility and intrafacility pointouts shall be recorded on flight progress strips Figure 6 3 7 details the symbology used for pointouts All other pointout information or restrictions associated with an aircraft being handed off shall be verbally coordinated with the receiving controller REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 Chapter 5 Section 4 SYMBOL SECTOR Figure 6 3 7 SYMBOL MEANING Low Approach Full St
291. r a controller does not meet currency requirements b Performance skill checks shall be performed by an SATCS or Branch Chief who maintains currency on the operational position All performance skill checks shall be documented on the handwritten position log c For all annual and currency checks a statement that the controller meets or fails to meet performance requirements shall be submitted REFERENCE ATCFM par 4 204 NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 3 1 2 4 310 SKILL ENHANCEMENT TRAINING Trainee a The purpose of skill enhancement training is to enable the trainee to return to OJT and perform at a level that will allow qualification within the assigned OJT hours b Skill enhancement training may be used to 1 Improve level skill performance knowledge or 2 Develop skills that cannot be obtained in the operational environment e g seasonal traffic c This training shall not include OJT or count toward assigned OJT hours d The trainee s FWO supervisor shall identify the need for skill enhancement training based on recommendations from the training team e The training team shall recommend the type of training e g CBI simulation lab classroom position observation to be provided 15 Aug 15 Change 2 f The trainee s FWO supervisor shall 1 Coordinate the use of training resources 2 Schedule the training 3 Document the plan in writing 4 Discuss the skill enhancement tr
292. r to exiting with total number of participants frequency change approved c For participating aircraft requesting to join ATCAA mission evolution use the following phraseology PHRASEOLOGY PARTICIPANT ACID MAINTAIN altitude at least 1 000 feet above or below ATCAA UNTIL MARSA WITH MARSA ACID REPORT ENTERING THE ATCAA EXAMPLE STONEII maintain one seven thousand until MARSA with OTISOI report entering the Burner ATCAA d When participant reports entering the ATCAA use the following phraseology PHRASEOLOGY PARTICIPANT ACID MONITOR GUARD WHILE IN THE ATCAA REPORT FIVE MINUTES PRIOR TO EXITING ON THIS FREQUENCY RADAR SERVICE TERMINATED FREQUENCY CHANGE APPROVED EXAMPLE STONEII monitor GUARD while the Burner ATCAA Report five minutes prior to exiting on this frequency radar service terminated frequency change approved e If aircraft does not confirm that MARSA Authority has approved MARSA use the following phraseology PHRASEOLOGY PARTICIPANT ACID UNABLE ATCAA APPROVAL SAY INTENTIONS EXAMPLE STONEI1 unable Burner ATCAA approval say intentions f If MARSA Authority departs the before all complete use the following phraseology PHRASEOLOGY ACID I SHOW YOU AS THE MARSA AUTHORITY SAY CALL SIGN OF NEW MARSA AUTHORITY 6 6 11 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q EXAMPLE OTISO1 I show you as the MARSA
293. raining b Conferences and evaluations c Deployments and exercises d Boards e Reports due f Air Traffic Control g Professional Military Training AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 2 PROFICIENCY AND CURRENCY 4 200 QUALIFICATION TRAINING Each trainee shall receive qualification training as outlined in this Manual Qualification training shall be consistent with the types of air traffic services provided by the facility and traffic situations encountered should become progressively more complex If qualification is not achieved the ATCFO shall initiate action in accordance with NATOPS and or other appropriate directives 4 201 PROFICIENCY TRAINING Proficiency training is required for operational personnel and support specialists who maintain currency The purpose of this training is to maintain and upgrade the knowledge and skills necessary to apply air traffic procedures in a safe and efficient manner In order to maximize the initial proficiency training of a controller receiving his her first qualifications a trainee shall not start OJT on a major position or a position in the opposite branch until they work their qualified positions for a minimum of one month This restriction does not apply to Marines with prior qualifications or Officers a Refresher Training This facility will establish in writing an annual refresher training program as part of the annual traini
294. raph 6 4 1 4 405 DISPOSITION OF RECORDS AND REPORTS a Training documents may be disposed of after qualification on each position Exception Reports reflecting position qualifications requalifications designations and all annual skill checks shall be retained Prior to these documents being disposed of they should be offered to the employee b In the event of a termination of employment due to a training failure all training records reports training plans etc shall be retained at the facility as directed by ATC NATOPS REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 5 3 4 406 OPERATING INITIALS All personnel checking in shall establish operating initials with the training support specialist Requests for changing operating initials should be made to the Training Office AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 4 4 2 15 Aug 15 Change 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 5 MOS PROGRESSION 4 500 GENERAL The current progression of the ATC MOS has a Marine graduating from ATC school with a 7251 ATC Trainee Upon qualification on two operating positions within a branch the Marine is awarded the MOS 7257 which replaces the 7251 as the primary The primary MOS does not change until a Marine reaches the rank of Master Sergeant at which time his her primary MOS becomes 7291 Skill designators have been developed to further delineate the level of pro
295. re does not necessarily indicate concurrence with the report only that the report has been discussed with the trainee Block 14 This block is used by supervisors to document position Sign and date 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q TYPE OJT SIM Enter either OJT or SIM to indicate type of training being conducted EVALUATION LEGEND Table included describing the types of entries to be filled in for the job tasks and subtasks listed below PERFORMANCE This section contains job tasks and subtasks used as a basis for instructing and evaluating the trainee Users of this form should review the definitions of all job subtasks and their respective performance indicators These guidelines are to be used by all participants involved in training to ensure mutual understanding This checklist in not all inclusive and is not meant to limit the duties to be reviewed The job tasks entitled Other are intended for local use and adaptation a During OJT enter the appropriate code for SATISFACTORY NEEDS IMPROVEMENT UNSATISFACTORY or NOT APPLICABLE The terms are defined as follows 1 SATISFACTORY An S in this column indicates that the trainee s observed performance during the session meets expected performance requirements and indicates that the trainee demonstrates the ability to work independently for this performance item Examples of exemplary performance and or specific comm
296. re in the latest sample report and the average wind speed is 30 knots or more in the last latest report Lamp C Lights when the difference between the average wind speed and the maximum or minimum wind speed span is 10 knots or more AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 7 4 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q APPENDIX A SPECIAL OPERATIONS Section 1 GENERAL A 100 GENERAL MCAS Cherry Point supports various types of special operations Many of these are in the form of exercises such as JTFEX Hornet s Nest or CAPEX The special operations that support local squadrons on a recurring basis are covered in this chapter A 101 PRIORITY These special operations usually require limiting or restricting nonparticipants from using the airport therefore they must be coordinated through Airfield Operations Priority must be established prior to the operation through coordination with AirOps and the FWO 1 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q Section 2 UNMANNED AERIAL VEHICLE PROCEDURES A 200 GLOBAL HAWK INTRODUCTION a Ifa critical malfunction occurs with the Global Hawk in flight it may be required to make an emergency landing in order to prevent loss of the aircraft Due to the unique nature of unmanned aircraft prior coordin
297. revised on a continuous basis 15 Aug 15 Change 2 d Maintain close communication with watch officers branch chiefs OJTIs and the ATCFO regarding all facility training programs and resources e Ensure that the training plan is administered in accordance with local directives f Monitor and assess the performance of the training staff on a continuous basis g Ensure that local course materials visual aids and control scenarios are developed and properly labeled h Plan and direct the training of personnel involved in the OJT qualification process i Maintain training documentation j Provide oversight and direction to watch officers and branch supervisors to ensure compliance with training directives k Review OJT documentation 1 Conduct orientation training for new join Marines prior to assignment to crew 4 104 SATCS RESPONSIBILITIES SATCSs shall a Identify recommend coordinate and schedule proficiency training b Provide feedback to OJTIs and trainees on training performance c Address any reported extenuating circumstances that may impede the trainee s progress d Ensure that OJTIs have no other duties to perform during training sessions e Maintain either currency or familiarization on positions for which qualifications are conducted f Promote teamwork skills for training team members 4 1 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q g Conduct perf
298. rpose of report on the form Check OJT for any activity that is counted as part of the assigned training time Check OJF for on the job familiarization time Indicate Familiarization Instructional or Evaluation when simulated training is being administered The supervisor checks Skill Check if administering a performance skill check or Qualification if administering a qualification skill check If Other is indicated document specific use in Block 12 Block 10 PERFORMANCE This section contains job tasks and job subtasks used as a basis for instructing and evaluating the ATCS trainee User of this form should review the definitions of all job subtasks and their respective performance indicators These guidelines are to be used by all participants involved in training to ensure mutual understanding This checklist in not all inclusive and is not meant to limit the duties to be reviewed The job tasks entitled Other is intended for local use and adaptation G 1 1 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q a During skill checks place check marks in the columns SATISFACTORY NEEDS IMPROVEMENT and UNSATISFACTORY The terms are defined as follows 1 SATISFACTORY A checkmark in this column indicates that the trainee s observed performance in the session s meets expected performance requirements and indicates that the trainee demonstrates the ability to work independently for this perform
299. rse operational impact concerning safety of flight or safety in the workplace The FWO shall forward all reports to the ATCFO This form shall also be completed for wildlife reports to include reports from ground vehicles and aircraft See Figure 2 3 3 REFERENCE OPNAVINST 3750 6 2 304 AIR TRAFFIC ACTIVITY REPORTS For Radar totals shall be written in the bottom right corner of each block and circled b In the event of an ATAA outage the traffic count shall be maintained on a single clicker and the total added to the facility log at the end of the day REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 10 1 3 1 FAA JO 7210 3 Chapter 12 Sections 2 4 2 305 CLASS ROSTER The class roster MCAS Form 3722 7 is used to record training sessions that involve more than one trainee See Figure 2 3 6 2 306 FACILITY RECOMMENDATION The Facility Recommendation Form MCAS Form 3722 9 is used to recommend facility system improvements in conjunction with the Procedure 5 Feb 15 Change 1 Evaluation Program The forms are located in the PEP binder See Figure 2 3 7 REFERENCE ATCFM paragraph 1 103 2 307 FWO CHECKLIST The FWO checklist MCAS Form 3722 11 is used to prepare the oncoming crew in the assignment of personnel and the status of the airfield equipment weather and expected traffic See Figure 2 3 8 2 308 SUA ACTIVATION LOGS a b When Range Control Big Rock is closed normally on weekends the Radar Midwatch
300. s Civilian and military aircraft shall not be authorized to use the sub areas concurrently except in cases when not conducting hazardous activities Unless otherwise scheduled military operations within R 5306A shall be on a VFR concurrent use basis Extreme vigilance shall be maintained as numerous military and civilian aircraft use these areas concurrently All participating aircraft shall contact BIG ROCK 244 8 prior to entering or exiting R 5306A Once established within the restricted area the pilot shall monitor 244 8 and is responsible for the conduct of the mission squawking the assigned code and remaining within the approved area of operation The following restrictions apply when operating within the restricted area 1 Aircraft except those scheduled to use BT 9 or BT 11 shall remain outside of a five nautical mile radius from the center of either target 2 R 5306A is divided into sub areas Pilots using this restricted area shall be familiar with the sub areas and procedures Authorization to fly in the following sub areas must be requested from BIG ROCK by area name a AREA 1 That portion of R 5306A from 1000 feet to 3100 feet MSL within 15NM of Cherry Point TACAN This area is used for radar AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 approaches to runway 23R at Cherry Point and instrument approaches to Michael J Smith Airport AREA 1 1000 3100 25 WITHIN 15 DME k b SUB AREA 3A Th
301. s SFER is on REJECT NOT YOUR CONTROL PR PROGRESS REPORT 01 0218 PR ROMAN31 NKT180010 If Sector FDIO Eligibility Rules SEFR are on and FDIO may send a PR if they have received a strip by normal printout routing or by strip request message Field 18 may contain 1 Fix 2 Time is optional the computer will input current time REJECT NOT YOUR CONTROL To update the status of A fix entered in Field 18 must be on the route of INVALID FIX an active flight It may flight of the named aircraft be used to release a flight from hold A time entered must be no more than 30 INVALID TIME minutes earlier or no more than 5 minutes beyond present time H 1 5 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q RB RESTORE ARTS 0113 The Restore ARTS Database message is format REJECT NOT ADAPTED DATABASE and logic checked An acceptable message results in an accept response being returned to the sender and the transmission of all current flight plan data to the specified ARTS facility RF REQUEST ARTS 010213 RF OTIS12 ILM The ARTS Facility Identifier must be three REJECT NOT ADAPTED TRANSFER alphanumeric characters To force the transmission The identifier must match an identifier in the REJECT INVALID ARTS of Flight Plan Data to an computer storage and be one that the flight is ARTS Facility intended for RS REMOVE STRIP 0102 RS MARS911 02 AI
302. s 8 9 or 10 This shall be the same minute as the time that the relieved controller signs off the same minute after position responsibilities have been moved from one operating position to another or the minute the position is reopened INITIALS Enter the operating initials of controller or trainee assigned to the position for training or skill check TIME OFF Enter the UTC time that the controller or trainee has completed the training or skill check CODE Enter the appropriate code listed below These codes are defined as follows T Identifies a trainee or developmental controller who is unqualified to perform the full range of duties and responsibilities being provided Trainees work under the direct supervision of a qualified ATCS and do not work alone F Identifies a trainee receiving OJF This trainee is monitoring the ATCS to acquaint himself herself with the functions and operations of the position and or area of specialization Identifies controllers receiving a skill check from Supervisory or Staff personnel Skill check time is not added to target hours REMARKS If position is combined enter 1 Letter code s of the position s being combined to this position This information and any changes shall be repeated for each entry to maintain the continuity of the log 1 Final Control positions shall not be combined with any other position 2 Associate positions are considered closed if not operation
303. s brief RD MCAS FORM 3722 11 01 2015 Supersedes Previous Edition 2 3 12 Figure 2 3 8 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 15 Aug 13 0r0r 99r DOd ONIINGAHOS 1VHLN3D 313T1dWOO9 NAHM 2662 997 LV ONIINGAHOS 1VHIN3O OL XV3 uo jou zeu JO siseq euin ess uo 1 Aq peufiisse yns Aue sewa z SJON QUOU Jequunu uoissiu OU J Sewa ui nd jequunu uoissiul J L OJON 90 11 EL ZZLE WHO3 SVOW 17 99 4 HVQVU DOd 21 SMYVN3Y 2 LNO AWIL Z SWIL Viv NOISSIN INIOd AHH3HO SVOW jo 907 NOLLVALLOV VAS ATIVG 9 Figure 2 3 2 3 13 15 Aug 13 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL TOWER VISIBILITY OBSERVATION LOG DATE MCAS FORM 3722 14 4 01 Supersedes Previous Edition 2 3 14 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Figure 2 3 10 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Figure 2 3 11 2 3 15 15 Aug 13 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Electronic Library Log DVD HD Completed Computer Name WDCHPT410792 WDCHPT410916 WDCHPT410639 WDCHPT410926 WDCHPT410948 WDCHPT410914 WDCHPT410668 WDCHPT410624 WDCHPT410572 WDCHPT410781 WDCHPT410615 Flight Planning FWO Form 3722 18 08 2012 Copy of DVD 2 3 16 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Figure 2 3 12 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL
304. s is the area where the selector must rest The purpose is to deselect the active box and to prevent inadvertent editing 6 325 PRIMARY RADAR IDENTIFICATION The tower request for IFR release shall suffice as verbal notification of a rolling call for the purpose of radar identification In the event the tower releases another aircraft before the IFR departure rolls the tower shall advise APE Ifa GCA aircraft will be departing prior to the released aircraft Tower shall add the phrase After the Traffic permitting Tower will provide a rolling call for VFR departures REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 3 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 326 REPORTING LASER ILLUMINATION OF AIRCRAFT a When notified of an unauthorized laser illumination the FWO will ensure the following 1 Broadcast on all appropriate frequencies a general caution every five minutes for twenty minutes following the last report PHRASEOLOGY Unauthorized laser illumination event location altitude color direction 2 Broadcast on the ATIS for one hour following the last report PHRASEOLOGY Unauthorized laser illumination event UTC time altitude color direction EXAMPLE Unauthorized laser illumination event at 01002 6 mile final runway 14R 1 500 feet green laser from the northwest 3 Report the following to ZDC Watch Supervisor 703 771 3470 Date and time of event
305. s may be necessary in an emergency but may cause the aircraft to depart the prepared surface during rollout Maximum wind for taxi and tow is 30 knots d ARRESTING GEAR BARRIERS The aircraft is not normally permitted to taxi or takeoff over a runway arresting gear Lowering or removing cables is preferred prior to an emergency landing A 205 LANDING PROFILES a Runway 23L Routes Displayed TIER2P 150 APP 23L 81846 1556 TIER2P 141 03 23L 21751 1757 Add Remove Set Colors SSWANQUARTER NATIONAL WILDLIFE REFUGE A 2 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q b Runway 23L Missed Approach Route Overlays Routes Displayed EI B2P96004 TIER2P 142 C4 231 NKT G1759 1773 E B2P9A004 TIER2P 143 C3 4 23L NKT 21774 17625 1 B2PS0004 TIER2P 144 63 4 23L NKT SHORT Z1782 1790 Add Remove Set Color NOTE The Go Around for R23L is also the routing for Go Arounds on 23R Individual segments attach to the Go Around routing to re establish the RO 4 for final approach and landing on 23R A 2 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q 15 Aug 13 KNKT R23L MISSED APPROACH Engine out R23L options from Go Around routes in Red Engine out R23L options from Go Around routes in Red KNKT R23L ENGINE OUT STRAIGHT IN Route Overlays Routes Displayed TIER2P 141 C3 231 NKT 21751
306. s of AC systems 1 and 2 and if a detectable hazard exists at the radar AC amp HAZ site Any red light results is a system alarm and must be acknowledged Provides control and status of Primary Surveillance Radar PSR channel B A green light indicates PSR PSR B is in the on line mode A red light indicates PSR B is faulted An amber light indicates PSR B is in the maintenance mode Provides control and status of Secondary Surveillance Radar SSR channel B A green light SSR B indicates SSR B is in the online mode A red light indicates SSR B is faulted An amber light indicates SSR B is in the maintenance mode Provides control and status of the Site Control and Data Interface SCDI channel A green light SCDI B indicates the SCDI B is in the on line mode A red light indicates SCDI B is faulted An amber light indicates SCDI B is in the maintenance mode POWER STATUS Indicator showing the source of power supply to the radar equipment SECURITY Indicates an intrusion has been detected in the remote site E G or pedestal room ANTENNA Controls and indicates the rotation of the radar antenna POLARIZER Controls and indicates the polarization of the radar signal 7 2 3 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q Controls and indicates the Auto or Manual selection of linear or circular polarization In the Auto POLARIZER CONTROL mode the ASR 11 system will automatically switch bet
307. s qualified on one or more of the positions that are combined 4 106 TRAINEE RESPONSIBILITIES The trainee shall a Actively participate in training to achieve qualification b Perform operational assignments in order to maintain proficiency and currency c Review discuss and make suggestions to enhance the training plan with the other members of the training team d Ensure that all aspects of the training plan are understood e Review discuss and sign evaluations f Immediately advise a supervisor of any extenuating circumstance s that might impede training progress g Be physically and mentally prepared to receive OJT exercise initiative and study to ensure satisfactory training progress and qualification h Verify that all OJT OJF times are recorded accurately i Engage in OJT only on positions that have been assigned j Be receptive to training performance feedback from OJTIs supervisors 4 107 LOCAL QUALIFICATION STANDARDS The Training and Readiness Supplement outlines the Local Qualification Standards LQS for each position The appropriate portions of the T amp R AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 Supplement shall be filled out prior to any phase test being issued Ensure the last page of the T amp R Supplement is filled out correctly as each phase of the qualification process occurs After the trainee is qualified the last page of the T amp R Supplement must be turned i
308. s shown in Figure 4 3 2 At a minimum the Training Plan shall include requirements team responsibilities time limits time frames and individual training needs b Any modifications to the Training Plan shall be discussed with the trainee and documented as an addendum to the original Training Plan c Retention of Training Plans shall be in accordance with Section 3 of this chapter REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 2 1 1 4 307 LESSON FORMAT The T amp R Supplements are based on a standard progression through each branch as listed in the T amp R Directive As result many of LTGs LQSs for LC are covered in the Training teams need to be aware of this when deciding to begin a trainee on a senior position These T amp R Supplements should be present during OJT sessions in order to properly document Position Skills 4 3 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL P3722 1Q c Progression Benchmarks A list of tasks that the training team is required to perform at specific points in the training progression 4 308 PERFORMANCE SKILL CHECK Trainee a Performance skill checks shall be used to 1 Compare the knowledge and skill levels of a trainee to those required for qualification 2 Identify those areas that improvement to achieve qualification require b A performance skill check shall occur at 50 75 and 100 of the OJT Time Limit on each position for which the trai
309. separation is assured before and after the application of visual separation This may be applied by the tower or by a pilot visually observing another aircraft and being instructed to maintain visual separation with that aircraft REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 7 2 1 b When the local controller cannot provide visual separation between two departures or a departure and a full stop arrival he she shall advise the departure controller when requesting release When requesting release of an IFR departure the tower shall state the departure runway when the aircraft will be departing other than the duty runway 15 Aug 15 Change 2 PHRASEOLOGY Request release runway 32R call sign Request release runway 23L call sign Unable Visual Separation with traffic 5 404 STANDARD IFR DEPARTURE CLIMB OUT Issue the following standard departure headings and altitudes when issuing clearances to departing IFR aircraft Runwa Heading Initial Alt 32R TL 290 TR 350 5000 14R Rwy Heading 5000 23L Rwy Heading 5000 SL Rwy Heading 5000 NOTE Initial departure heading of aircraft is dependent on the aircraft s initial route of flight For example if an aircraft is departing runway 32R and the first enroute fix is east of the NKT 320 radial a 350 heading will be assigned NOTE When APE or AR issues a turn to a departing aircraft on runway heading that turn will be 159 or more CAUTION When departing an off duty runway t
310. setup At no time shall FC use the Multi Sensor setting for Surveillance Approaches to any airport REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 5 4 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 P3722 1Q magi 019 TT 16 Figure 6 3 9 magi 9140 NEUSE 170 Figure 6 3 10 magi 0140 TK OTP Figure 6 3 11 magi 019 TK 150 Figure 6 3 12 magi 0140 LK 130 Figure 6 3 13 magi 0140 16 Figure 6 3 14 maga 915 21 R NKT 1302 OA Figure 6 3 15 mag91 0140 NIM R 60 1208 Figure 6 3 16 6 3 16 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 P3722 1Q 6 333 PRECIPITATION INTENSITY a FAA JO 7110 65 requires precipitation to be described in 4 levels Based on these descriptions and the decibels of reflectivity dbZ for the 5 11 use the following chart to correctly describe precipitation This chart is available on the VIDS PRECIPITATION INTENSITY LIGHT MODERATE HEAVY EXTREME 6 334 SINGLE FREQUENCY APPROACH PROCEDURES a To ensure radio frequency changes are not given once an aircraft commences an approach a Single Frequency Approach SFA will be afforded to all single piloted turboje
311. st be a minimum of two and a REJECT MESSAGE TOO LONG maximum of four field for each departure within the DM An asterisk may be suffixed to the flight identification or to the departure point if used H 1 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 ATCFacO P3722 1Q The asterisk suppresses any PDR The flight identification must match one already PENDING AT SOURCE in storage for a proposed flight otherwise an error response is received from the computer If an error is pending on an accepted AM only REJECT CORRECTION PENDING the source of the AM may input a DM on the AT SOURCE flight with the exception of ARTS FDIO may send DMs when SFER parameter is on REJECT NOT YOUR CONTROL for flight from airports adapted to their area or have received a flight strip from normal strip routing or from strip request SR message Time must be within programmed parameters of 07 TIM INVALID present clock time FP FLIGHT PLAN To File Proposed Flight Plan 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 FP MARS21 3 HAR P 250 NKT P1500 180 NKT NKT134027 09 10 11 To File Active Flight Plan 01 02 03 04 05 Field 02 Proposed cannot duplicate in REJECT DUPLICATE FP IN 06 07 08 storage having same departure point SYSTEM 10 11 An active FP cannot duplicate another active FP 02 AID INVALID DUPLICATE FLIGHT ACTIVE indicated IF the P time entered Field 07 is more than 30 optional field minutes in t
312. t 2 8 SCT Scattered 3 8 4 8 BKN Broken 5 8 7 8 OVC Overcast 8 8 CB Cumulonimbus When present TCU Towering Cumulus When present SKC will be reported at manual stations The abbreviation CLR shall be used at automated stations when no clouds below 12 000 feet are reported B 2 3 Figure B 2 4 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 2 4 15 Aug 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q APPENDIX C Letters of Agreement Procedure LOA Agencies Subject Date NKT Dogwood Farm ATC Procedures 931101 NKT VAW 120 PPA 980501 16 SOS DO AC 130 Hot Guns 980725 ZDC 4 Fighter Wing 2d MAW KIWI 990329 NKT EWN Tower Mr Tolson Aerobatic Practice Area 010215 ZDC MCABE 2d MAW Stereo Plans 010517 NKT FACSFAC VACAPES Haystack amp Croatan One 030909 CNATRA Reduced Runway Separation 031019 NKT Seymour Johnson AFB Approach Services 040322 NKT VX 20 Global Hawk Divert Procedures 060224 NKT 2d MAW R 5306A C 061206 NKT 2d MAW Washington ARTCC Hatteras FMOA 091022 CampLej RMD NKT Range Management 100308 NKT NCA Radar Feeds 100315 EWN Control Procedures 101211 NJM NKT RMD Bogue Operations 110707 MARSOC NKT Stone Bay UAS Operations 110707 NKT MACS Time Share 110815 ZDC NCA NKT Approach Control Services 111017 ZD
313. t LOA FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3 10 13 6 315 DEPARTURE HEADINGS When APE or AR issues a turn to a departing aircraft on runway heading that turn shall be 15 or more REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 5 8 3 ATCFM paragraph 4 304 6 316 CHERRY POINT WAVEOFFS a When waveoff issued more than 3 miles on final PHRASEOLOGY RUNWAY 32L call sign climb and maintain 1600 turn left heading 230 acknowledge RUNWAY 23R call sign climb and maintain 1600 turn right heading 320 acknowledge RUNWAY 14L call sign climb and maintain 1600 turn right heading 230 acknowledge RUNWAY 5R call sign tower directs waveoff climb and maintain 1600 turn right heading 140 acknowledge 5 Feb 15 Change 1 NOTE For no gyro approaches replace the assigned heading with the phrase for three zero seconds b When waveoff issued at 3 miles or less on final or if tower clearance is not received by 2 miles 1 mile if tower issued a continue PHRASEOLOGY ALL RUNWAYS OVERHEAD call sign Tower clearance cancelled or tower clearance not received climb and maintain 1000 at the field boundary climb and maintain 1600 fly runway heading acknowledge ALL RUNWAYS NO OVERHEAD call sign Tower clearance cancelled or tower clearance not received climb and maintain 1600 fly runway heading acknowledge NOTE 1 When waveoff instructions are issued ensure waveoff button on VISCOM is activated 2 O
314. t activate the smoke removal system e Remove Handheld Radios Remove the two handheld radios from the tower Deliver one to the FWO and the other to the paddles vehicle f Emergency Egress The internal stairwell is the primary means to evacuate the Control Tower In the event the internal stairwell is unusable for any reason descend via the outside ladder on the Northeast side of the tower Do not use the elevator g Resume Pattern Control A local controller shall acquire a paddles vehicle and proceed to the grass area between Echo Taxiway and the Northeast Pad to assume pattern control this will be referred to as the remote tower Aircraft will be resequenced into the pattern by Cherry Point Approach h Communications Arrival Control shall coordinate with the remote tower via the handheld radios for any intrafacility coordination In the event messages need to be relayed to other agencies from the remote tower radar will be responsible for passing the information to the appropriate agency 5 7 3 ATCFacO P3722 1Q AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 5 7 4 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Chapter 6 RADAR Section 1 GENERAL 6 100 GENERAL MCAS Cherry Point approach control airspace is depicted in figure 6 1 8 radar capability provides normal radar coverage out to 60NM and secondary radar with SIF ou
315. t aircraft on an IFR flight plan in accordance with section 4 7 3 of FAA JO 7110 65 b APE has jurisdiction over the assignment of all discrete SFA frequencies c Buttons 12 through 20 excluding 16 are designated as discrete SFA frequencies 6 3 17 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q ey 6 3 18 15 Aug 15 Change 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q Section 4 NONRADAR 6 400 GENERAL The information contained in this section will be used as the standard for all air traffic personnel at NKT during a radar outage REFERENCE FAA Order 7130 3 6 401 STRIP MARKING Information recorded on the flight progress strips FAA Form 7230 7 2 shall be entered in the NOTE AIA is needed for statistical data at EWN W95 HSE and MRH REFERENCE FAA JO 7210 3 paragraph 12 4 1 Not used 9 Altitude in hundreds of feet and last assigned heading 9A Destination airport remarks arrival correspondingly numbered spaces runway if other that active See Figure 6 4 1 1 5 8 9 10 11 12 2 2 6 13 14 15 3 4 7 9A 16 17 18 a Arrivals 1 Aircraft identification an 4 2 Revision number FDIO 11 Not used 2A Strip request originator FDIO sector or 12 Type landing L T F O Z LZ TZ OZ position that requested a strip be printed P EEE 13 Landing check issued EFC 14 Time enter
316. t aircraft parking Helo Pad and helo spots A D NOTE VAL vehicles will require authorization from GC to provide escort services for transient aircraft or vehicles GSE while operating on Hotel and Bravo taxiways b Entry to the ILS critical areas as depicted in figure 5 1 1 will only be approved with prior coordination from the ground controller When weather conditions are below 800 2 and the ILS approach is in use the critical areas are unusable REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3 7 1 5 302 VTL PAD OPERATIONS a The AOM states AV 8s to the maximum extent possible shall conform to the normal jet traffic patterns for the runway in use when approaching or departing the pads In order to provide the most effective and efficient service to the customer and flexibility to the controller right or 5 3 1 left traffic may be utilized to the pads at pilot request or controller discretion b The intent is not to employ this flexibility arbitrarily when it is not necessary or has not been requested by the pilot c When employing a pattern which is contrary to the normal jet pattern attempt to have the harriers remain within the airport boundary within the ends of the runways d Contact Approach CCL shall advise RAA when a contact approach to a pad has landed REFERENCE AOM paragraph 3011 2 b and 3010 7 ATCFM paragraph 6 302 5 303 COMBAT AIRCRAFT LOADING AREA AirOps will notify ATC via the
317. t one letter CYYD Latitude Longitude Fix dddd L d 2430N 8915W S and E latitude and longitude must be entered 10 RTE FORMAT Radial Distance dddd L 2430 8915 when applicable If one of the optional L s for N NKT180025 or W is used both must be entered ddd ddd Element Separator or EWN V139 A period is the element separator between unlike 10 RTE NOT STORED EWN ISO elements Fix Rte Two periods are element separators for like elements Fix Fix Airway aala a a V45 178 Coded Route aala a a NKT12 Coded routes are defined as adapted routes for a a a NYGO2 specific missions SID SANDE1 If used SID name must be second element in Field 10 RTE FORMAT 10 STAR FORTS1 If used STAR name must be next to last element in Field 10 Incomplete Route Indicator XXX Used to permit initial processing of strips when elements other than the first postable fix are in error or nonadaptable Visual Flight Rules VFR VFR and or DVFR when filed as second element in 10 RTE NOT STORED Indicator Defense Visual DVFR Field 10 must be followed with a fix When filed Flight Rules Indicator as other than the second element processing stops at the VFR DVFR element Re entry Operator Ra d R4 The Re entry Operator must be suffixed only to a 10 RTE FORMAT Sd d 53 coded route d d must be between 0 and 15 Rd d Sd inclusive Either or both operators may be d suffixed Stereo
318. t to 240NM depending on target altitude The Radar Branch is responsible for the coordination and control of all VFR flight following requests and IFR traffic within the facility s area of responsibility These responsibilities include but are not limited to the handling of all arriving departing and enroute aircraft of MCAS Cherry Point New Bern MCAS New River Michael J Smith MCALF Bogue Field Ocracoke Island Billy Mitchell 6 101 AIRSPACE a Approach East Departure Sector APE The Approach East Departure Sector airspace is depicted in Figure 6 1 1 and described in the ZDC letter of agreement This sector includes the active departure corridor as depicted in Figure 6 1 2 and described below The subareas within R 5306A are shown in figure 6 1 4 1 Runway 5 clockwise from the 360 radial to the 090 radial within 10 nautical miles not to include R 5306A and the NKT CDSA 2 Runway 23 clockwise from the 180 radial to the 270 radial within 10 nautical miles not to include R 5306C and the NKT CDSA 3 Runway 32 clockwise from the 270 radial to the 360 radial within 10 nautical miles not to include APW airspace and the NKT CDSA 6 1 1 4 Runway 14 clockwise from the 090 radial to the 180 radial within 10 nautical miles not to include the NKT CDSA b Approach North Sector The Approach North Sector airspace is depicted in Figure 6 1 3 c Approach West Sector The Approach West S
319. tch stored type 01 MSG INVALID MESSAGE TYPE If valid message type but not legal from this 01 MSG ILLEGAL SOURCE source 02 AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION La a a N63TT First Character a letter total 2 20 characters 02 FLID FORMAT AID a a NIKEL31 Must match stored aircraft identification except MARS21 for initial FP entry 02 FLID NOT STORED Limit one FP same aircraft identification for each departure point 02 FLID DUPLICATION Element Separator Departure Point aa a a W95 Used in AM and HM messages a a NKT a a a NCA a Element Separator 02 FLID FORMAT Computer Identification ddL or ddd 056 Computer number not available for FP however 02 FLID NOT STORED 222 should be used in other situations instead of AID Beacon code dddd 2122 Field Separator Space 03 AIRCRAFT DATA 2 9 Alphanumerics 03 TYP FORMAT TYP Number of aircraft and or d d or 10 When heavy jet indicator is present the maximum Heavy Jet Indicator d L or L 9H number of aircraft in flight is 9 Element Separator 9H The heavy jet indicator when present must immediately precede the element separator Type of Aircraft aa a a HAR H46 C130 Element Separator Separates type aircraft and equipment suffix Airborne Equipment Suffix As Adapted CV58 T Must be adapted equipment Qualifier 03 TYP ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT T38 P QUALIFIER Field Separator Space 04 BEACON CODE dddd 1100 This field Octal only 04 BCN FORMAT BCN 0600 Field Separator Spa
320. te in the runway number in the next sequential block 12 or 13 which pertains to the departure climb out instructions issued to the aircraft annotated in block 9 Line one line out departure climb out instructions in block 9 that do not pertain as necessary X 5 TL 270 1 This strip indicates two different situations Situation 1 Initially non standard departure climb out instructions were issued for a planned departure from runway 32 then the departure runway was changed to runway 5 with the same non standard departure climb out instructions for a runway 5 departure OR Situation 2 Initially standard departure climb out instructions were issued for a planned departure from runway 32 then the departure runway was changed to 5 with non standard departure climb out instructions issued X CTR 099 TL 270 2 This strip indicates that initially nonstandard departure climb out instructions were issued for a planned departure from runway 32 then the departure runway was changed to runway 5 with non standard departure climb out instructions for a runway 5 departure AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q Section 6 COORDINATION PROCEDURES 5 600 GENERAL Reserved 5 601 HOURLY WEATHER FORECAST a Coordination between weather and FD for hourly weather reports are no longer necessary due to the automated weather updates available on the VIDS FD will enter t
321. ted ATC services from those military aircraft participants This separation can come in the form of lateral separation but mostly it will have to be done vertically due to the aircraft s assigned target run into BT 9 or BT 11 Aircraft that check in outbound to the Warning Area shall be advised of the altitude to maintain and advised to check in with Cherry Point Approach on their inbound turn to obtain their altitude restrictions as needed The R 5306A area common frequency 244 8 is another recognized method of informing aircraft of the CORE MOA altitude restrictions 6 613 ATCAA PROCEDURES a The Approach Controller must identify the MARSA Authority for each mission evolution in the ATCAA 1 MARSA Authority will identify specific ATCAA s and SUA with altitudes requested Q MARSA Authority will identify other participants approved into the ATCAA b One MARSA Authority ACID has been identified the Approach Controller will release the requested ATCAA using the following phraseology PHRASEOLOGY ACID MAINTAIN BLOCK altitude THROUGH altitude RELEASED TO YOU AT THIS TIME MONITOR GUARD WHILE IN THE ATCAA REPORT FIVE MINUTES PRIOR TO EXITING WITH TOTAL NUMBER OF PARTICIPANTS FREQUENCY CHANGE APPROVED 6 6 10 15 Aug 15 Change 2 EXAMPLE OTIS01 Burner ATCAA block FL180 through FL230 released to you at this time monitor GUARD while in the Burner ATCAA report five minutes prio
322. ternal stairwell In case of a fire alarm at least one person shall leave the tower to check for smoke or fire in the tower structure investigate the source of the alarm and report information to the personnel remaining in the cab The TS is in charge of firefighting within the tower One 20 pound Halon extinguisher is located in the tower cab ladder well near the top a Clear Traffic Pattern The Local Controller shall instruct all aircraft in the CDSA to contact Cherry Point Approach for reentry instructions PHRASEOLOGY The control tower is being evacuated aircraft within the Cherry Point Class D Surface Area maintain VFR depart the pattern and contact Approach on 124 1 268 7 for reentry instructions AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 b Stop Ground Traffic The Ground Controller shall instruct all aircraft to hold their positions and remain clear of all runways PHRASEOLOGY The control tower is being evacuated All aircraft hold your position and remain clear of all runways Remain this frequency for resumption of services c Secure Power Shut off all power to the control tower main power source is located in the cab and is clearly marked d Activate Smoke Removal Smoke entering the tower from a fire outside the tower through the air conditioning vents can be removed by activation of the smoke removal system overhead exhaust fan If the fire is inside the tower do no
323. tes per position LCpl Jones is training on GC only trainee is required to receive 90 minutes of OJT Sim per shift b The responsible FWO or Crew Chief shall ensure that a comment is annotated on a Position Evaluation when a trainee does not meet these minimums with an explanation of why NOTE Daily evaluations are a major contributing factor to any CEB Incomplete or lack of explanation may not afford the CEB a clear picture as to the circumstances affecting the trainee s progress 4 304 SELECTION QUALIFICATION AND EVALUATION OF OJTIs a The selection of OJTIs shall be accomplished as follows 1 To be eligible for selection as an OJTI a candidate shall meet the following minimum qualification criteria a Qualified a minimum of 60 days on positions involved Exception Transferring ATCSs with previous OJTI experience on the same type position shall be qualified on the positions involved for a minimum of 30 days b Current on positions involved c Attend an OJT Instructor Course d Possess MOS 7257 NOTE The requirement to attend the instructor course may be waived until the course becomes available to the individual 4 3 2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q 2 The FWO shall consider at a minimum the following personal attributes prior to recommending a controller for designation as an OJT Instructor a Human relations skills b Communication skills c Motivation
324. the approach end of any runway at pilot s request 5 426 PAD OPERATIONS a Helicopter operations are conducted at the NADEP Pad for delivery or testing of NADEP aircraft This pad is considered a movement area and shall be under positive control by ATC The NADEP Pad is unlit b All other helicopter pads shall be considered inactive until positive coordination between LC GC is initiated to make it active c The Centermat and VTL Pads shall be considered active when LC activates any runway REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 3 11 1 d During IFR conditions and the ILS approach is in use the NADEP Pad is unusable 5 427 CRASH CIRCUIT TEST a Crash Circuit Alpha used to alert essential personnel of an emergency or crash Located on 5 4 8 ATCFacO P3722 1Q position 17 it is normally activated by the FD position This circuit shall be tested once daily at 08151 or when the field opens later than 0815L upon field opening b Crash Circuit Zulu Backup for the Alpha Circuit This circuit shall be tested every Monday morning after the A test This circuit is activated when the receiver is picked up NOTE When the Z circuit is activated the A circuit is disabled c Crash PA A quick alert loud speaker system used to notify Crash Crew SAR and personnel in the operations building of emergency situations Located on position 19 it is normally activated by LC or as directed by the TS The PA shal
325. the military mission unnecessary proliferation of these areas degrades the Special Use Airspace Program and adversely effects the overall efficiency of the national airspace system 6 601 SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS FAA JO 7110 65 prescribes separation requirements from special use and ATC assigned airspace In recognition of the fact that several prohibited and restricted areas are established for security reasons or to contain hazardous activities not directly involving aircraft operations provision is made for exempting these areas from vertical and radar separation minima if the areas have been identified by facility management The intent in prescribing separation requirements from special use and ATC assigned airspace is to establish a buffer between nonparticipating aircraft and aircraft operations inside special use or ATC assigned airspace As such the 6 6 1 buffer serves as an extra safety margin in consideration of possible operational procedural or equipment variances Application of the separation prescribed in FAA JO 7110 65 is not considered necessary whenever the prohibited or restricted airspace does not contain aircraft operations because these areas typically provide an internal buffer based upon the exact type of activity taking place REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 Chapter 9 Section 5 FAA JO 7210 3 CFR Part 91 133 6 602 R 5306A AREAS Approval of sub areas within R 5306 will be on a first come first serve basi
326. the operation of the facility including any abnormal occurrences Prepare Form 7230 4 as follows a This log should be maintained only on the VIDS consoles located in the tower and radar room on the supervisor s position Signatures or handwritten initials shall be in either blue or black ink In the event that the VIDS is out of service handwritten entries shall be printed rather than in script b Make all entries in UTC USING THE FORM a Complete the following items Field names correspond to the fields on the form Page No Date Location Identification Type Facility Operating Position Checked By Chief Time REMARKS Automatically entered by VIDS Automatically entered by VIDS NKT CHERRY POINT NKT RADAR or TOWER ALL Enter the initials of the FWO RS or TS that checks the log the following day Name of appropriate branch chief Enter UTC time for each entry The first entry in the REMARKS section of each day s form shall indicate the employee responsible for the watch and shall be used to show carry over items The controller assuming responsibility for the watch shall sign on using their name e g 1430 J WOODIN ON Entering the name of the employee assuming responsibility for the watch in lieu of entering operating initials serves the same purpose as signing the certification statement at the bottom of the actual form Additionally the employee responsible for the watch at the time that t
327. ting with normal video only x Used to select mode of operation of processor and type video out integrated normal or LAMP DIMMER Potentiometer Used to adjust lamp brightness level for dark environment conditions LAMP TEST Switch Used to apply power momentarily to test all lamps on supervisor s panel VEL OFFSET ON VEL OFFSET OFF Indicator Switch DBL CANC SGL CANC Indicator Switch STAG PRF FIXED PRF Indicator Switch SYSTEM STATUS AFC CHANA CHAN B PROS SYSTEM UNLOCK ONLINE ON LINE FAULT i E FAULT CHANA PRCS ANDE VA CHANA CHANB FAULT FAUT EN l CHANA VEL OFFSE C 10365 GPN wy ES coil icto Br ON OFF PARAMP VeLorrsey 122 6 A Unit of OD 131 UPN Naval Electroni LIN DBL CANC STAG PRF ON Van CSC2 CSC RIGH _ SGL CANC FIXED P BYPASS NORM INTEG mi INTERCON 1 LAMP TEST LAMP DIMMER VOLUME PUSH TO TALK VIDEO 7 2 8 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q PUSH os IT IO NE D SILENCE 23 32 05 14 amp TABLE INTENSITY IN Control Indicator Function FPN 63 REMOTE CONTROL PANEL PUSH TO SILENCE When activated silences audible tone when platform is repositioning IN
328. to result in qualification all applicable job subtasks must be rated as satisfactory or not 15 Aug 15 Change 2 observed If a job subtask is not observed during this session the examiner must document that the trainee has demonstrated satisfactory performance knowledge for that job subtask verbally or through simulation or other methods The position qualification shall be documented on a Performance Evaluation 2 Continuation of OJT 3 Skill enhancement training 4 Suspension of OJT REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 6 2 3 2 4 312 EXAMINERS After successful completion of the written examination the trainee shall receive a qualification skill check by the appropriate position or CTO examiner as listed below The examiner will brief the trainee when the qualification skill check will take place The FWO GS 13 may request a branch chief to qualify personnel as necessary All Branch Chiefs and GS 13s are designated as position examiners POSITION EXAMINER GC FD Branch Chief or SATCS LC CTO Examiner RADAR Branch Chief or SATCS NOTE The crew SATCS must concur prior to CTO examination REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 Chapter 4 4 313 ADDITIONAL OJT a The ATCFO may authorize additional time for those trainees who did not qualify within the facility s maximum TTM but in the opinion of the training team can qualify within a specified additional time The additional time shall not exceed the maximum
329. tower may provide an aircraft on the daily flight schedule a flight plan to MCAS New River Termination of the flight shall be closed out by direct station to station communication Upon departure FD shall call NCA tower with a local flight departure Provide callsign type and ETA This flight progress strip shall be placed in the FD inactive bay until NCA calls with the down time If the down time has not been received within fifteen minutes of the ETA FD shall call NCA tower for the downtime and write the NCA controllers operating initials in block 14 5 406 SPECIAL VFR PRESS UP Provided visual separation can be applied with other SVFR IFR aircraft local SVFR Press up operations are authorized on the harrier pads without coordination with the radar branch In the event that visual separation cannot be provided the SVFR press up shall be cancelled PHRASEOLOGY Local Special V F R operations in the immediate vicinity of pad are authorized until time maintain Special V F R NOTE All other SVFR requests shall be coordinated with the appropriate radar sector s 5 407 VFR ON TOP a A pilot on an IFR flight plan operating in VFR weather conditions may request VFR ON TOP in lieu of an assigned altitude This would permit the pilot to select an altitude of his her choice subject to any ATC restrictions b Pilots desiring to climb through a cloud haze smoke or other meteorological formation and then either c
330. trates awareness of aircraft equipment capabilities and limitations that affect air traffic control instructions d Uses control procedures that do not place workload or stress on other controllers facilities e Considers subsequent controller requirements f Does not terminate or activate radar control prematurely g Informs aircraft and appropriate personnel of significant situations 3 Priority of duties is understood Properly prioritizes actions according to their significance in the overall traffic situation Performs duties in the order of their importance 4 Control actions correctly planned 5 Positive control of situation provided Takes command of control situations and does not act in a hesitant or unsure manner Observes present and a Demonstrates confidence and takes command of control situations G 1 10 5 Feb 15 Change 1 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL ATCFacO P3722 1Q considers forecasted traffic to predict if an overload may occur and takes appropriate action to prevent of lessen the situation b Maintains positive control during stressful situations c Recognizes potential overload situations Job Task TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT Job Subtask Indicator 1 Prompt action taken to correct errors 2 Effective traffic flow maintained Takes into account aircraft characteristics and their effect on traffic control Uses runways and taxiways to
331. tribution The system has design redundancy and back up battery support to insure continuous service A totally programmable system configuration is stored and modified by a 386SX based file server 7 1 1 over a local area network and a gateway interface to the system wide dual data bus b System Control Unit The basic IVCSS system has two SCU workstations The ATC Supervisor SCU is used to maintain the system configuration Local maps for each Operator Position and global maps for the site are created at this workstation using interactive menu driven screens The central equipment configuration is maintained through the ATC SCU System monitoring is handled by the SCU workstations detecting processing problems bus errors and hardware failure Any detected hardware failure produces audible alarms at both the ATC and maintenance SCU The maintenance SCU prints out all major failures and displays every system software conflict in a real time mode The system software also includes a Traffic Data Collection TDC program that monitors Operator Position activity The program collects the traffic data stores and reports the information 7 103 CRASH EMERGENCY ALERT SYSTEM a Crash Circuit Alpha used to alert essential personnel of an emergency or crash Located on position 17 it is normally activated by the FT position This circuit is tested daily at 0815L b Crash Circuit Zulu Backup for the Alpha Circuit This circuit
332. tures from MRH will be routed via the MRH 360 bearing from to intercept the EWN R 110 to EWN b All arrivals to MRH will be routed via the EWN R 110 to intercept the MRH 180 course to c The airspace to be protected for this routing is listed in figure 6 4 4 6 404 NKT DEPARTURES Airspace to be protected for NKT departures will be governed by distances that have been determined on four TACAN radials Figures 6 4 3 and 6 4 4 list the DME requirements for NKT departures 6 4 3 ATCFacO P3722 1Q 6 405 HOLDING PATTERNS AND APPROACHES a Airspace to be protected for instrument approaches into NKT EWN and NCA are listed in figures 6 4 2 6 4 3 and 6 4 5 b Holding pattern descriptions and data used to calculate protected airspace are listed in figure 6 4 6 When holding pattern airspace is not a factor use the Divergence Distance Minima listed in figure 6 4 7 REFERENCE FAA JO 7110 65 paragraph 6 5 1 6 406 APPROACH TIMES Approach duration times have been established to create a standard to be used by all controllers when determining an Expect Further Clearance EFC time Use the table below HI TACAN Z RWY 32L 11 MIN HI TACAN Y RWY 32L 6 MIN TACAN RWY 32L 6 MIN ILS RWY 23R 6 MIN NDB RWY 14 MRH 10 MIN VOR RWY 4 22 EWN 10 MIN TACAN RWY 5 23 NCA 6 MIN LOC RWY 4 EWN 10 MIN 6 407 RESERVED 6 408 EWN NCA OPERATIONS When NKT radar is out of service a Advise NCA that NKT radar is out of service b
333. udent after grading for review and discussion Once a review of the test is complete the test will be returned to the training department for final disposition ATCFacO P3722 1Q b A trainee who fails a written test less than 80 correct shall receive additional training prior to repeating any test In the event of a failure trainees shall complete the same test with a passing score of 90 better administered by the training department Should a trainee fail a subsequent written test a CEB may be convened to determine the trainee s future in this MOS NOTE Any trainee that fails a LTG test shall wait a minimum of two working days prior to retest Any trainee that fails a final exam shall wait a minimum of four working days prior to repeating the alternate final exam c All tests are developed and maintained by the training department and updated as needed based on changes to various manuals Testing is normally available from 0800 1600 Monday Friday Crews may develop their own tests to augment the facility tests but must not be used in lieu of the facility tests d All controllers that are designated as Radar Supervisors or Tower Supervisors shall complete a written examination annually during December REFERENCE MCIEASTO 3722 3 4 110 ANNUAL TRAINING PLAN The annual training plan is published as a facility directive at the beginning of each calendar year This plan includes the following topics a Officer t
334. uming the watch a The ATCFO is responsible for maintaining posting and updating all information that needs to be in this area Any information that will be posted shall be routed through the ATCFO for formatting and signature i e operational E mail will be formatted into a Facility Directive The FWO will be responsible for briefing and training this information o WN eje w N F pa H 1 4 4 gt w UJ Nr P w Dr w PUN Figure 1 4 2 NOTE E mail may be used to expedite dissemination but a facility directive or memo should be published within 48 hours to replace the E mail b Any information of an immediate nature passed by AirOps will also be routed to the ATCFO within 48 hours to allow the ATCFO to format and disseminate the information properly The person posting the information will be responsible for completing the Posting Record located in the front of each binder c The briefing area contains at a minimum the following information m 2 Operations Directives and Memos 5 Feb 15 Change 1 1 418 OPERATIONAL CREW BRIEFINGS a Operational crew briefings will begin 10 minutes prior to all 0700 1500 and 1500 2300 shifts The brief shall include the entire crew which is scheduled to assume the shift The FWO may excuse personnel from the bri
335. watch FWO is responsible for obtaining and distributing the forms within the ATC facility See Figure 2 3 21 2 320 AIRFIELD ACTIVITIES Airfield Activities are published regularly by Airfield Operations via e mail All FWOs and Branch Chiefs receive these e mails automatically A clipboard is located in the IFR room for posting the latest information Normally the activities include Quiet Hours Airfield Closures Space Shuttle Launches Foxtrot Ops and CALA Ops but any activity that affects the airport may be included See Figure 2 3 22 2 321 WEEKLY TRAINING REPORT A training report is produced each week normally on Tuesday to document the qualification designation and training status of all crew personnel The report is sent electronically via email to facility personnel The report is also available on the ATC Sharepoint site See Figure 2 3 23 2 322 MONTHLY TRAINING REPORT A monthly training report is produced during the first week of each month to document the performance of the training program for the previous month Other historical information is also included such as personnel gains and losses and assignment of initial and additional MOSs See Figure 2 3 24 2 323 ANNUAL TRAINING REPORT At the completion of each calendar year a report is produced to document the training and qualification statistics for the facility See Figure 2 3 25 5Feb 15 Change 1 2 324 MCIEAST MONTHLY REPORT The Training Branch sh
336. ween linear and circular polarization as detected weather builds or dissipates Press the Acknowledge button to acknowledge the alarm or status change It is necessary to press BORNOWEEDGE the ACK button for each change in status PANEL Indicates the status of the RCP and the comm link to the panel VOLUME UP Increases the volume of alarms in 8 step increments RELEASE CONTROL If the RCP is in control pressing the release control button will relinquish control of the RCP If the RCP is not in control pressing the button will have no effect TAKE CONTROL If control of the RCP has been released an amber light will illuminate Press the Take Control button to transfer control to the RCP A green light indicates the RCP has control of the ASR 11 system Figure 7 2 3 vary this control to cause these types of echoes to be canceled 7 203 BEACON INTERROGATOR c In a PAR approach the course deviation The Beacon Interrogator Control Panel is located must not exceed 30 feet or 0 2 degrees whichever is i ition greater at the runway threshold The range is used to select the beacon channel and range of the information given must be accurate within plus or interrogator The altimeter setting is controlled by minus 2 percent Also the PAR radar must be the RATCF DATR input data therefore the altimeter capable of detecting an aircraft on the runway portion of this paneLis not used See fieure 7 2 4 centerline extended
337. without a PPR inform the aircraft to immediately contact base operations If a civilian aircraft lands without a PPR tower shall notify PMO over the crash phone circuit 1 Dial PMO only do not use the all call feature of the crash phone PHRASEOLOGY Security alert security alert call sign type aircraft landed runway rwy without a PPR 2 Any additional information such as reason that the aircraft landed or pilot s intentions should also be included in the PMO notification to assist them in determining the appropriate course of action e PMO notification is not required for emergency and or medical evacuation aircraft that land without a PPR unless the aircraft is deemed suspicious by the supervisor NOTE The PPR number is based on the Julian Date number of the day of the year followed by a one or two number sequence depending on the order in which the PPR was requested Example PPR 055 05 is the fifth number assigned on 24 Feb REFERENCE AOM paragraph 5007 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL 15 Aug 13 P3722 1Q 2 8 2 5 Feb 15 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL FACILITY MANUAL Change 1 ATCFacO P3722 1Q Chapter 3 SAFETY Section 1 RESPONSIBILITIES 3 100 GENERAL The risk of electrocution and the numerous dangers presented by working in a darkly lit radar room makes the ATC working environment one that requires a heightened sense of safety consciousness Personnel
338. y who in turn shall brief the ATCFO Procedures for reporting Operational Errors and Deviations established by ATC NATOPS and amplified in this section The MCIEAST Form shall be used to the extent possible in compiling information related to the suspected ATC hazard See Figure 2 5 1 REFERENCE NAVAIR 00 80T 114 paragraph 3 8 MCIEASTO P3722 3E 2 501 COMPILING INFORMATION The FWO shall obtain and complete a summary of the pertinent data immediately upon learning of the incident or as soon thereafter as duties permit A reference to the incident shall be logged on the Daily Record of Facility Operation FAA Order 7210 56 contains additional information that may assist during the preliminary investigation REFERENCE FAA Order 7210 56 2 502 WESS AND DMS REQUIREMENTS Reserved 2 503 REPORTING PROCEDURES a The ATCFO shall provide an in depth phoncon email brief to the MCIEAST ATC T amp R Officer within 24 hours of the reported hazard b The ATCFO shall complete a preliminary investigation report within three days 2 504 REPORTING COMMAND CHAIN OF Reserved 2 5 1 2 505 FORWARDING COMMAND CHAIN OF Reserved 2 506 RESPONSIBILITIES When it has been determined that personnel in this facility were responsible for the separation of the aircraft involved regardless of where the operational error deviation occurred the ATCFO shall investigate and prepare the preliminary and final reports Additionally
339. y a sudden increase in wind speed of at least 16 knots which is sustained at 22 knots or more for at least 1 minute 1 Altimeter Setting The altimeter is a measurement of the atmospheric pressure in inches of mercury reported to the nearest hundredth of an inch The altimeter setting is the atmospheric pressure value to which an aircraft s altimeter is set It will indicate the altitude above MSL of the aircraft on the ground at the location for which the value was determined Since atmospheric pressure changes almost constantly throughout a flight the aircraft s altimeter must be reset periodically If this is not done incorrect readings are given by the instrument For example if an aircraft flies from a high pressure area into a low pressure area the altitude reads too high Going from a low to a high pressure area the altimeter reads too low The approximate amount of error in the altimeter readings that is due to a noncurrent setting can be determined for the low B 1 2 ATCFacO P3722 1Q levels of the atmosphere by applying the following corrections Pressure Change Error 1 0 inch of mercury 1000 0 1 inch of mercury 100 0 01 inch of mercury 10 j Wind Warning A warning of sustained winds of 20 33 knots and or wind gusts in excess of 20 knots k Tropical Cyclone Warnings Consecutively numbered bulletins issued by the National Hurricane Center at 6 hour intervals on all named tropical cyclones Warnings will be
340. y communications and hot standby functions into a single set of transmitters and receivers normal operation the radios are connected through the IVCSS to serve as hot standby units and can be individually accessed by the IVCSS in the event of an OCS radio failure In an emergency all ten channels can be switched at the local ECS consoles located in the Control Tower Cab and the to bypass the AN FSA 47 V and IVCSS systems entirely and provide emergency communications capability directly to the ECS consoles The MCAS Cherry Point ECS incorporates six active channels and utilizes fixed frequency transmitters and receivers plus tunable transceivers located in the Tower Equipment Room below the Control Tower Cab a When in ECS mode all radios and assorted functions operate as a single stand alone system All functions and operations are done through the Operator Control Group OK 532 at the supervisor s position in the IFR room or the OK 332 in the tower at position 18 b While in ECS one has the capability of operating 10 radio sets at Cherry Point this is set up in the following manner ATCFacO P3722 1Q 7 1 2 ECS FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT RADIO 1 121 5 MHz VHF GUARD RADIO2 243 0 MHz UHF GUARD RADIO 3 128 625 MHz VHF PRIMARY RADIO4 268 7 MHz APPROACH RADIO5 340 2 MHz UHF PRIMARY RADIO6 TWR 211 VHF DIALABLE RADIO7 TWR 171 UHF DIALABLE RADIO 8 IFR 211 VH

FACILITY MANUAL Air Traffic Control

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents